Nokia N97 N97 User Manual
Nokia N97 mini User Guide Issue 3
Contents Safety 6 About your device 6 Office applications 7 Network services 7 Shared memory 7 ActiveSync 7 Magnets and magnetic fields 7 Find help 8 Support 8 In-device help 8 Do more with your device 8 Update device software 9 Settings 10 Access codes 10 Remote lock 10 Prolong battery life 10 Free memory 11 Get start ed 13 Keys and parts (front) 13 Keys and parts (back) 13 Keys and parts (sides) 14 Keys and parts (top) 14 Insert the SIM card and battery 14 Memory card 15 Antenna locations 16 Switch the device on and off 16 Charge the battery 17 Headset 18 Attach wrist s trap 19 Touch screen actions 19 Write text 20 Lock the keys and touch screen 23 Nokia Switch 24 Profiles 25 Your dev ice 26 Home screen 2 6 Display indicators 27 Shortcuts 28 Search 29 Volume and loudspeaker control 29 Offline profile 30 Fast downloading 30 Ovi (network service) 31 Make calls 34 Proximity sensor 34 Voice calls 34 During a call 34 Voice and video mailboxes 35 Answer or reject a call 35 Make a conference call 35 Speed dial a phone number 36 Call waiting 36 Voice dialling 36 Make a vid eo call 37 During a vide o call 37 Answer or reject a video call 38 Internet calls 38 Video sharing 39 Log 41 2 Contents
Contacts (phonebook) 43 Save and edit names and numbers 43 Contacts toolbar 43 Manage names and numbers 43 Default numbers and addresses 43 Contact cards 44 Set contacts as favourit es 44 Ringing tones, images, and call text for contacts 44 Copy contacts 45 SIM services 45 Contact groups 46 Ovi Contacts 47 About Ovi Contacts 47 Start using Ovi Contacts 47 Connect to the service 47 Create and edit your profile 48 Find and add friends 48 Chat with your friends 49 Ovi Sync 50 Share your location 50 Ovi Contacts set tings 50 Nokia account settings 51 Presence settings 51 Personalisation settings 52 Connection settings 52 Messaging 53 Messaging main view 53 Write and send messages 53 Messaging inbox 54 Mailbox 55 View messages on a SIM card 56 Cell broadcast messages 57 Service commands 57 Messaging settings 57 Mail for Exchange 61 Connectivity 62 Data connections and access points 62 Network settings 62 Wireless LAN 63 Access points 64 Active data connections 67 Synchronisation 67 Bluetooth connectivity 68 USB 71 PC connections 71 Administra tive settings 71 Internet 73 Browse the web 73 Browser toolbar 73 Navigate pages 74 Web feeds and blogs 74 Content search 74 Bookma rks 75 Empty the cache 75 End the connection 75 Connection security 75 Web settings 76 Position ing (GPS) 78 About GPS 78 Assisted GPS (A -GPS) 78 Hold your device correctly 79 3 Contents
Tips on creating a GPS connection 79 Position requests 80 Landmarks 80 GPS dat a 80 Positioning settings 81 Maps 83 Maps overview 83 About positioning methods 83 Use the compass 84 View your location and th e map 84 Map view 85 Change the look of the map 85 Find a location 85 View location details 86 Plan a route 86 Save places and routes 87 View and organise places or routes 88 Send places to your friends 88 Synchronise your Favourites 8 8 Share location 89 Get voice guidance 89 Walk to your destination 90 Drive to your destination 90 Get traffic and safety information 91 Download and update maps 91 Camera 92 Image capture 92 Video recording 96 Camera settings 96 Photos 98 About Photos 98 View images and videos 98 View and edit file details 99 Organise images and video clips 99 Photos toolbar 99 Albums 100 Tags 100 Slide show 100 TV-out mode 101 Edit images 101 Edit video clips 102 Image print 102 Share online 103 Music 104 Play a song or a podcast 104 Playlists 105 Podcasts 105 Transfer music from a computer 106 Nokia Music Store 106 Nokia Podcasting 106 FM radio 109 Videos 111 Download and view video clips 111 Video feeds 112 My videos 112 Transfer videos from your PC 112 Video settings 112 Personalise your device 114 Change the look of your device 114 Profiles 114 4 Contents
3-D tones 114 Modify the home screen 115 Modify the main menu 115 Applications 116 Calendar 116 Clock 117 RealPlayer 117 Recorder 119 Notes 119 Office 119 Settings 124 Phone settings 124 Application manager 130 Calling settings 132 Troubleshoot ing 134 Green tips 137 Save energy 137 Recycle 137 Save paper 137 Learn more 137 Product and safety informatio n 137 Index 144 5 Contents
Safety Read these simple guidelines . Not following them may be dangerous or illegal. Read the complete user guide for further information. SWITCH ON SAFELY Do not switch the device on when wireless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger. ROAD SAFETY CO MES FIRST Obey all local laws. Alwa ys keep your hands free to operate the vehicle while driving. Your first consideration while driving should be road safety. INTERFERENCE All wireless devices may be suscepti ble to interference, whic h could affect perform ance. SWITCH OFF IN R ESTRICTED ARE AS Follow any restrict ions. Switch the device off in aircraft, near medical equipment, fuel, chemicals, or blasting area s. QUALIFIED SERVICE Only qualified personnel may install or repair this product. ACCESSORIES AN D BATTERIES Use only approved accesso ries and batteries. Do not connect incompatible products. WATER-RESISTAN CE Your device is not water-resistant. Keep it dry. About your device The wirele ss device de scribe d in this guide is approved for use on the (E)GSM 850, 9 00, 1800,1900, a nd UMTS 900, 1900, 2100 networks. Contact your service provider for more information about networks. Your device supports severa l connectivity methods and like computers may be exposed to viruses and other harmful content. Ex ercise caution with me ssages, connectivity requests, browsing, and downloa ds. Only install and use services and software from trustworthy sources that offer adequate securit y and protection, such as applications th at are Symbian Signed or h ave passed the Java Verified⢠testing. Co nsider installing antivirus and other security software on your device and any connecte d computer. Your device may have preinstalled bookmarks and links for third-party internet sites an d may allow you to access third-party sites. These ar e not affiliated with Nokia, and Nokia does not endorse or assu me liability for them. If you access such sites, take preca utions for security or content. 6 Safety
Warning: To use any features in this device, other than the alarm clock, the device must be sw itched on. Do not switch the device on when wireless device use may cause interference or danger. When using this device, obey all laws and respect local customs, privacy and legitimate rights of others, including copyrights. Copyright protection may prevent some images, music, and othe r content from being copied, modified, or transferred. Make back-up copies or keep a written record of all important information stored in your device. When connecting to any other device, read its user guide for detailed safety inst ructions. Do not connect incompatible products. The images in this guide may differ from your device display. Refer to the user guide for othe r important informat ion about your device. Office applicatio ns The office applications support common features of Microsoft Word, PowerPoint, and Excel (Microsoft Office 2000, XP, and 2003). Not all file forma ts are supported. Network services To use the device you must have service from a wireless service provider. Some features are not available on all networks; other features may require that you make specific arrangements with your service provider to use them. Network services invo lve transmission of data. Check with your service provid er for details about fees in your home network and when roaming on other networks. Your service provider can explain what charges will apply. Some networks may have limitation s that affect how you can use some features of this device requiring network support such as support for specific te chnologies like WAP 2.0 protocols (HTTP and SSL) that run on TCP/IP protocols and la nguage-dependent charac ters. Your service provider may ha ve requested that certain features be disabled or not activated in your device. If so, these features will not appear on your device menu. Your device may also have cus tomized items such as menu names, menu order, and icons. Shared memory The following features in th is device may share memory: multimedia messaging (MMS), e-mail application, instant messaging. Use of one or mo re of these features may reduce the memory available for the remaining features. If your device displays a message that t he memory is full, delete some of the inform ation stored in the shared memory. ActiveSync Use of the Mail for Exchange is limited to over-the-air synchronisation of PIM info rmation between the Nokia device and the authorised Microsoft Exchange server. Magnets and magnetic fields Keep your device away from magnets or magnetic fields. 7 Safety
Find help Support When you want to learn more about how to use your product or you are unsure how your dev ice should function, see the supp ort pages at www. nokia.com/ support or your local Nokia website, www. nokia.mobi/ support (with a mobile device), the Help applicati on in the device, or the user guide. If this does not resolve your issue, do one of the following: ⢠Restart the device: switch off the device, an d remove the battery. After about a minute, replace the battery, and switch on the device. ⢠Restore the original factor y settings as explained in the user guide. Your do cuments and files will be deleted in the reset, s o back up your data first. ⢠Update your device software regularly for optimum performance and possible ne w features, as explained in the user guide. If your issue remains unsolved, contact Nokia for repair options. See www.nokia.com/rep air. Before sending your device for repair, always back up the data in your device. In-device help Your device contains instructions to help to use the applications in your device. To open help texts from the main menu, select Menu > Applications > Help and the application for which you want to read instructions. When an application is open, to access the help text for the current view, select Optio ns > Help . When you are reading the instructions, to change the size of the help text, select Options > Decrease font size or Increase font s ize . You may find links to related topics at the end of the h elp text. If you select an underlined word, a short explanation is displayed . Help texts use the following indicators: Link to a related help topic. Link to the application being discussed. When you are reading the instructions, to switch betw een help texts and the applicat ion t hat is open in the background, select Options > Show open apps. and the desired application. Do more with y our device There are various applications provided by Nokia and third party software developers, th at help you do more with your device. To find and down load applications, visit the Ovi Store at store.ovi.com. These applications are explained in the guides that are available on the product support pages at www.n okia.com/support or your local Nokia website. 8 Find help
Update device software Software updat es over th e air Select Menu > Applications > SW update . With Software update (netwo rk service), you can check if there are updates available fo r your device software or applications, and download th em to your device. Downloading software up dates may involve the transmission of large amounts of data (network service). Make sure that the device ba ttery has enough power, or connect the charger before st arting the update. Warning: If you install a software upda te, you cannot use the device, even to make emergency calls , until the installation is completed and the device is restarted. Be sure to back up data before accepting ins tallation of an update. After updating your device software or applications using Software update, the instru ctions related to the updated applications in the user guid e or the helps may no longer be up to date. To download the available up dates, select . To unmark specific updates that you do not want to download, select the updates fro m the list. To view information on an update, select the upda te and . To view the status of previou s updates, select . Select Options and from the following: Update via PC â Update your device using a PC. This option replaces the Start up date option when up dates are only available using the Nokia Software Updater PC application. View update history â View the status of previous updates. Settings â Change the settings, such as the default access point used for downloading upda tes. Disclaimer â View the Nokia licence agreement. Software updates using your P C Nokia Software Updater is a PC application that en ables you to update your device so ftware. To update yo ur device software, you need a compatible PC, broadband internet access, and a compatible US B data cable to connect your device to the PC. To get more information , to check the release notes for the latest software v ersions, and to download the N okia Software Updater applic ation, see www.nokia.com/ softwareupdate or your local Nokia website. To update the device software, do the following: 1 Download and install the Nokia Software Updater application to your PC. 2 Connect your device to the PC using a USB data cable, and select PC Suit e mode . 3 Open the Nokia Software Updater application. The Nokia Software Updater application guides y ou to back up your files, update the software, and restore your files. 9 Find help
Settings Your device normally has MMS, GPRS, streaming, and mobile internet settings automatica lly configured, based on your network service provider information. You may have settings from your service providers already installed in your device, or you may receive or request the settings from the network service providers as a special message. You can change the general se ttings in your device, such as language, standby mode, display, and keypad lock settings. Access codes If you forget any of the access codes, contact your service provider. Personal identification numb er (PIN) code â This code protects your SIM card ag ainst unauthorise d use. The PIN code (4 to 8 digits) is usually su pplied with the SIM card. After three consecutive incorr ect PIN code entries, the code is blocked, and you need the PUK code to unblock it. UPIN code â This code may be supplied with the USIM card. The USIM card is an enhanced version of the SIM card and is supported by UMTS mobile phones. PIN2 code â This code ( 4 to 8 digits) is supplied with some SIM cards, and is requi red to access some funct ions in your devic e. Lock code (also known as security code) â The lock code helps you to protect your device against unauthorised use. The preset code is 12345. You can create and change the code, and set the device to re quest the code. Keep the new code secret and in a safe place separate from your device. If you forget the code and your device is locked, your device will require service. Additional charges may apply, and all the personal data in your device may be deleted. For more information, contact a Nokia Care point or your device dealer. Personal Unblocking Key (PUK) code and PUK2 code â These codes (8 digits) are required to change a blocked PIN code or PIN2 code, respectively. If the codes are not supplied with the SI M card, conta ct the opera tor whose SIM card is in your device. UPUK code â This code (8 digi ts) is required to change a blocked UPIN code. If the co de is no t supplied with the USIM card, contact the operator whose USIM card is in your devic e. Remote lock To prevent unauthorised use of your device, you can lock your device and memory card remotely using a text message. You must define the text message, and to lock your device, send the text message to you r device. To unlock your device, you need the lock code. To enable remote locking, and to define the text message, select Menu > Settings and Phone > Phone mgmt. > Security settings > Phone and SIM card > Re mote phone loc king > Enabled . Tap the text input field to enter the text message content (5-2 0 characters), select , and verify the message. Enter the lock code. Prolong batte ry life Many features in your devi ce increase the demand on battery power and reduce the ba ttery lifetime. To save battery power, note the following: 10 Find help
⢠Features that use Bluetooth technology, or allowing such features to run in the background w hile using other features, increase the demand on battery power. Dea ctivate Bluetooth technolog y when you do not need it. ⢠Features that use wireless LA N (WLAN), or allowing such features to run in the background w hile using other features, increase the demand on battery power. WLAN on your Nokia devi ce deactivates when you are not trying to connect, not connected to an access point, or not scanni ng for available networ ks. To further reduce batt ery consum ption, you ca n specify that your dev ice does not scan , or scans less often, for available networks in the background. ⢠If you have set Packet data connection to When available in connection settings, and there is no packet data coverage (GPR S), the device periodically tries to establish a packet data connection. To prolong the operating time of your device, select Packet data connection > When n eeded . ⢠The Maps application downloads new map information when you scroll to new areas on the map, which increases th e demand on battery power. You can prevent the automatic dow nload of new maps. ⢠If the signal strength of the cellular network varies much in your area, your device must scan for the available network rep eatedly. This increases the demand on battery power. If the network mode is set to dual mode in the network settings, the device searches for the 3G net work. You can set the device to use only the GSM network. T o use only the GSM network, select Menu > Settings and Connectivity > Ne twork > Ne twork mode > GS M . ⢠The backlight of the di spla y increases the demand on battery power. In the display setti ngs, you can change the length of the time-out period after w hich the backlight is switched off. Select Menu > Settings and Phone > Display > Light time-out . To adjust th e light sensor that observes lighting conditions and adjusts the display brightness, in the display settings, select Light se nsor . ⢠Leaving applications running in the background increases the demand on ba ttery power. To close the applications you are not using, if they are not responding, select Options > Show open apps. , and go to the application usin g the menu key. Press and hold the menu key to open the application , and select Options > Exi t . Free memory To view how much space is available for different data types, select Menu > Applications > Office > File mgr. . Many features of the device use memory to store data. The device notifies you if the memory in different memory locations is low. To free memory , transfer data to a compatible m emory card (if available) or to a co mpatible computer. To remove data you no longer need, use File manager or open the respective applicat ion. You can remove the following: ⢠Messages in the folders in Messa ging and retrieved e- mail messages in the mailbox 11 Find help
⢠Saved web pages ⢠Contact information ⢠Calendar notes ⢠Applications shown in Application manager that you do not need ⢠Installation files (.sis or .s isx) of applications you have installed. Transfer the in sta llation files to a compatible computer. ⢠Images and video clips in Photos. Back up the files to a compatible comput er. 12 Find help
Get started Note: The surface of this device does not contain nickel in the platings. The surface of this device cont ains stainless steel. Keys and parts (front) 1 Proximity sensor 2 Earpiece 3 Touch screen 4 Menu key 5 Call key 6 Secondary camera lens 7 Light sensor 8 End key Do not cover the area above the touch screen, for example, with protective film or tap e. Keys and parts (back) 1 Camera flash 2 Camera lens 13 Get started
Keys and parts (sid es) 1 Stereo speaker 2 Charging indicator light 3 Micro USB connector 4 Lock switch 5 Volume up/Zoom in key 6 Volume down/Zoom out key 7 Capture key Keys and part s (top) 1 Power key 2 Nokia AV connector (3.5 mm) Insert the SI M card and battery Follow the instructions carefu lly, to avoid damaging the back cover. Safe removal. Always switch the device off and disconnect the charger before removing the batt ery. 1 Remove the back cover by lifting it from the bottom end of the device. 2 If the battery is inserted , lift the battery in the direction of the arrow to remove it. 3 Pull out the SIM card holder , and insert the SIM card. Ensure that the gold-colou red contact area on the card is facing down and that the bev elled corner on the card is facing the bevelled corner on the holder. Push the SIM card holder back in. 14 Get started
4 Align the contacts of the ba ttery with the corresponding connectors on the battery compartment, and insert the battery in the direction of the arrow. 5 To replace the back cov er, direct the top locki ng catches toward their slots, an d press down until the cover locks into place. Memory card Use only compatible microSD cards ap proved by Nokia for use with this device. Noki a uses approved industry standards for memory cards, but some brands may not be fully compatible with this de vice. Incompatible cards may damage the card and the device and corrupt da ta stored on the card. Insert the memory card A memory card may be alread y inserted in the device. If not, do the following: 1 Remove the back cover of the device. 2 Insert a compatible memory card in the slot. Ensure that the contact area on the card is facing down and towards the slot. 15 Get started
3 Push the car d in. You can hear a click when the card locks into place. 4 Replace the back cover . K eep the device facing down when replacing the cover. Ensure that the cover is prop erly c lose d. Remove the m emory card Importa nt: Do not remove the memory card during an operation when the card is being accessed. Doing so may damage the memory card and the device, and corrupt data stored on the card. 1 Before you remove the card, pr ess the power key, and select Remove memory card . All applications are closed. 2 When Removing memory card will close all open applications. Remove anyway? is displayed, select Yes . 3 When Remove memory card and press 'OK' is displayed, remove the back cover of the device. 4 Press the memory card to release it from the slot. 5 Pull out the memory card. If the device is switched on, select OK . 6 Replace the back cover . Ensure that the cover is prop erly c lose d. Antenna locations Your device may have internal and exte rnal antennas. Avoid touching the anten na area unnecessaril y while the antenna is transmitting or receiving. Contact with antennas affects the communicat ion quality and may cause a higher power level during operation and may reduce the battery life. Switch the device on and off To switch on the device: 1 Press and hold the power key. 16 Get started
2 If the device asks for a PIN code or lock code, enter it, and select OK . The preset lo ck code is 12345 . If you forget the code and your device is locked, your device will require service and additional ch arges may apply. For more information, contact a Nokia Care point or your device dealer. To switch off th e device, press th e power key briefly, and select Switch off! . Charge the b attery Your battery has been partially charged at the factory. There may not be a need to charge the battery in advance. If the device indicates a low ch arge, do the following: Regular charging 1 Connect the charge r to a wall outlet. 2 Connect the charger to the device. The charging indicator light next to the USB connector is lit when the battery is being charged. 3 When the device indicates a full charge, disconnect the charger from the device, th en from the wall outlet. You do not need to charge the battery for a specifi c length of time, and you can us e the de vice while it is charging. If the battery is com pletely disc harged, it may take several minutes before the charging indicator a ppears on the display or before any calls can be made. Tip: Disconnect the charger from the wall outlet when the charger is not in use. A charge r that is connected to the outlet consumes power even when it is not connected to the device. USB charging You can use USB charging w hen a wall outlet is not available. With USB charg ing, you can also transfer dat a while charging the device. 1 Connect a compatible US B device to your device using a compatible USB cable. 17 Get started
The efficiency of USB chargi ng varies significantly. In some cases, it may take a very long time for charging to start and the device to start functioning. 2 If your device is switched on, you can select from the available USB mode options on the display of the device. Headset You can connect a compatible headset or compatible headphones to your device. You may ne ed to select the cable mode. Some headsets come in two parts, a remote control unit and headphones. A remote control unit ha s a microphone and keys to answer or end a phone call, adjust the volume, and play music or video files. To us e the headphones with a remote control unit, connect the unit to t he Nokia AV Connector in the device, then connect the headphones to the unit. Warning: When you use the headset, your abilit y to hear outside sounds may be affected. Do not use the headset where it can endanger your safety. Do not connect products that create an output signal as this may c ause dama ge to the device. D o not conn ect any voltage source to the Nokia AV Connector. When connecting any external device or any headset, other than those app roved by Nokia for use with this 18 Get started
device, to the Nokia AV Connector, pay special attention to volume levels. Attach wris t strap Thread the wrist strap, an d tighten it. Touch screen actions Use the touch screen with your finger or with a stylus (if available). Important: Use only a stylus approved by Nokia for use with this device. Using any other s tylus may invalidate an y warranty applying to the devi ce and may damage the touch screen. Avoid scratching the touch screen. Never us e an actual pen or pencil or other sharp objects to write on the touch screen. Tap and double-t ap To open an application o r other element on the touch screen, you normally tap it with your finger. However, to open the following items, you must tap them twice. ⢠List items in an app lication, such as the Drafts folder in the Messaging appli cation. ⢠Files in a file list, for exam ple, an image in the Captured folder in the Photos application. Tip: When you open a list view, the first item is already highlighted. To open the hi ghlighted item, tap it once. If you tap a file or similar item once, it is not opened, it becomes highlighted. To see the op tions available for the item, select Options or, if available, select an icon from a toolbar. Select In this user docu mentation, to open applications or items by tapping them once or twic e, you "select" them. If you need to select several item s in a sequence, th e display texts to select are separated by arrows. Example: To select Options > Help , tap Optio ns , and then tap Help . Drag To drag, plac e your finger on the screen, and slide it acr oss the screen. Example: To scroll up or down on a web page, drag the page with your finger. 19 Get started
Swipe To swipe, slide your finger quickly left or right on the screen. Flick To flick, place your finger on the screen, slide it quickly across the screen, then quickly lift your finger. The content of the screen will continue scrolling with the speed and direction it had at the moment of release. To select an item from a scrolling list and to stop the movement, tap the item. In your device, flicking is availa ble in Music player. Scroll To scroll up or down in lists th at have a scroll bar, drag the slider of the scroll bar. In some list views, you can place your finger on a list i tem and drag up or down. Tip: To view a brief description of an icon, place your finger on the icon. Descriptions are n ot available for all icons. Touch screen backlight To turn the screen backlig h t on, unlock the screen and keys, if necessary, a nd press the menu key. Write text You can enter text in several ways. When the slide is open, the full keyboard works as a traditional keyboard. When the slide is closed, you can use the virtual keypad to enter text, or use handwriting mode to write chara cters directly on the s creen. To open th e virtual keypad , select any text input field. To switch between the virtua l keypad and hand writing mode, select and the desired input mode. The input methods and lan guages supported by the handwriting recognition vary by regio n. 20 Get started
Keyboard input Keyboard Your device has a full keyboa rd. To open the keyboard, push the touch screen up. In all applications, the screen rotates automatically from port rait to landscape when y ou open the keyboard. 1S y m k e y . To insert special ch aracters not shown on the keyboard, press the sym key once, and select the desired character from the table . 2 Function key . To insert special characters printed at the top of keys, press the function key, an d then press the corresponding alphabet key, or press and hold the alphabet key only. To enter several special characters in a row, press the function key twice quickly, and then press the desired alphabet keys. To return to normal mode, press the function key once. 3S h i f t k e y . To change between uppercase and lowercase modes, press the sh ift key twice. To enter a single uppercase letter in lowercase mode, or a single lowercase letter in upperc ase mode, press the shift key once, and then the desired alphabet key. 4S p a c e k e y 5A r r o w k e y s . To move up, down, left, or right, use the arrow keys. 6E n t e r k e y 7 Backspace key . To erase a char acter, press the backspace key. To erase several char acters, press and hold the backspace key. 21 Get started
Insert lett ers not shown on the keyboard It is possible to insert variations of letters, for example, letters with accents. To inse rt á, press and hold the sym key, and sim ultaneously pres s the A key repeatedly, until the desired character is displayed. The order and availability of letters de pe nds on the selected writing language. Touch input Handwr iting To activate handwriti ng mode, tap and Handwr iting . Write legible, upright characters on the text input area, and leave a space between each character. To teach the device your handwrit ing style, tap and Handwritin g training . To enter letters and numbers (default mode), write words as you would normally. To select nu mber mode, tap in the right pane of the input area. To enter non-Latin characters, tap the corresponding i con, if available. To write special characters, write them as you would normally. You can also tap in the right pane of the input area, and select a desired chara cter from the pop-up table. To delete characters or move the cursor back, swipe backwards (see Figure 1). To insert a space, swipe forwards (s ee Figure 2). Touch input settings Select Menu > Sett ings and Phone > Touch input . To configure text input sett ing s for the touch screen, select from the following: Handwrit ing traini ng â Open the handwriting tra ining application. Train th e device to recognise your handwriting better. This opt ion is not available in all languages. Writing languag e â Define which language-specific characters in your handwrit ing are recognised and ho w your on-screen keyb oard is laid out. Writin g speed â Adjust the speed at which ha ndwriting is recognised. Guiding line â Show or hide the guiding line in the writing area. The guiding line helps you write in a straight line, and it also helps the device recognise your writing. Pen trail wi dth â Change the thickness of the text written with the stylus. 22 Get started
Writing colour â Chan ge the colour of the text written with the sty lus. Icons and funct ions Use the on-screen keypad ( Alphanumeric keypad ) to enter characters like y ou would with a t raditional phone keypad with numbers on the keys. For an explanation of each icon and its function , see the following figure. 1 Close - Closes on-screen keypad ( Alphanumeric keypad ). 2 Input menu - Opens th e touch input m enu, which includes commands such as Activate predictive text and Writing language . 3 Text input indicator - Op ens a pop-up window, in which you can turn predicti v e text input modes on or off, change the character case, and switch between letter and number mode. 4 Input mode - Opens a pop -up window, in which you can select from the availa ble input modes. When you tap an item, the current inpu t method view closes, a nd the selected one opens. 5 Arrow keys - Moves the cursor left or right. 6 Backspace - Deletes the previously entered character. 7 Number keys - Enters the desired numbers or characters according to the current case and input mode. 8 Star - Opens a specia l char acters table. 9 Shift - Changes the character case, turns predicti ve text input modes on or off, and switches between the alphabet and number modes. Lock the keys and touch scre en When the device or keypad is locked, calls may be possible to the official emergency number programmed into your device. To lock or unlock the touch screen and the keys, slide the lock switch on the side of the device. When the touch screen and keys are locked, the touch screen is turned off and the keys are inactive. To modify settings for automatic screen and key locking, select Menu > Settings an d Phone > Pho ne mgmt. > Auto. keygu ard . 23 Get started
Nokia Swi tch Transfer conten t You can use the Switch applic ation to copy content su ch as phone numbe rs, addresses, calendar items, and images from your previous Nokia device to your de vice. The type of content that can be transferred depends on the model of the device from which you want to transfer content. If that device supports synchronisation, you can also synchronise data between the devices. Your device notifies you if the other device is not compatible. If the other device cannot be switched on without a SIM card, you can insert your SIM card in it. When your device is switched on without a SI M card, the Offline profile is automatically activated, and transfer can be done. Transfer conten t for the first time 1 To retrieve data from the other device for the first time, on your device, select Menu > Se ttings > Connectivity > Data transfer > Phone s witch . 2 Select the connection type you want to use to transfer the data. Both devi ces must support the sele cted connection type. 3 If you select Bluetooth connectivity as t he connection type, connect the two devices. To have your device search for devices with Bluetooth connectivity, select Continue . Select the device from which you want to transfer content. You are as ked to enter a code on your device. Enter a code (1-16 digits), and select OK . Enter the same code on the other device, and select OK . The devices are now paired. Some earlier No kia devices may not have the S witch application. In this case, th e Switch application is sent to the other device as a message. To install the Switch application on the other device, open the message, and follow the instructions on the display. 4 On your device, select the content you want to trans fer from the other device. When the transfer has started, you can canc el it and continue later. Content is transferred from the memory of the other device to the corresponding location in your device. The transfer time depends on the amount of data to be transferred. Synchronise, retrieve, or send conte nt Select Menu > Sett ings > Connectivity > Dat a transfer > Ph one switch . After the first transfer, s elect from the following to start a new transfer, depending on the model: to synchronise content between your device a nd the other device, if the other device supports synchronisation. The sync hronisation is two-way. If an item is deleted in one device, it is deleted in both. You cannot restore deleted items with synchronisation. to retrieve content from the oth er device to your device. With retriev al, content is tra nsferred from the other device to your device. You may be asked to keep or delete the original content in the other device, depending on the device model. to send content from your device to your other device 24 Get started
If you cannot send an item, depending on the type of the other device, you can add the item to the Nokia folder, to C:\Nokia or E:\Nokia in your devi ce. When you selec t the folder to transfer, the item s are synchronised in the corresponding folder in the other device, and vice versa. Use shortcuts to repeat a transfer After a data transfer, you can save a shortcut with the transfer settings to the ma in view to repeat the same transfer later. To edit the shortcut, select Options > Shortcut settings . For example, you can cr eate or change the name of the shortcut. A transfer log is shown af ter every transfer. To view the log of the last transfer, select a shortcut in th e main view and Options > View log . Handle transfer conflicts If an item to be transferred has been edited in both devices, the device attemp ts to merg e the changes automatically. If this is not possible, there is a transfer conflict. Select Check one by one , Pr iority t o this phone , or Priority to other phone to solve the conflict. Profiles Select Menu > S ettings and Profiles . You can use pr ofiles to se t and customise the ringing tones, message a lert tones, and oth er tones for different events, environments, or calle r groups. The name of the selected profile is displayed at the top of the home screen. To change a profile, scroll to the profile, and select Options > Activate . To personalise a profile, scroll to the profile, and select Options > Personalise . Select the sett ing you wa nt to change. To set the profile to be active until a certa in time within the next 24 hou rs, scroll to the profile, s elect Options > Timed , and set t he time. When the time expires, the profile changes back to the previo usly acti ve non- timed profile. When the profile is timed, is displayed in the home screen. The Offline profile cannot b e timed. To create a new profile, select Options > Cr eate new . 25 Get started
Your device Home screen About the h ome screen In the hom e screen, you can quickly access your m ost frequently used appl ications, control applications, such as the music player, view your favourite contacts, and view at a glance if you have missed calls or new messages. Interactive h ome screen elem ents To open the clock application, tap the clock (1). To open calendar or change profiles in the home screen, tap the date or the profile name (2) . To view or change connectivity settings ( ), to see the av a il a bl e w ir e le ss L A Ns i f W L A N s c an ni n g is e na b le d , o r to view the missed events, tap the top right corner (3). To make a phone call, select (4). To open the main menu, press the menu key (5). To hide and show content, swipe the home screen with your finger. Add item s to the hom e screen To add an item to the home screen, select Options > Edit content > Options > Add content , and select the item from the list. Using widgets may involve th e transmission of large amounts of data (network service). To move an item, select Options > Ed it content , select the desired item, and drag and drop it to a new location. Remove an it em from the home screen Select Options > Edit content and the item to be remov ed. Select Options > Remove > Done . E-mail notifications About e-mail notifications E-mail notifications in the home screen help you keep track o f e - m a i l m e s s a g e s i n y o u r mailbox. You can set the device to show a preview of e-mail headers or just the number of unread e-mail. 26 Your device
Work with e-ma il in the home scr een To add e-mail to the home screen, in the home screen, select Options > Edit content > Option s > Add content > E-mail widget . To set up your e-mail accoun t, in the home screen, select Set up e-mai l , and follow the instructions. When the setup is complete, the e-mai l icon appears in the home screen. To open your e-mail mailbox, tap the icon. Music player in the home screen You can use the music player from the home s creen. To activate the music player con trols, select Opti ons > Edit content > Op tions > Add content > Music player . Go to Music appears in the home screen. To open the music player, tap Go to Music , and select the items you want to listen to. The music player control keys, an d, if available, the title of the song, a rtist, and albu m art are dis played when a so ng is played. Favourite contacts in t he home scre en You can add sev eral contacts di rectly to the home screen, and quickly make calls or send messages t o the contacts, view the contacts' web feeds, or access the contact information and settings. 1 To add your favourite con t acts to the ho me screen, select Optio ns > Edit conte nt > Options > Add content > Favourit e contacts . A row of icons is displayed in the home screen. 2 Select any of the icons ( ) and a contact from Contacts. Add your favourite Share online feed to your home screen By adding the Share online widget to your home screen, you can quickly access your favourite Share online feed. 1 In the home screen, select Options > Edit content > Options > Add content > Share onli ne . 2 Select the feed you want to add. You may need to register to a service of your service provider before you are able to add a feed. The widget displays thumbn ail images from a selec ted feed of any of your Share online accounts. The latest images are displayed fi rst. Display indicators The device is being used in a GSM network (network service). The device is being used in a UMTS network (network service). You have one or more unread messages in the Inbox folder in Messaging. You have received new e-mail in the remote mailbox. There are messages waiting to be sent in the Outbox folder. 27 Your device
You have missed calls. The ringing type is set to Silent, and the m essage and e-mail alert tones are turned off. A timed profil e is active. The touch screen and keys are locked. A clock alarm is active. The second phone line is being used (network service). All calls to the device are diverted to another number (network service) . If you have two phone lines, a number indicates the active line. Your device is connected to a network via wireless LAN or UMTS (network se rvice) and ready for an internet call. A compatible headset is connected to the device. A compatible TV out cable is connected to the device. A compatible text phone is connected to t he device. A data call is active (network service). A GPRS packet data connec tion is active (network service). indicates that the connection is on hold and that a connection is av ailable. A packet data connection is active in a part of t he network that supports EG PRS (network service). indicates that the conn ection is on hold and that a connection is avai lable. The icons indicate that EGPRS is available in th e network, but your device is not necessarily using an EGPRS connection to transfer data . A UMTS packet data connection is active ( network service). indicates that the connection is suspended and that a connection is being established. High-speed downlink packet access (HSDPA) is supported and active (network service). indicates that the connecti on is suspended and that a connection is bei ng established. You have set the device to scan for wi reless LA Ns, and a wireless LAN is available (network service). A wireless LAN connection is active in a network that uses encryption. A wireless LAN connection is active in a network that does not use encryption. Bluetooth connectivity is a ctivated. Data is bein g transm itted using Bluetooth connectivity. When the indicator is blinking, your device is trying to conne ct with another device. A USB connection is active. Synchronisation is in progress. GPS is active. Shortcuts To switch between open applications, press and hold the menu key. Leaving applications running in the background increases the demand on battery power and reduces the battery life. To open the browser applicat ion, in the dialler, tap and hold 0 . To change the profile, press the po wer key, and select a profile. 28 Your device
To call your voice mailbox (net work service), in the dialler, tap and hold 1 . To open a list of last dialle d numbers, in the home screen, press the call key. To use voice commands, in the home screen, press and hold the call key. When writing, to change the writing language, p ress and the sym key. Search About Search Select Menu > Applications > Search . Search enables yo u to use va rious internet-based search services to find, for example, websites, and images . The content and availability of the services may vary. Start a search Select Menu > Applications > Search . To search the contents of yo ur mobile device, enter search terms in the search field, or browse the content categories. While you enter the search term s, the results are organised into categories. The most rece ntly accessed results appear at the top of the re sult list, if th ey match your se arch terms. To search for web pages on the intern et, select Search the Internet and a searc h provider, and enter your s earch terms in the se arch field. Th e search provider you selected is set as your default in ternet search provider. If a default search provider is already set, select it to start a search, or select More search services to use anot her search provider. To change the default sea rch provider, select Options > Settings > Search services . To change the country or re gion setting to find more search providers, select Options > Sett ings > Country or region . Search settings Select Menu > Applications > Search . To change the Search a pplication settings, select Options > Settin gs and from the following: Country or region â Select the country or region you want to search from . Connection â Select the access p oint, and allow or deny network connections. Search services â Select whether service providers and search categories are shown. General â Enable or disable tooltips, and clear the search history. Volume and loudspeaker control To adjust the volume level wh en you have an active call or are listening to a sound clip, use the volume key. 29 Your device
The built-in loudspeaker allo ws you to speak and listen from a short dis tance without having to hold the device to your ear. To use the loudspeaker during a call, select Act ivate loudsp . . To turn off the loudspeaker, select Activate handset . Offline prof ile To activate the offline profil e, press the po wer key briefly, and select Offlin e . The offline profile lets yo u use the device without connecting to the wireless cellular network. When you activate the offline profile, the connection to the cellular network is turned off, as indicated by in the signal strength indicator area. All radio frequency (RF) sign als to and from the device to t he cellular network are prevented. If you try to send messages using th e cellular network, they are placed in the Outbox folder to be sent later. When the offline profile is ac tive, you can use your device without a SIM card. If the SIM card is not pr operly in place, the device starts in the offline profile. Important: In the Offline profile you cannot make or receive any calls, or use other features that require cellular network coverage. Calls may still be possible to the official emergency number programmed into your device. To make calls, you must first activate the p hone function by changing profiles. If the device has been locked, enter the lock code. When you have activated the o ffline profile, you can still use the wireless LAN, for exam ple, to read your e-mail or browse on the internet. Yo u can also use Bluetooth connectivity while in the offline profile. Remember to comply with any applicable safety requirements when establishing and using a wi reless LAN or Bluetooth connections. To switch to another profile, press the power key briefly, and select anot her profile. Th e devi ce re-enables wireless transmissions (prov iding there is sufficient signal strength). Fast downlo ading High-speed downlink packet access (HSDPA, also called 3.5G, indicated by ) is a network service in UMTS networks and provides high-speed data downloads. When HSDPA support in the device is activated an d the device is connected to a UMTS network that supports HSDPA, downloading data such as mess ages, e-mail, and browser pages through the cellular network may be faster. An active HSDPA connection is in dicated by . 30 Your device
You can activate or deactivate support for HSDPA in pa cket data setti ngs. For availability and subscription to data connection services, contact your service provider. HSDPA only affects the download sp eed; sending data to the network, s uch as messages and e-mail, is not affected. Ovi (network service) Open Ovi with your Nokia N97 mini Ovi is your door to different Nokia services. For a tour and more information, see www.ovi.com. Ovi store About Ovi S tore In Ovi Store, you can down load mobile games, applications, videos, images, and ringing tones to your device. Some of the items are free of charge; other s you need to purchase us ing your credit card or through your phone bill. Ovi Store offers you content that is compatible with your mobile device and relevant to your tastes and location. The content in Ovi Store is sorted into the following categories: ⢠Recommended ⢠Games ⢠Personalisation ⢠Applicati ons ⢠Audio & video Create a Nokia account When you create a Nokia Account , you can access Ovi and all its services with a s ing le user name and password. 1 Select Create a Nokia account . 2 Enter a user name. 3 Select your country from the list. 4 Enter your date of birth. 5 Enter your e-mail address or phone number. 6 Enter a passw ord, and confirm it. 7 Enter the characters displayed in th e box on the right. 8 Select Submit . Sign in to O vi Store Sign in Select Sign in , and enter your Nokia accou nt user name and passwo rd. Retrieve forgot ten user n ame or password Select Options > Re trieve . Search Ovi Store Items in Ovi Store are organi sed into categori es. You can browse the categ ories, or searc h with a keyword. You can also select the type of items you want to see: free or most popular items, or items recommended for you. 31 Your device
View details of an item Select an item to see detaile d information and other users' reviews. If you have signed in to Ovi Store, you can also write your own reviews. Read more revi ews from oth ers Select More reviews . Write a review Select the link to write a review, enter your review, and assign a rating to from 1 to 3 stars. View information about the publisher Select the publisher profile link. Find related items Select More related . Purchase content 1 Select the item you want to purchase. 2 Select Buy . 3 Enter yo ur Nokia account user na me and password . If you do not have an account, select Create a Nokia account , and enter the required information. 4 Select to pay using your credit card or through your phone bill. If you already have your credit card information stored in your Nokia account, and you want to use another credit card, select Edit payment settings , and enter the required information. To save your credit card information to your Nokia account, select the Save thi s card to my Nokia account check box. 5 Select the e-mail address to which you want to receive a receipt of your purchase. 6 Select Purchase . Share favourites with friends Ovi Store enables you to send a text message containing a link to items in Ovi Store. 1 Select the item you want to share. 2 Select Send to friend . 3 Enter a phone number in the international format. 4 Select Send . Report inappr opriate content Contact Nokia if you find inappropriate content in Ovi Store. 1 Select the item with inappropriate content. 2 Select Report issue . 3 Select the reason from the list, a nd enter additional details, if needed. 4 Select Submit . Edit the Ovi Store settings In the Ovi Store settings, yo u can change your ac count information, grant your friends permission to see your activities in Ovi Store, and change your password and security question. To change the Ovi Store settings, select Options > Settings and from the following: 32 Your device
Ovi sharing â Allow your Ovi contacts to se e your activities in Ovi Store. Account information â Change the details of your Nokia account. Change password â Change your Nokia account passwor d. Change security quest ion â Change the security question with which you can retri eve yo ur user name and password. Installation preferences â Sele ct how you wan t to install content in your device. 33 Your device
Make calls Proximity sensor Your device has a proximity sensor. To prevent accidental selections, the touch screen is disa bled automatic ally during calls when you place the device next to your ear. Do not cover the proximity sensor, for example, with protective film or tape. Voice calls 1 In the home screen, select or Dialler to open the dialler, and enter the ph one number, including the area code. To remove a number, select C . For international calls, select * twice for the character (which replaces the internati onal access code), and enter the country code, area code (omit the leading zero if necessary), and phone number. 2 To make the call, press the call key. 3 To end the call (or to cancel the call attempt ), press the end key. Pressing the end key always ends a call, even if another application is active. 1 To make a call from the contacts list, select Menu > Contacts . 2 Scroll to the desired name. Or, t ap the search field to enter the first lett ers or characters of the name, and scroll to the name. 3 To call the contact, press th e call key. If you hav e saved several numbers for a contact, select the desired number from the list, and press the call key. During a call To mute or unmute the microph one, select or . To put the call on hold or unhold it, select or . To activate the loudspeaker, select . If you have attached a compatible hea dset with Bluetooth connectivity, to route the sound to th e headset, select Options > Act ivate BT handsfree . To switch back to the handset, select . To end the call, select . To switch between the active and th e held call, select . Tip: When you have only one active voice call, to put the call on hold, press the call key. To activate the call, press the call key ag ain. To send DTMF tone strings (for example, a password), select Options > Send DTMF . Enter the DTMF string or search for it in the contacts list. 34 Make calls
To enter a wait character (w) or a pause character (p), press * repeatedly. To send the tone, select OK . You can add DT MF tones to the phone number or DTMF field in contact details. To end an active call and replace it by answerin g the waiting call, select Options > Replace . To end all your calls, select . Many of the options that yo u can use during a voice call are network services. Voice and video mailboxes To call your voice or video mailbox (network services, video mailbox available only in UMTS networks), in the home screen, select to open the dialler, tap and hold 1 , and select Voice mailbox or Video mailbox . 1 To change the phone num ber of your voice or video mailbox, select Menu > Settings and Calling > Call mailbox , a mailbox, and Options > Change number . 2 Enter the number (obtained from your networ k service provider), and select OK . Answer or reject a call To answer a call, press the ca ll key. If you do not want to answer a call, to reject the call, press the end key. If the call divert feature (network service) is activated, reject ing an incoming call also diverts the call. To mute the ring ing tone of an incoming call, select Silence . To send a reject call text message without actually rejecting the call, informin g the caller that you cannot answer the call, select Silence and Send msg. , edit the message text, a nd press the call key. To activate the reject call text mes sage feature, and to write a standard message, select Menu > Settings and Calling > Call > Reject call with message , and Message text . Make a conference call Your device supports conference calls between a maximum of six particip ants, including yourself. 1 Make a call to the first pa rticipant. 2 To make a call to another participan t, select Options > New call . The first call is put on hold. 3 When the new call is answered, to join the first participant in the conf erence call, select . To add a new person to the call, make a call to another participant, and add the new call to the conference call. To have a private conversat ion with one of the participants, select . 35 Make calls
Go to the participant, and select . The conference call is put on hold on your device. The other participants can still cont inue the conference call. To return to the conference call, select . To drop a participant, select , go to the partici pant, and select . 4 To end the active conference c all, press the end key. Speed dial a phone number To activate speed dialling, select Menu > Settings and Calling > Call > Speed dialling . To assign a phone number to one of the number keys: 1 Select Menu > Settings and Calling > Speed dialling . 2 Go to the key to which you want to assign the phone number, and select Options > Assign . 1 and 2 are reserved for the voice and video mailboxes if the network suppor ts these functions. To call in the home screen wh en speed dialling is active, select to open the dialler, and select and hold the assigned key num ber. Call wait ing You can answer a call when you h ave another call in progress. To activate call waiting (network service), select Menu > Settings and Calling > Call > Call waiting . 1 To answer the waiting call, press the call key. The first call is put on hold. 2 To switch between the two calls, select Options > Swap . 3 To connect a call on hold wi th an active call, and to disconnect yourself from the calls, select Option s > Transfer . 4 To end the active call, press th e end key. 5 To end both calls, select Options > End all calls . Voice dialling Your device automatically creates a voice tag for th e contacts. To listen to th e synthesised voice tag, select a contact and Opt ions > Voice tag details . Scroll to a contact detail, an d select Options > Play voice tag . Make a call with a voice tag Note: Using voice tags m ay be difficult in a noisy environment or during an em ergency, so you should not rely solely upon voice dialling in all circumstances. When you use voice dialling, the loudspeaker is in use. Hold the device at a short distance away when you say the voice tag. 1 To start voice dialling, in the home screen, press and hold the call key. If a co mpatible headset with the headset key is attached, p ress and hold the headset key to start voice dialling. 2 A short tone so unds, and Speak now is displayed. Say clearly the name th at is saved for th e contact. 36 Make calls
3 The device plays a syn thesised voice tag for the recognised contact in the selected device language, and displays the name an d number. To cancel the voice dialling, select Quit . If several numbers are sa ved for a name, you can say a lso the name and the number type, such as mobile or telephone. Make a video call When you make a video call (network service), you can see a real-time, two-way video between you and the recipient of the call. The live video im age, or video image captured by the camera in your device is shown to the video call recipient. T o b e a b l e t o m a k e a v i d e o c a l l , y o u m u s t h a v e a U S I M c a r d and be in the coverage of a UMTS network. For availability, pricing and subscription to video call services, contact your network service provider. A video call can only be made between two parties. The video call can be made to a compatible mobile device or an ISDN client. Video calls ca nnot be made while another voice, video, or data call is active. Icons You are not receiving video (the recipient is not sending video or the network is not transmitting it). You have denied vi deo se n ding from your device. To send a still image inste ad, select Menu > Settings and Callin g > Call > Image in vide o call . Even if you denied video sending during a video call, the call is still char ged as a video call. Check the pricing with your service provider. 1 In the home screen, select to open the dialler, a nd enter the phone number. 2 Select Options > Call > Video call . The secondary camera on the front is used by default for video calls. Starting a video call may take a while. If the call is not successful (f or example, video calls are not supported by the network, or the receiving device is not compatible), you are asked if you want to try a normal call or send a message instead. The video call is active when you see two video images, and hear t he soun d through the loudspeaker. The call recipient may deny video sending (indicated by ), and you only h ear th e voice of the caller and may see a still image or a grey screen. 3 To end the video call, press the end key. During a video call To change between showing video or hearing the voice of the caller only, select or . To mute or unmute the microphone, select or . To activate the loudspeaker, select . If you have attached a compatible hea dset with Bluetooth connectivity, to route the sound to the headset, select Options > Activate BT han dsfree . 37 Make calls
To switch back to the handset, select . To use the camera in the back of your device to send video, select Options > U se secondary camera . To switch back to the camera in the front of your device, select Options > U se main camera . To take a snapshot of the video you are s ending, select Options > Send snapshot . Video sending is paused and the snapshot is shown to th e recipient. The snap shot is not saved. To zoom your image in or out, select Options > Zoom . To change the vide o quality, select O ptions > Ad just > Video preference > Normal quality , Clearer detail or Smoother moti on . Answer or reject a video call When a video call arrives, is displayed. 1 To answer the video call, press the call key. 2 To start sending live video image, select Yes . If you do not activate the video sending, you only hear the voice of the caller. A grey sc reen replaces your own video image. To enable the video sending, select Option s > Enable > Sending video . To replace the grey screen with a still image captured by the camera in your device, select Menu > Settings and Calling > Call > Image in v ideo cal l . If you do not want to answer a video call, press the end key. Internet calls About internet calls With the internet call networ k service, you can make and receive calls over the internet . Internet call services may support calls between co mputers, between mobile phones, and between a VoIP dev ice and a traditional telephone. For availability and costs, contact y our internet call service provider. To make or receive an intern et call, you must be in the service area of a wireless LAN ( W L A N ) o r h a v e a p a c k e t d a t a (GPRS) connection in a UMTS network, and be connected to an internet call service. Your device may offer you an installation widget, t o install internet call services. Log into an internet call service When an internet call service has been insta lled, a tab for the service is displayed in the contacts list. To log into a servic e, sel ect Menu > Contacts , the service, and Options > Log in . To add contacts as service contac ts to the friends list manually or from the contacts list , select Options > New contact . 38 Make calls
Make internet calls To call a contact when you are logged into a service, tap the contact in the frie nds list, and select . To make an internet call in the home screen, select , enter the number, and select Options > Call > Internet call . To make an internet call to an internet call address , in the home screen, select and Options > Open keyb oard . Enter the address, and select . Internet communication settin gs Select Menu > S ettings and Connectivity > Admin. settings > Net se ttings . To view and edit the settin gs for a service, select [09] sett. . To remove a service from your service list, select Options > Delete service . Internet c all service se ttings Select Menu > Contacts , open a service tab, and select Options > Settin gs . To set an internet ca ll service as the defau lt service, select Default service . When you pres s the call key to call a number, you r device mak es an internet call using the default service if the service is connected. You can set only one service at a time as the default s ervice. To edit the service destination, select Service connectivity . Video sharing Use video sharing (ne twork service) to send live video or a video clip from your mobile device to another compatible mobile device during a voice call. The loudspeaker is active when you activate video sha ring. If you do not want to use th e loudspeaker for the voice call while you share video, you can also u se a compatible headset. Warning: Continuous exposure to high v olume may damage your hearing. Listen to music a t a moderate level, and do not hold the device near you r ea r when the loudspeaker is in use. Video shar ing requirements Video sharing requires a UMTS connection. Your ability to use video sharing depends on the availability of the UMTS network. For more information on the service, UMTS network availability, an d fees associated with using thi s service, contact your service provider. To use video sharing , ensure the following: ⢠Your device is set up for person-to-person connections. 39 Make calls
⢠You have an active UMTS connecti on and are within UMTS network coverage. If you move outside the UMTS network during a video sh aring session, the sharing stops while your voice call continues. ⢠Both the sender and recipient are registered to the UMTS network. If you invite someone to a sharing session and the recipientâÂÂs device is not within UMTS network coverage or does not have vi deo sharing installed or person-to-pers on connections set up, the recipient does not receive invitations. You receive an error message that indi cates that the recipient cannot accept the invitation. Settings To set up video sharing, yo u need person-to-person and UMTS connection s ettings. Person-t o-person c onnection setting s A person-to-person connection is also known as a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) connection. The SIP profile settings must be configured in your device before you can use video sharing. Ask your service provider for the SIP profile settings, and save them to your device. Your service provider may send you the settings or give you a list of the needed parameters. To add a SIP address to a con tact: 1 Select Menu > Contacts . 2 Open the contact or create a new contact. 3 Select Options > Edit . 4 Select Options > Add detail > Share video . 5 Enter the SIP address in the format username@domainname (you can us e an IP address instead of a domain name). If you do not know the SIP address for the contact, you can use the phone number of the recipient, including the country code, to share video (if supp orted by the network service provider). UMTS conne ction sett ings To set up your UMTS connection: ⢠Contact your service provider to e stablish an agreement for you to use the UMTS network. ⢠Ensure that the UMTS acce ss point connection settings for your device are configured properly. For more information about the setting s, contact your service provider. Share live vid eo or video clips During an active voice call, select Options > Share video . 1 To share live video during the call, select Live video . To share a video clip, select Video clip . A list of video clips saved in the device memory, the ma ss memory, or a memory card (if availa ble) opens. Select the clip you want to share. You may need to convert the video clip into a suitable f o r m a t t o b e a b l e t o s h a r e i t . I f y o u r d e v i c e n o t i f i e s y o u that the vid eo clip must be co nverted, select OK . Your device must have a video editor for the conversion to work. 2 If the recipient has severa l SIP addresses or phone numbers including the country code saved in Cont acts, 40 Make calls
select the desired address or number. If the SIP address or phone number of the recipient is not available, enter the address or number of the rec ipient including the country code, and select OK to send the invitation. Your device send s the invitation to the SIP address. Sharing begins automatically when the recipient accepts the invitation. Options during video sharing to mute or unm ute the micropho ne to switch the loudspeaker on an d off to pause and resume video sharing to switch to full screen mode (available for recei ver on ly) 3 To end the sha ring session, select Stop . T o end the voice call, press the end ke y. When you end the call, video sharing also ends. To save the live video you sh ared, select Yes when prompted. The device notifies you of the location of the saved video. If you access ot her applicat ions while you are sharing a video clip, the sharing is paused. To return to the vi deo sharing v iew and to con tinue sharing, in the home screen, select Options > Resume video sharing . Accept an invitation When someone sends you a vi deo sharing invitati on, the invitation message displays th e senderâÂÂs name or SIP address. If someone sends you a sharin g invitation and you are not within 3G network covera ge, you will not know th at you received an invitation. When you receive an invitation , select from the following: Yes â Accept the invitation, and a ctivate the sharing session. No â Reject the invitation. The sender receives a message that you rejected the invitation . You can also pr ess the end key to reject the invitation and end the voice call. To end the sharing session, se lect Stop . To end the voice call, press the end key. Wh en you end the call, video sharing als o ends. Log The log stores information about the communication history of the device. The device registers missed a nd received calls only if the ne twork supports these functions, the device is switched on, an d within the network service area. Recent calls You can view information about your recent calls. Select Menu > Applications > Log and Recent calls . View missed , received, and diall ed calls Select Missed calls , Received calls , or Dialled nu mbers . Tip: To open the dialled numbers list in the home screen, press the call key. Select Options and from the following: 41 Make calls
Save to Co ntacts â Save a phone number from a recent calls list to your contacts. Clear list â Clear the selected recent calls list. Delete â Clear an event in the selected list. Settings â Select Log duration and the length of ti me that the communication informat ion is saved in the log. If you select No log , no information is saved in the log. Call duration Select Menu > Applica tions > Log . To view the approximate duration of your last call, dialled and received calls, select Call duration . Note: The actual invoice for ca lls and services from your service provider may vary, depending on network features, rounding off for billing, taxes, and so forth. Packet dat a Select Menu > Applica tions > Log . To check the amount of data sent or received during packet data connections, select Packet data > All sent data or All received dat a . To clear both sent and received information, select Options > Clear counters . You need the lock code to clear the information. Monitor all communication events Select Menu > Applica tions > Log . To open the general log where you can monitor all voice calls, text messages, or data and wireles s LAN connections registered by the device, select the general log tab . Subevents, such as a text me ssage sent in mo re than on e part and packet data connections, are logged as one communication event. Connections to your mailbox, multimedia messa ging centre, or web pa ges are shown a s packet data connections. To view how much data was tra nsferred and how long a certain packet data connection lasted, scroll to an incoming or outgoing event indicated by GPRS , and select Options > View . To copy a ph one number fro m the log to the clipboard, and paste it into a text message, for example, select Options > U se number > C opy . To filter the log, select Options > Filter and a filter. To set the log duration, select Options > Settings > Log duration . If you select No log , all the log contents, recent calls register, and messaging delivery reports are permanently deleted. 42 Make calls
Contacts (pho nebook) To open Contacts, s elect Menu > Contacts . You can save and u pdate contact information, such as phone numbers, home addresses, or e-mail addresses of your contacts. You can add a personal ringi ng tone or a thumbnail image to a contact. You can a lso create contact groups, which allow you to s end text messages or e-m ail to many recipi ents at the sam e time. Save and edit names and nu mbers Select Menu > Contacts . Add a new contact to the cont acts list 1 Select . 2 Select a field to enter information. To close the text input, select . Fill in the appropriate fields, and select Done . Edit contacts Select a contact an d Options > Edit . Contacts toolbar On the contacts list toolbar, select from the following: Call â Call the desired contact. Create message â Send a message to the desired contact. New contact â Create a new contact. Manage names and numbers To copy or delete a contact, or to send a contact a s a business card to another dev ice, tap and hold a contact, and select Add to favourites , Edit , or Send business card . To delete several contacts at the same time, select Options > Mark/Unmark to mark the desired contacts, and to delete, select Options > De lete . To listen to the voice tag assi gned to a contact, s elect the contact and Opti ons > Voice tag details > Options > Play voice tag . Before using voice tags, note the following: ⢠Voice tags are not lang ua ge-dependent. They are dependent on the speaker's voice. ⢠You must sa y the name exactly as you said it when you recorded it. ⢠Voice tags are sensitive to background noise. Record voice tags and use them in a quiet environment. ⢠Very short names are not accepted. Use long names, and avoid similar names for different numbers. Note: Using voice tags may be difficult in a noisy environment or during an em ergency, so you shou ld not rely solely upon voice dia lling in all circumstances. Default numbers and addresses You can assign de fault numbers or addre sses to a contact. If a contact has several n umbers or addresses, you can easily call or send a message to a certain number or address. The default number is also used in voice dialling. 43 Contacts (phonebook)
1 In the contacts list, select a contact. 2 Select Options > Defaults . 3 Select a default to which you want to add a number or an address, and select Assign . 4 Select a number or an address you want t o set as a default. 5 To exit the Defaults view and sav e the changes, ta p outside the view. Contact cards Select Menu > Contacts and a contact. All available communica tion methods for the selecte d contact are displayed in the contact cards view. Select a contact from the list, the desired communication method, Optio ns , and from the following: Edit â Edit, add, or delete the contact card fields. Defaults â Define the num bers and addresses to use by default when you communicate with the contact, if a contact has more than one number or address defined. Voice tag details â View the voice ta g details, or listen to the voice tag for the contact. The available options and communication methods may vary. Set contacts as favourit es Select Menu > Contacts . Favourites are the contacts you have set as your favourite contacts. These contacts appe ar at the top of the contacts list. To set a contact as a favourite, select a contact and Options > Add to favourites . Favourites are marked with a star icon. To remove a contact from favourites, select a contact a nd Options > Remove from favourites . The removed contact is moved back to th e standard conta cts list. Ringing tones , images, and call text for contacts You can define a ringing tone for a conta ct or group, and an image and a call text for a contact. When the contact calls you, the device plays th e selected ringing tone and shows the call text or image (if the callerâÂÂs phone number is sent with the call and yo ur device recognises it). To define a ringing tone for a contac t or a contact group, select the contact or contact group and Options > Edit > Ringing tone , and a ringing tone. To add more fields to a cont act details view, select the contact and Opt ions > Edit > Options > Add detail . To define a call text for a contact, select t he contact and Options > Edit > Options > Add detail > Call alert text . Tap the text field to en ter the call text, and select . To add an image for a cont act saved in the device memor y, select the contact, Options > Edit > Add image , and an image from Photos. To remove the ringing tone, select Default tone from the list of ringing tones. 44 Contacts (phonebook)
To view, change or remove the imag e from a contact, select the contact, Options > Edit > Image > Options , and the desired option. Copy contacts When you open the contacts list for the firs t time, the device asks if you want to copy na mes and numb ers from the SIM card to your device. To start copying, select OK . If you do not want to copy the contacts from the SIM card to your device, select Cancel . The device asks if you want to view the SIM card contacts in the contacts directory. To view the contacts, select OK . The contacts list opens, and the names stored on your SIM card are indicated with . SIM services For availability and inform ation on using SIM card services, contact your SIM card v endor . This may be the service provider or other vendor. SIM contacts To set the names and numbers stored on the SIM card to be shown on the contacts list, select Option s > Settings > C ontacts to display > SIM memory . Y ou can add and edit SIM contacts, or call th em. The numbers you save in th e contacts list may not be automatically sav ed to your SIM card. To save numbers to the SIM ca rd, sele ct a contac t and Opt ions > Copy > SI M memory . To select whether the new contacts you enter are saved to your device or your SIM card, select Optio ns > Settings > Default saving memo ry > Phone me mory or SIM memory . Fixed dialling Select Menu > Contacts and Options > SIM numbers > Fixed dial contacts . With the fixed dialling servic e, you can restrict calls from your device to certain phone numbers. N ot all SIM cards support the fixed dialling service. For more information, contact your service provider. When security features that re strict calls ar e in use (such as call barring, closed user gr oup, and fixed dialling), calls may be possible to the official emergency number programmed into your device. Call barring and call diverting cann ot be active at the same time. You need your PIN2 code to activate and deactivate fixed dialling or edit your fixed dialling con tacts. Contact your service provider for your PIN2 code. Select Options and from the following: Activate fixed dialling â Activate the fixed dialing. Deactivate fixe d dialling â Deactivate the fixed dialing . New SIM contact â Enter the contact name and p hone number to which calls are allowed. Add from Contacts â Cop y a contact from the list of contacts to the fixed diallin g list. 45 Contacts (phonebook)
To send text messages to th e SIM contacts while the fixed dialling service is active, you need to add th e text message centre number to the fixed dialling list. Contact group s To open the group list, open the contacts list, and tap . Create contact groups 1 To create a new group, in the group list, select Options > Ne w group . Use the default name or enter a new name. Selec t OK . 2 To add members to the group, select the group and Options > Add members . 3 Mark each contact you want to add, and se lect OK . Manage contact groups To send a message to all group members, to set a ringing tone for a group, or to rename or delete a group, tap and hold the group, and select Cr eate message , Ringing tone , Rename , or Delete . To add a contact to a group, select the group and Options > Add members . To check which other groups a cont act belongs to, select the group, scroll to the contact, an d select Options > Belongs to grou ps . To remove a contact from a group, select the group, scroll to the contact, and select Opti ons > Remove from group . 46 Contacts (phonebook)
Ovi Contacts About Ovi C ontacts With Ovi Contacts, you can st ay connected to the people who matter most. Search for cont acts, and discover friends in the Ovi community. Keep in touch with your friends - chat, share your location an d presence, and easily follow what your friends are up to and where they a re. You can even chat with friends who use Google Talkâ¢. You can also sync your contacts, calenda r, and other content between your Nokia device and Ovi.com. Your important information is stored and kept up-to-dat e both in your device and on the web. With Ovi Cont acts, you can make your contacts list dynamic a nd be confident that your contacts are stored on Ovi.com. You must have a Nokia Accoun t to use the service. Create an account on your mobile device, or vis it www.ovi.com on your PC. Using Ovi Contacts may involv e the transmission of large amounts of data through your service provider's network. Contact your network service provider for information about data transm ission charges. Start using Ovi Contacts Select Contacts , and open the Ovi tab. The Ovi Contacts service is pa rt of Ovi, and uses the same account information. If you are new to Ovi and its serv ices, to start us ing the Ovi Contacts application, you must register to Ovi by creating a Nokia account. Create a Nokia account 1 Select Ovi Chat , and when prompted, connect to the internet. 2 Enter the required information. 3 In the My profile view, ente r your profile information. Your first and las t name are mandatory details. 4 Select Done . If you have already registered to Ovi using your PC or mobile device, yo u can start using Ovi Cont acts wit h the same account details. Sign in to Ovi Contacts and act ivate the service Select Ovi Chat , and enter your user name and pas sword. If you have not yet provided your profile information for Ovi Contacts, do so, and select Done . Your first and last name are manda tory deta ils. Connect to the service Connect to Ovi Contacts Select Go online and the connecti on method. Use a wireless LAN (WLA N) conne ction where available. Cancel the connection Select Options > Cancel connecting . A packet data connection ma y generate additi onal data transmission charges. For pricing details, contact your network service provider. Select Go online > Option s and from the following: 47 Ovi Contacts
Select â Select the item. Go onli ne â Connect to the service if you are offline. My profile â Edit your profile information. Recommend to friend â Invite a contact to join Ov i Contacts. T he invita tion is sent as a text mess age. Settings â Modify the Ovi Contacts settings. The available options may vary. Create and edit your p rofile Edit your profil e information Select My profile . View the profiles of you r Ovi Contacts frie nds Select a friend and Options > Profile . Your profile information is visible to your Ovi Contacts friends. Only the following pr ofile details are displayed to other Ovi Contacts users, for example during a search: first name and last nam e. To change your privac y settings, access Ovi on your PC, and sign in t o your Nokia account. Change your pr ofile image Select the profile image, Select existi ng image , and the new image. You can also edit or remove the current profile image or capture a new one. Change your availability By default, yo ur avai lability is set to Available . To change your availability, select the icon. Tell your friends what yo u are doin g at the moment Select What are you doing? , and enter text in the field. Show your friends what music you are currently listeni ng to Select Now playing . To do this, you must allow your now playing information to be shar ed in the presence settings. Edit your contact information Select a field, and enter text. In the My profile view, select Options and from the following: Edit text â Cut, copy, or pa ste text. Change â Change your stat us (when the statu s field is selected). Activate â Start broadcasting your location or your now playing information to your friends (when either field is selected). Undo changes â Undo the changes you made in th e profile view. Edit shared locations â Select the landmarks you want to broadcast to your friends (when the My location fi eld is selected). Stop sharing â Stop broadcasting your locati on to your friends (when the My loca tion field is selected). The available options may vary. Find and add friends Select Options > In vite frien d . 48 Ovi Contacts
Search for a friend Enter the name of the friend in the Search friends field, and select the search icon. You ca nnot search for fri ends based on their mobile number or e-mail address. Browse the search re sults Select Next results or Previous results . Start a new search Select New search . If the friends you s earched for could not be fou nd, they are not registered Ovi members, or they have chosen to be invisible in searches. When prompted, send a text message to your frie nds to invite them to join Ovi Contacts. Send an invita tion to join Ovi Cont acts Select Select service: and the service you know your friend uses. Enter your friendâÂÂs user name, and select the send icon. Select Options and from the following: Select â Select an item. Open â Open an item. Invite as friend â Send an invitation to the con tact. Show profile â View the profile of the contact. Renew invitati on â Resend an invitation to join Ovi Contacts to a pending friend. Search â Search for the contact whose name or other related keyword you entered in the Search friends field. Edit tex t â Cut, copy, or paste text. The available options may vary. Chat with your friends Start a chat with a friend Select the friend. Send a chat message Enter the text in the message field, an d select the send icon. In the chat view, select Options and from the following: Send â Send the message . Add smiley â Insert a smiley. Send my locat ion â Send your loc ation details to your chat partner (if supported by both devices). Profile â View the details of a friend. My profile â Select your presence status or profile image, personalise your message, or change your deta ils. Edit text â Copy or paste text. End chat â End the activ e chat. Exit â End all active chats, and close the ap plication. The available options may vary. To receive location information from your friend, you must have the Maps application. To send and receive location information, both the Maps and Positioning applications are needed. View the lo cation of your friend Select Show on map . 49 Ovi Contacts
Return to the Ovi Contacts main view wi thout ending the chat Select Back . Add, call, or copy phone numbers from a chat Go to a pho ne number in a chat, an d select Options and the appropriate option. Ovi Sync To sync your device with Ovi, you must have a Nokia account and activate the Ovi Cont acts service on your devic e. Sync your device with Ovi 1 If you sync your device with Ovi for the first time, use the Sync wizard to select what content you wan t to sync, and the sync interval. 2 Select Synchronise . If your device is in the Offline profile, connect to the internet when prompted. Select Optio ns and from the following: Start â Sync your device wi th Ovi. Cancel â Cancel an ongoing sync. Synchron isation se ttings â Modify your sync settings. The available options may vary. Share your location Open the Contacts application and the Ovi tab. To share your location, select Options > Settings > Presence > Share my location and from the following: Sharing allowed â Allow your friends to see your location. My shared landmarks â Select the landmarks from where your location is broadcast to your friends. Refresh interval â Select how often yo u broadcas t your current l ocation. Add and select landmarks: To add a location to the landmarks list, select Share my locat ion > My shared landmarks > Options > New landma rk . To add your current location as a landmark, select Current positio n . To browse for a location on a map, select Select from map . To add a landmark manually, select Enter m anually . To select the location s you want to share with your friends, select Share my location > My shared landmarks , and select the landmarks fr om the list. Select Options to edit, mark, and unmark it ems on the list. Whenever you are online with the Contacts on Ovi service, and in one of the selected lo cations, your friends can see your location. Ovi Contacts settings Select Options > Settings . Select from the following: 50 Ovi Contacts
Account â Access your account details, and define your visibility to others in a search. Presence â Show infor mation about your location to your friends, and allow them to see when you are making a phone call (call status). Personalisation â Modify the settings related to the startup and tones of the Ovi Con tacts application , and automatically accept friend invitations. Connection â Select the network connection t o use, and activate roaming wa rnings. Using a packet data conn ection may involve the transmission of large amounts of data through your service provider's network. For information about data transmission charges, cont act your network service provider. Exit â End all a ctive chats, and clos e the application. Nokia account settings Select Options > Settings > Account . Edit yo ur acc ount deta ils Select My account . Define your visibi lity in searches Select My account > Visibility in search . Y ou must be online to change your visibility. Presence settings Select Options > Settings > Presence . Modify pres ence settings Select from the following: Share my lo cation â Allow your friends to see your location. Share now playing â Allow your friends to see what music you are currently listening to on your mobile device. Share call status â Allow your fr iends to see your call status. Share your location Select Share my location and from the following: Sharing allowed â Allow your friends to see your location in selected landmarks. My shared landmarks â Select the landmarks from where your location is broadcast to your friends. Refresh interval â Select how often you broadcast your current location. Add a location to the landmarks li st Select Share my location > My shared landmarks > Options > New landmark . Add your current location as a landmark Select Current posit ion . Browse for a location on a map Select Select from map . Add a landmark manually Select Enter manually . 51 Ovi Contacts
Select locations you w ant to share with your frien ds 1 Select Share my location > My shared land marks . 2 Select the landmarks from the list. 3 Select Options to edit, mark, and unmark items on the list. Depending on your settings, your friends can see your location when you ar e in one of the selected locations. Personalisation settings Select Optio ns > Settings > Personalisation . Select from the following: Login on s tart-u p â Sign in au tomatically to Ovi Contacts when you switch on your mobile device. Auto-accept friend invit. â Accept friend requests automatically without noti fication. Auto-accept voice msgs. â Allow voice message to be accepted automatically. Message tone â Select a tone for new messages. Friend online tone â Select the tone that sounds when a friend comes online. Icon on Home screen â Add the Ovi Contacts shortcut icon to your device home screen. Connecti on settings Select Optio ns > Settings > Connection . Modify connection settin gs Select Network connection and the desired connection. To use the default connection defined in your device connection settings, select Default connection . Set the device to not ify you when you r home network is not available To receive a warning when your device is trying to connect to another network, select Roaming warning > On . 52 Ovi Contacts
Messag ing Messaging main view Select Menu > Messaging (network service). To create a new message, select New message . Tip: To avoid rewri ting messages that y ou send often, use texts in the Templates folder in My folders. You can also create and save your own temp lates. Messaging contains the following folders: Inbox â Received messages, except e-mail and cell broadcast messages, are stored here. My folders â Organise you r messages into folders. Mailbox â Connect to your remote ma ilbox to retrieve your new e-mail messages, or view your previously retrieved e-mail messages offline. Drafts â Draft messages that have not been sent are stored here. Sent â The last messages tha t have been sent, excluding me ssages sent using Bluetooth connectivity , are stored here. You can change the number of mess ages to save in this folder. Outbox â Messages waiting to be sent are temporarily stored in the outbox, for example, when your device is outside network coverage. Delivery reports â You can request the network to send you a delivery report of the text messages and multimedia messages you have sent (network service). Write and send messages Select Menu > Messaging . Important: Exercise caution wh en opening messages. Messages may contain ma liciou s software or otherwise be harmful to your device or PC. Before you can create a multimedia message or write a mail, you must have t he co rrect connection settings defined. The wireless network may limit the size of MMS messages. If the inserted picture exceed s this limit, the device may make it smaller so that it can be sent by MMS. Only devices that have comp atible features can receive and display multimed ia messages. The appearance of a message may vary dependin g on the receiving device. Check the size limit of mail messages wi th your service provider. If you at tempt to send a mai l message that exceeds the size limit of the mail server, the message is left in the Outbox folder, and the device attempts to res end it periodically. Sending a mail requires a data connection, and continuous attempts to rese nd the mail may incur charges from your service provider. In the Outbox folder, you can delete such a messag e or move it to the Dra fts folder. Messaging requires network services. Send a text or multimedia m essage Select New message . 53 Messaging
Send an audio or mail message Select Optio ns > Create message , and the relevant option. Select recipi ents or groups from the contac ts list Select from the toolbar. Enter the number or mail address manually Tap the To field. Enter the subj ect of the ma il or multimed ia message Enter it in the Subject field, . If the Subject field is not visible, select Opti ons > Message header fields to change the fields that are visible. Write the me ssage Tap the message field. Add an object to a message or mail Select and the relevant type of content. The message t ype may change to multimedia mes sage based on the inserted content. Send the message or mail Select , or press the call key. Your device supports text messages beyond the lim it for a single message . Longer messag es are sent as two or more messages. Your service provider may charge accordingly. Characters with accents, ot her marks, or some language options take more spa ce, and limit the number of characters that can be se nt in a single me ssage. Messaging inbox Receive mess ages Select Menu > Messa ging and Inbo x . In the Inbox folder, indicates an unread text message, an unread multimedia message, an unread audio message, and data received through Bluet ooth connectivity. When you receive a message, and 1 new mess age are displayed in the home screen. To open the message, select Show . To open a message in the Inbox folder, select the message. To reply to a re ceived message, select Options > Reply . Multimedia messages Important: Exercise caution when opening messages. Messages may contain malicious software or otherwise be harmful to your device or PC. You may receive a notification t hat a multimedia message is waiting in the multimedia message centre. To start a packet data connection to retrieve th e message to your device, select Options > Retrieve . When you open a multimedia message ( ), you may see an image and a mes sage. is shown if sound is included, or if video is included. To play the sound or the video, select the indicator. To see the media objects that have been included in the multimedia message, select Options > Obje cts . 54 Messaging
If the message includes a multimedia presentation, is displayed. To play the presen tation, select the indicator. Data, settings, and web servic e messages Your device can receive ma ny kinds of messages that contain data, such as business card s, ringing tone s, operator logos, calendar entr ies, and e-mail notifications. You may also receive settings from your service provider in a configuration message. To save the data from the message, select Options and the corresponding option. Web service messages are notifications (for example, news headlines) and may contain a text message or a link. For availability and subscrip tion, contact your service provider. Mailbox Define e-mail settings Select Menu > Messaging and Mailbox . To use e-mail, you must have defined a va lid internet access point (IAP) in the devi ce and have defined your e- mail settings correctly. You must have a separat e e-mail account. Follow the instructions given by your remote mailbox and internet service provider (ISP). If you select Messagi ng > Mailbox and have not set u p your e-mail a ccount, you are pr ompted to do so. To start creating the e-mail settings with the mailbox guide, select Start . When you create a new mailbox, the name you give to the mailbox replaces Mailbox in the Messaging ma in view. You can have up to six mai lboxes. Open the mailbox Select Menu > Messaging and a mailbox. When you open the mailbox, the device asks if you want to connect to the mailbox. To connect to your mailbox and retrieve new e-mail headers or message s, select Yes . When you view m essages online, you are continuously connected t o a remote mailbox using a data connection. To view previously retrieve d e-mail messages offline, select No . To create a new e-mail m essage, select Option s > Create message > E-mail . When you are online, to end the data connection to the remote mailbox, select Opti ons > Disconnect Retrieve e-mail messages Select Menu > Messaging and a mailbox. If you are offline, select Options > Connect to open a connection to the remote mailbox . 55 Messaging
Importa nt: Exercise caution when opening messages. Messages may contain ma liciou s software or otherwise be harmful to your device or PC. 1 When you have an open connection to a remote mailbox, select Op tions > Retrieve e-mail > New to retrieve all new messages, Selected to retrieve only selected messages, or All to retrieve all messages from the mailbox. To stop retrieving messages, select Cancel . 2 To close the connection an d view the e-mail messages offline, select Options > Disconnect . 3 To open an e-mail message, select the message. If t he e-mail message has not b een retrieved and you are offline, you are asked if you want to retrieve this message from the ma ilbox. To view e-mail attachments, open the message, and select the attachment field indicated by . If the attachment has not been retrieved to the device, select Opt ions > Retrieve . To retrieve e-mail mess ages automatically, select Options > E-mai l settings > Automatic ret rieval . Setting the device to retrieve e-ma il automatically may involve the transmission of large amounts of data through your service provider's network. Contact your service provider for information abou t data transmission charges. Delete e- mail mes sages Select Menu > Messaging and a mailbox. To delete the contents of an e-mail message from the device while still retaining it in the remote mailbox, select Options > Delete > Ph one only . The device mirrors the e-ma il headers in the remote mailbox. Although you delete the message content, the e- mail header stays in your de vice. If you want t o remove the header as well, you must be connected to the server when deleting the message from your device and the remote mailbox. It there is no connection to the server, the header is deleted when you make a connection from your device to the remote mailbox again to update the status. To delete an e-mail from the device and the remote mailbox, select Optio ns > Delete > Pho ne and server . To cancel deleting an e-mail that has been marked to be deleted from the device an d server during the next connection ( ), select Options > Restore . Disconnect from the mailbo x When you are online, to end the data connection to the remote ma ilbox, sel ect Options > Disconne ct . View messages on a SIM card Select Menu > Messa ging and Options > SIM messages . Before you can view SIM messages, you must copy them to a folder in your device. 56 Messaging
1 Select Options > Mark/Unmark > Mark or Mark all to mark messages. 2 Select Options > Copy . A list of folders opens. 3 To start copying, select a folder. To view the messages, open the folder. Cell broadcast messages Select Menu > Messaging and Options > Operator messages . Cell broadcast (network servic e) allows you to receive messages on variou s topics, such as weath er or traffic conditions, from your service provider. For available topics and relevant topic numbers, contact your service provider. This service may not be available for all regions. Cell broadcast messages ca nnot be received in 3G networks. A packet data co nnection may prevent cell broadcast reception. Service commands Select Menu > Messaging and Options > Service commands . With service commands (n etwo rk service) you can enter and send service reques ts (also kno wn as USSD commands), such as activation commands for ne twork services, to your service provider. This service may not be available for all regions. Messaging settings The settings may be preconfigured in your device, or you may receive them in a me ssage. To enter settings manually, fill in all fields marked with Must be defined or an asterisk. Some or all message centres or access points ma y be preset for your device by your service provider, and you may not be able to change, create, edit, or remove them. Text mes sage settin gs Select Menu > Messaging and Options > Settings > Text message . Select from the following: Message centres â View a list of all text message centres that have been defined. Message centre in use â Select which mes sage centre to use to deliv er text messages. Characte r encoding â To use character conversion to another encoding system when available, select Reduced support . Receive repo rt â Select whether the network sends delivery reports on your messages (ne twork service). Message validity â Select how long the message centre resends your message if the first a ttempt fails (network service). If the message cannot be sent within the validity period, the message is delete d from the message centre. Message sent as â To learn if your message centre is able to convert text messages into these other formats, contact your service provider. Preferred connection â Select the connection to use. Reply via same ce ntre â Select whether you want th e reply message to be sent us ing the same text message centre number (network service). 57 Messaging
Multimedia message set tings Select Menu > Messaging and Option s > Settin gs > Multimedia message . Select from the following: Image s ize â Define the size of the image in a multimedia message. MMS creation mode â If you select Guid ed , the device informs you if you try to send a message that may not be supported by the recipient. If you select Restricted , the device prevents you from sending messages that may not be supported. To include content in your messages without notifications, select Fr ee . Access point in use â Selec t which access point is used as the preferred connection. Multimedia retrieval â Select h ow you want to receive messages, if available. To receive messag es automatically in your home networ k, select Auto in home netw. . Outside your home network, you receive a notification that there is a message to retrieve in the multimedia message centre. If y ou select Always automatic , your device automatically makes an a ctive packet data connection to retrieve the message both in a nd outside your home network. Select Manual to retrieve multimedia messages from the message centre man ually, or Off to prevent receipt of any multimedia mess ages. Automatic retrieval ma y not be su pported in all regions. Allow anony mous msgs . â Reject messages from anonymous senders. Receive adverts â Receive multimedia message advertisements (network service). Receive reports â Display the status of sen t messages in the log (network service). Deny report sending â Prevent your device from sending delivery reports of received messages. Message validity â Select for how long the message centre resends your message if the first attempt fails (network service). If the me ssage cann ot be sent within this time period, the messa ge is deleted from the message centre . The device requires network support to indicat e that a sent message has been received or read. Depending on the network and other circumstances, this information may not always be reliable. E-mail settings Manage mailboxes Select Menu > Messa ging and Options > Settings > E- mail . To select which mailbox you want to use to send and receive e-mail, select Mailbox in use and a mailbox. To remove a mailbox and its messages from your device, select Mailboxes , tap the m ailb ox to b e remo ved if it is not already highli ghted, and select Opti ons > Delete . To create a new mailbox, select Mailboxes > O ptions > New mailbox . The name you gi ve to the new mailbox replaces Mailbox in the Mess aging main view. You ca n have up to six mailboxes. Select Mailboxes and a mailbox to change the con nection settings, user settings, retriev al settings, and au tomatic retrieval settings. 58 Messaging
Connection settings Select Menu > Messaging and Options > Settings > E- mail > Mailboxes , a mailbox, and Conne ction settings . To edit the settings for the e-mail you receive, select Incomi ng e-ma il , and from the following: User name â Enter your user na me given to you by your service provider. Password â Enter your password. If you leave this field blank, you are prompted for the password when you try to connect to y our remote mai lbox. Incoming mail server â Enter the IP address or host name of the mail server that receives your e-mail. Access point in use â Select an internet access point (IAP). Mailbox name â Enter a name for the mailbox. Mailbox type â Defines the e-mail protocol that your remote mailbox service provider recommends. The options are POP3 and IMAP4. This setting cannot be changed. Security â Select the security op tion used to secure the connection to the remote mailbox. Port â Define a port for the connection. APOP secure login (for POP3 only) â Use with the POP 3 protocol to encrypt the sending of passwords to the remote e-mail s erver while connecting to the mailbox. To edit the settings for the e-mail you send, select Outgoing e-m ail and from the fo llowing: My e-mail address â Enter the e-mail address given to you by your service provider. Outgoing mail server â Enter the IP address or host name of the mail server that sends your e-mail. You may only be able to use the outg oing server of your service provider. For more information, contact your service provider. The settings for use r name, passw ord, access point, security, and port are simila r to the ones in incoming e- mail. User settings Select Menu > Messaging and Options > Settings > E- mail > Mailboxes , a mailbox, and User se ttings . Select from the following: My name â Enter your own name. Your name replaces your e-mail address in the recipientâ s device if the recipientâÂÂs device supports this function. Send message â Define how e-mail is sent from your device. Select Immediately for the device to connect to the mailbox when you select Send message . If you select Duri ng next conn. , e-mail is sent when the connection to the remote mailbox is available. Send copy to self â Select whether you want to send a copy of the e-mail to your own mailbox. Include signature â Select whether yo u want to attac h a signatur e to your e-ma ils. New e-mail al erts â S e l e c t w h e t h e r y o u w a n t t o r e c e i v e the new e-mail indications (a tone, a note, and a mail indicator) when new e-mail is received. E-mail deletion â Select whether you want to delete e- mails from phone only, from phone and server, or to be asked each t ime se paratel y. 59 Messaging
Reply-to ad dress â Define an e-mail address to which replies to e-mails sent from the mailbox in question are deli vered . Retrieval settings Select Menu > Messaging and Option s > Settin gs > E- mail > Mailboxes , a m ailbox, and Retrieval se ttings . Select from the following: E-mail retrieval â Define which parts of the e-mail are retri eved : Headers only , Size limit (POP3), or Msgs. & attachments (POP3). Retrieval amount â Define how m any new e-m ail messages are retrieved to the mailbox. IMAP4 folder p ath (for IMAP4 only) â Define the folder path for folders to be subscribed. Folder subscri ptions (for IMAP4 only ) â Subscribe to other folders in the remo te mailbox, and retrieve content from those folders. Automatic retrieval settings Select Menu > Messaging and Option s > Settin gs > E- mail > Mailboxes , a m ailbox, and Automati c retrieval . Select from the following: E-mail notifications â To automatically retrieve the headers to your device when you receive new e-mail in your remote mailbox, select Auto-update or Only in home net w. E-mail retrieval â To automatically retrieve the headers of new e-mail from your remote mailbox at defined times, select Enabled or Only in home netw. Define when and how often the e-mails are retrieved. E-mail notifications and E-mail retrieval cannot be active at the same time. Setting the device to retrieve e-ma il automatically may involve the transmission of large amounts of data through your service provider's network. Contact your service provider for information abou t data transmission charges. Web service me ssage settings Select Menu > Messa ging and Options > Settings > Service mess age . Select whether you want to rece ive service messages. To set the device to automatically activat e the browser and start a network connection to ret rieve content when you receive a service message, select Do wnloa d messages > Automatically . Cell broadcast se ttings Select Menu > Messa ging and Options > Settings > Operator message . Check the available topics and related topic numbers with your service provider. Select from the following: Reception â Select whether you want to receive cell broadcast messages. Language â Select the languages in wh ich you want to receive messa ges: All , Selected , or Other . Topic detection â Select whether the device automatically searches for n ew topic numbers, an d saves the new numbers without a name t o the topic list. 60 Messaging
Other settings Select Menu > Messaging and Options > Settings > Other . Select from the following: Save sent messages â Select whether you want to save copies of the text, multimed ia, or e-mail messages that you send to the Sent folder. Number of saved msgs. â Define how many sent messages are saved to the sent folder at a time. When the limit is reached, the oldest message is deleted. Memory in use â Select the memory where you want to save your mess ages. Show messages in gro ups â Defin e whether you want to group the messages in I nbox, Sent, Drafts and My folders. Show e-mails in groups â Define whether you wa nt to group your e -mail messages. Mail for Exchange With Mail for Exchange, you can receive your work e-mail to your device. You can read and reply to your e-mails, view and edit compatible atta chments, view calendar information, receive and re ply to meeting requests, schedule meetings, and view , add, and edit contact information. ActiveSync Use of the Mail for Exchange is limited to over-the-air synchronisation of PIM info rmation between the Nokia device and the authorised Microsoft Exchange server. Mail for Exchange ca n be set up only if your company has Microsoft Exchange Server. In addition, your company's IT administrator must have acti vated Mail for Exchange for your account . Before startin g to set up M ail for Exchange , ensure that you have the following: ⢠A corporate e-mail ID ⢠Your office network user name ⢠Your office network password ⢠Your network domain name (contact your company's IT department) ⢠Your Ma il for Ex change s erver na me (cont act your company's IT department) Depending on your company's Mail for Exchange server configuration, you may n eed to enter other information in addition to those listed. If you do n ot know the correct information, contact your company 's IT department. With Mail for Exchange, the use of the lock code may be mandatory. The default lock code of your device is 12345, but your company's IT admin istrator may have se t a different one for you to use. You can access and modify the Mail for Exchange profile and settings in th e Messaging sett ings. 61 Messaging
Connectivity Your device offers several options to connect to the internet or to another compat ible device or PC. For more information on other connectivity methods, see the extended user guide on the product suppor t pages of the Nokia website. Data connections and access points Your device supports packet data connections (network service), such as GP RS in the GSM network. When you use your device in GSM and UM TS networks, multiple data connections can be active at the same time, an d access points can share a data conn ection. In the UMTS network, data connections remain active during voice calls. You can also use a WLAN data connection. Only one connection in one wireless LAN can be active at a time, but several applications can use the s ame internet access point. To establish a data connect ion, an access point is required. You can define different kinds of access points, such as the following: ⢠MMS access point to send and receive multimedia messages ⢠Internet access point (I AP) to send and receive e-mail and connect to the internet Check the type of access poin t you need with your service provider for the service you want to access. For availability and subscription to packet data connection services, contact your service provider. Network sett ings Select Menu > Settings and Conne ctivity > Network . Your device can automatically switch between GSM and UMTS networks. GSM networks are indicated with . UMTS networks are indicated with . An active high-speed down link packet access (HSDPA) connection (network serv ice) is indicated with . Select from the following: Network mo de â Select which network to use. If you select Dual mode , the device uses the GSM or UM TS network automatically, according to the network parameters and the roaming a greements between the wireless service providers. Fo r details and roaming costs, contact your network service provider. This option is shown only if supported by th e wireless service provider. A roaming agreement is an agreement between two or more service providers to enable the users of one s ervice provider to use the services of other service providers. Operato r selecti on â Select Autom atic to set the device to search for and select one of the available networks, or Manual to manually select the network from a list. If the connection to the ma nually selected ne twork is lost, the device sounds an error tone and asks you to reselect a network. The selected network mu st have a roaming agreement with your home network. Cell info display â Set the device to indic ate when it is used in a cellular network ba sed on microcellular network (MCN) technology and to ac tivate cell info reception. 62 Connectivity
Wireless LAN Your device can detect and connect to wireless local area networks (WLAN). Using a W LAN, you can con nect your device to the int ernet and compat ible devices that ha ve WLAN suppo rt. About WLA N To use a wireless LAN (WLA N) connection, it must be available in the location, and your device must be connected to the WLAN. Some WLANs are protected, and you need an access key from the service provider to connect to them. Note: In France, you are only allowed to use WLAN indoors. Features that use WLAN, or that are allowed to run in th e background while using other features, increase the demand on battery power an d reduce the battery life. Important: Always enable one of the available encryption methods to increase the security of your wireless LAN connection. Using encrypt ion reduces the risk of unauthorised access to your data. WLAN connections To use a wireless LAN (WLAN) connection, you must create an internet access point (IAP) for WLA N. Use the access point for applications that need to connect to the internet. A WLAN conne ction is established when you create a data connection using a W LAN internet ac cess point. Th e active WLAN connection ends when you end the data connection. You can use WLAN during a v oice call or when packet data is active. You ca n only be connect ed to one WLAN access point device at a time, but several applications can use th e same internet access point. When the device is in the offline profile, you can still use WLAN (if available). Remember to comply with any applicable safety requiremen ts when establishing and using a WLAN connection. Tip: To check the unique media access control (M AC) address that identifies your device, open the dialler and enter *#62209526# . WLAN wizard Select Menu > Settings and Connectivity > Wireless LAN . The WLAN wizard helps you to connect to a wireless LAN (WLAN) and manage your WLAN connections . If the search finds WLANs, to create an internet access point (IAP) for a connection and start the web browser using this IAP, select the connection and Start w eb browsing . If you select a secured W LAN, you are asked to en ter the relevant password. To connect to a hidden network, you must enter the correct network name (service set identifier, SSID). If you already h ave the web browser running using the currently active WLAN connection, to return to the web browser, select Continue web browsing . 63 Connectivity
To end the active connection , select the connection an d Disconnect WLAN . WLAN internet ac cess points Select Menu > Settings and Connec tivity > Wirele ss LAN > Options . Select from the following: Filter WLAN networks â Filter out wireless LANs (WLANs) from the list of found networks. The selected networks are not displayed the next ti me the application searches for WLAN s. Details â View the details of a network shown in the list. If you select an active con nection, the connection details are displayed. Operating mo des There are two operating mode s in WLAN: infrastructure and ad hoc. The infrastructure operati ng mode allows two kinds of communica tion: wirel ess devices are conne cted to e ach other through a WLAN access point device, or wireless devices are connected to a wired LAN through a W LAN access point device. In the ad hoc operating mode, d evices can send and receive data directly with each other. Wireless LA N settin gs Select Menu > Settings and Connec tivity > Wirele ss LAN > Options > Sett ings . Select from the following: Show WLAN availability â Select whether is displayed when a wireless LAN (WLAN) is available. Tip: To access the WLAN Wizard a pplication and view the available options, select the WLAN icon, and in the pop-up window, select the highlighted text next to the WLAN icon. Scan for networ ks â If you set Show WLA N availability to Yes , you can select how o ften the device searches for available WLANs and upda tes the indicator. Internet co nnectivi ty test â Select whet her you want the device to tes t the intern et capability of the selected WLAN automatically, to a sk for permission every time, or to never perform the connectivity test. If you select Run automatically or allow the test to be performed when the device asks for it, and the co nnectivity test is performed successfully, the access point is saved to the internet destinations. To view advanced settings, select Options > Advanced settings . Changing the adv anced settings for the WL AN is not recommended. Access points Create a new access point Select Menu > Settings and Conne ctivity > Destinations . You may receive access point settings in a m essage from a service provider. Some or all access points may be preset for your device by your service provider, and you may not be able to change, create, edit, or remove them. 64 Connectivity
When you open one of the access point groups ( , , , ), you can see the acce ss point types: indicates a protected access point indicates a packet data access point indicates a wireless LAN (WLAN) access point Tip: You can create internet access points in a WLAN with the WLAN wiza rd. To create a new acc ess point, select Access point . The device asks to check for available connecti ons. After the search, connection s that are already available are shown and can be shared by a new access point. If you skip this step, you are asked to select a connection method and to define the settings needed. To edit the settings of an access point, open one of the access point groups, and select an access point. Follow the instructions from your service provider. Connection name â Enter a name for the connection. Data bearer â Select the data connection type. Depending on the data connect ion you select, only certain setting fields are available. Fill in all fields marked with Must be defined or with a red *. Other fields can be left empty, unless your service provider has instructed otherwise. To use a data connection, your service provider must support this feature, and if neces sary, activate it for your SIM card. Create access point groups Select Menu > Settings and Connectivity > Destinations . Some applications allow you to use access point groups for network connections. To avoid selecting a single a ccess point every time the device makes a network connection, you can create a group that conta ins various access poin ts to connect to that network and define the order in which the access points are used. For example, you can add wireless LAN (WLAN) a nd packet data access points to an intern et access point group, an d use the group for browsing the web. If you give WL AN the highest priority, the device connects to the internet through WLAN, if ava ilable, and through a packet data connection if not. To create a new acce ss point gr oup, sele ct Options > Manage > New destination . To add access points to an access point group, select the group and Optio ns > New access point . To copy an existing access point from another group, select the group, tap the releva nt access point if i t is not already highlighted, and select Op tions > Organise > Copy to other dest. . To change the priority of an access point within the group, select Options > Organise > Change priority . 65 Connectivity
Packet data access points Select Menu > Settings and Connec tivity > Destinations > Access point , and follow the instructions on the screen. To edit a packet data access point, open one of the access point groups, and select an access point marked with . Follow the instructions from your service provider. Select from the following: Access point name â You obtain th e access point name from your service provider. User nam e â The user name may be needed to make a data connectio n, and is usually provided by your service provider. Prompt passwo rd â If you must enter the password every time you log in to a server, or if you do not want to save your password in the device, se lect Yes . Password â A password may be needed to make a data connection and is usually provided by your service provider. Authenticati on â Select Secure to always send your password encrypted or Normal to send your password encrypted when possible. Homepage â Depending on th e access point you are setting up, enter the web address or the a ddress of the multimedia message centre. Use access point â Select Afte r confirmation if you want the device to ask for confirmat ion before the connection using this acce ss point is created, or Automatically if you want the device to connect to the destination using this access point automatically . Select Options > Advanced settings and from the following: Network type â Select the internet protocol type to transfer data to and from your device. The other settings depend on the selected network type. Phone IP addres s (for IPv4 only) â Enter the IP address of you r dev ice. DNS addresses â Enter the IP addresses of the primary and secondary DNS servers, if required by your service provider. To obtain these addresses, contact your internet service provider. Proxy server addres s â Enter the address of the proxy server. Proxy port nu mber â Enter the port numb er of the proxy server. WLAN interne t access poin ts Select Menu > Settings and Conne ctivity > Destinations > Access point , and follow the instructions. To edit a wireless LAN (WLA N) access point, open one of the access point groups, and select an access point marked with . Follow the instructions from your WLAN service provider. Select from the following: WLAN network name â Select Ent er manually or Search for networks . If you select an existing network, 66 Connectivity
WLAN network mode and WLAN security mode are determined by the settings of its access point device. Network status â Define whether the network na me is displayed. WLAN network mo de â Select Ad-hoc to create an ad hoc network and to allow devi ces to se nd and receive data directly; a WLAN access point device is not needed. In an ad hoc network, all devices must use t he same WLAN network name. WLAN security mode â Select the encryption used: not available for ad hoc netw orks). If you select Open network , no encryption is used. The WEP, 802.1x and WPA functions can be used only if the network supports th em. Homepage â Enter the web address of the starti ng page. Use access point â Set the device to creat e a connection using this access point automatically or after confirmation. The available options may vary. Active da ta conne ctions Select Menu > Settin gs and Connectivity > Connection mgr. . In the active data connections view, you can see the open data connect ions: data calls packet data connections wireless LAN (WLAN) connections Note: The actual invoice for ca lls and services from your service provider may vary , depending on network features, rounding off for bi lling, taxes, and so forth. To end a connection, select Optio ns > Disconne ct . To end all open co nnections, select Options > Disconn ect all . To view the details of a connection, se lect Options > Details . Synchronisation Select Menu > Settings and Connectivity > Data transfer > Sync . The Synchronisat ion application enables you to synchronise your notes, calendar entries, text and multimedia messages, browser bookmarks, or contacts with various compatible applications on a compatible computer or on the internet. You may receive synchronisati on settings in a special message from your service provider. A synchronisation profile contains the necessary settings for synchronisation. When you open the application , the default or previously used synchronisation profile is displayed. To modify the profile, tap a synchronisation item to include it in the profile or to leave it out. To manage sync hronisat ion profiles, select Options 67 Connectivity WEP , 802.1x , or WPA/WPA2 (802.1x and WPA/WPA2 are
and the desired option. To synchronise data, select Opti ons > Synchronise . To cancel synchronisation before it finishes, select Cancel . Bluetooth connectivity About Bluetooth conne ctivity With Bluetooth connect ivity , you can make a wireless connection to other compatib le devices, such as mobile phones, computers, headsets, and car kits. You can use the connection to send images, video clip s, music and sound clips, an d notes, transfer files from your compatible PC, and print images with a compatible printer. Since devices with B luetooth wireless technolog y communicate usin g radio waves, they do not n eed to be in direct line-of-sight. Howe ver, they mus t be within 10 metres (33 feet) of each ot her, although the connection may be subject to interference from obstructions such as walls or from other electronic devices. This device is compliant with Bluetooth Specification 2.0 EDR supporting the follo wing profiles: Dial-Up Net wo r kin g ( DU N) , O bje ct Pu sh Profile (OPP), File Transfer Profile (FTP), Hands Free Profile (HFP), Headset Profile (HSP), Basic Ima ging Profile (BIP), Remote SIM Acc ess Profile (SimAP), Device Id entification Profile (DI), Phonebook Access Profile (PBAP), Generic Audio/Video Distribution Profile (GAVDP), Audio/Video Remote Control Profile (AVRCP), Advanced Audio Distribution Profile (A2DP). To ensure interopera bility between other devices supporting Bluetooth technology, use Nokia approved accessories for this model. Check with the manufacturers of other devices to determine their compatibility with this devic e. Features using Bluetooth technology increa se the demand on battery power and reduce the battery life. When the device is locked, on ly connections to aut horised devices are possible. Settings Select Menu > Settings and Conne ctivity > Bluetooth . When you open the application for the first time, you are asked to define a name for your device. You can chan ge the name later. Select from the following: Blueto oth â Turn Bluetooth connectivity on or off. My phone's visibility â T o a l l o w y o u r d e v i c e t o b e f o u n d by other devices with Blue tooth wireless technology, select Shown to all . To set a time period a fter which the visibility is set from shown to hidden, select Set visibility period . To hide your device from other devices, select Hidden . My phone's name â Edit the name shown to other devices with Bluetooth wireless technology. Remote SIM mo de â Enable or disable another device, such as a compatible car kit acces sory, to use the SIM card in your device to connect to the network. 68 Connectivity
Security tips Select Menu > S ettings and Connectivity > Blu etooth . When you are not using Bluetooth conn ectivity, to cont rol who can find your device and connect to it, select Bluetooth > Off or My phone's visibili ty > Hidden . Deactivating Bluet ooth connectivity doe s not affect other functions of the device. Do not pair with or accept connection requests from an unknown device. This helps to protect your device from harmful content. Send data using Bluetooth connectivity Several Bluetooth connecti ons ca n be active at a time. For example, if you are connected to a compatible headset, you can also transfer files to another compatible device at the same time. 1 Open the application where the item you want to send is stored. 2 Tap an item, and s elect Options > Send > Via Bluetooth . Devices with Bluetooth wireless technology that a re within range are displayed. Device icons are as follows: compute r phone audio or video device other de vice To interrupt the search, select Stop . 3 Select the device with which you wa nt to connect. 4 If the other device requires pairing before data can be transmitted, a tone sounds, and you are asked to enter a passcode. The same passcode must be entered in both devices. When the connection is established, Sending dat a is displayed. Tip: When searching for devices, some de vices may show only the unique address (dev ice address). T o find the unique address of your device, enter *#2820# . Pair devices Select Menu > Settings and Connectivity > Bluetooth . To pair with compatible dev ices and view your paired devices, open the Paired de vices tab. Before pairing , crea te you r own p asscod e (1 to 16 dig its), and agree with the owner of the other device to use the same code. Devices th at do not have a user i nterface have a factory-set passcode . The pa sscode is used only once. 1T o p a i r w i t h a d e v i c e , s e l e c t Optio ns > New paired device . Devices that are within range are displayed. 2 Select the device, and en ter the passc ode. The same passcode must be entered on the other device, as well. 3 Some audio accessories connect automatica lly to your device after pairing. Othe rwise, to connect to an accessory, select Opt ions > Connect to audio device . Paired devices are indicated by in the device search. 69 Connectivity
To set a device as authorised or unauthorised, select from the following: Set as authorised â Connections between your device and the authorised device can be made without your knowledge. You will not be asked for authorisation or acceptance separately. Use this s tatus only for your own devices, such as your compatible headset or PC, or devices that belong to someone you trust. indicates authorised devices in the paired devices view. Set as unauthorised â Connection requests from this device must be accepted separately every time. To cancel a pairing with a device, select Options > Delete . To cancel all pairings, select Options > Delete all . Receive data using Bluetooth connectivity When you receive data through Bluetooth conn ectivity, a tone sounds, and you are asked if you w ant to accept the message . If you accep t, is displayed, and the item is placed in the Inbox folder in Messag ing. Messa ges rece ived through Bluetooth connectivity a re indicated by . Block dev ices Select Menu > Settings and Connec tivity > Bluetooth . To block a device from establishing a Bluetooth connection to your device, open the Paired devic es tab. Tap a device you want t o bl ock, if it is not already highlighted, and select Options > Bl ock . To unblock a device, open the Blocked devices tab, tap a device, if it is not already highlighted, and select Options > Delete . To unblock all blocked devices, select Options > Delet e all . If you reject a pairing reques t from another device, you are asked if you want t o block a ll future connec tion requests from this device. If you accept the query, the remote device is added to the list of blocked devices. Remote SIM mo de Select Menu > Settings and Conne ctivity > Bluetooth . Before the remote SIM mode can be activated, the two devices must be paire d and th e pairing initiated from the other device. When pairing, use a 16-digit passcode, and set the other device as authorised. To use the remote SIM mode with a compatible car kit accessory, activate Bluetooth connectivity , and enable the use of the remote SIM mode with your device. Activate the remote SIM mo de from the other device. When the remote SIM mode is on in your device, Remote SIM mode is displayed in the home screen. The connection to the wireless network is turned off, as indicated by in the signal strength indicator area , and you cannot u se SIM card services or features requiring cellular network covera ge. 70 Connectivity
When the wireless device is in the remote SIM mode, you can only use a compat ible con nected a ccessory, such as a car kit, to make or receive calls. Your wireless device will not make any calls while in this mode, except to the emergency numbers programmed into your device. To make calls from your device , you must leave the remote SIM mode. If the device is locked, enter the lock code to unlock it. To leave the remote SIM mode, press the power key, and select Exit remote SIM mode . USB Select Menu > S ettings and Connectivity > US B . To have the device ask the pu rpose of the connection each time a compatible data cable is connected, select Ask o n connection > Yes . If the Ask on connection option is turned off or you want to change the mode during an active connection, select USB connection mode and from the following: PC Suite â Use Nokia PC applications such as Nokia Ovi Suite, and Nokia So ftware Up dater. Mass storage â Transfer data between your device and a compatible PC. Image transfer â Print images w ith a compatible printer . Media transfer â Synchronise music with Nokia Music or Windows Media Player. PC connections You can use your mobile device with a variety of compatible PC connectiv ity and data communica tions applications. With Nokia Ovi Suite you can, for exampl e, transfer files and im ages between your device and a compatible computer. To use Ov i Suite wit h USB connection mode, select PC Suite mode . For more information about Ov i Suite, see the support area at www.ovi.com. Administra tive setti ngs Packet data sett ings Select Menu > Settings and Connectivity > Admin. settings > Packet data . The packet data settings affect all a ccess points using a packet data connection. Select from the following: Packet data connection â If you select When available and you are in a network that sup ports packet data, the device registers to the packet data network. Starting an active packet data connection (for example, to send and receive e-mail) is quicker than if the device 71 Connectivity
establishes a packet data connection when needed. If there is no packet data cove rage, the dev ice peri odica lly tries to establish a packet data connection. If you select When needed , the device uses a packet data connection only if you start an app licat ion or action that needs it. Access point â The access point name is needed to us e your device as a packet data modem to a compatible computer. High speed packet access â Enable or disable the use of HSDPA (network servic e) in UMTS networks. SIP settings Select Menu > Settings and Connec tivity > Admin. settings > SIP settings . Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) settings are needed for certain network services using SIP. You may receive the settings in a spec ial text message from your service provider. You can view, delete, or create these setting profiles in SIP settings. Access point name control Select Menu > Settings and Connec tivity > Admin. settings > APN control . With the access point name cont rol service, you can restrict packet data connect ions and allow your device to use only ce rtain pa cket data acces s points. This s ettin g is on ly ava ilable if your SIM card supports the access point control service. To turn the control service on or off, or to change the allowed access points, select Options and the corresponding option. To ch ange the options, you need your PIN2 code. Contact yo ur service provider for t he code. 72 Connectivity
Internet With the Web browser, you can view hypertext markup language (HTML) we b pages on the internet as originally designed. You can also browse web pages that are designed specifically for mobile devices, and use extensible hypertext ma rkup language (XHTML) , or the wireless markup langua ge (WML). To browse the web, you need to have an internet access point configured in your device. Using the web browser requires network support. Browse the web Select Menu > Web . To browse the web, select Go to web addr ess from the toolbar, and enter a web address. By default, the browser is in full screen mode. To exit full screen mode, select the arrow icon in the bottom right corner. Some web pages may contai n material, such a s graphics or video clips, that requires a large amount of memory to view. If your device runs ou t of memory while loading such a web page, insert a memory card. Otherwise, the video clips are not displayed. To browse web pages with g raphics disabled, to save memory and increase the page loading speed, select Options > Settin gs > Page > Load content > Text only . To refresh the content of the web page, select Options > Web page options > Reload . To save the current web pa ge as a bookmark, select Options > Web page options > Save as bookmark . To view snapsh ots of the web pag es you have visited during the current browsing session, select Ba ck (available if History list is activated in the browser settings and the current web pag e is not the first we b page you visi t). To prevent or allow the automatic opening of multiple windows, select Options > Web page op tions > Block pop-ups or Allow pop-ups . To zoom in on a web page, double-tap the display. Tip: To send the browser to the background without exiting the application or co nnection, press the end key once. Browser toolbar The browser toolbar helps yo u select frequently used functions of the browser. To open the toolbar when br owsing, select the arrow in the bottom right corner. From the toolbar, sele ct from the following: Expand toolbar â Expand the toolbar to access more toolba r function s. Go to web address â Enter a web address. 73 Internet
Show zoom â Zoom in or out on the web page. To use the expanded toolbar, select Expand toolbar and from the following: Go to feeds â View your current feed subscriptions. Send UR L â Send the web addr ess of the current page to another device. Switch win. â Switch between open browser windows. Subsc. feeds â View a list of available web feeds on the current web page, and subscribe to a web feed. Settings â E dit the settings. Save bkmrk. â Save the current web page as a bookmark. Reload â Refresh the web page. Overview â View an overview of the current web page. Homepage â Go to the homepage (if defined i n settings). Bookmarks â Open the bookmarks view. Find keywd. â Search on the current web page. Navigate p ages When you are browsing a web page that contains a large amount of information, you ca n use Page overview to view what kind of information the web page contains. To see an overview of the current web page, open the toolbar, and select > . Web feeds and blogs Select Menu > Web . Web feeds are XML files on web pages that are used to share, for example, the latest news headlines or blogs. It is common to find web feeds on web, blog, and wiki pages . The browser application automa tically detects if a web page contains web feeds. If web feeds are available, to subscrib e to a web feed, select Options > Subscribe to web feeds . To update a web feed, in the Web feeds view, select a feed and Options > Web feed op tions > Refresh . To define whether the web feeds are updated automatically, in the We b feeds view, select Op tions > Edit > Edit . This option is not available if one or more feeds are marked. Content search Select Menu > Web . To search for text within the current web page, select Options > Find keyword . To go to the next match, from the toolbar, select Find next . To go to the previous match, from the toolbar, select Find previous . 74 Internet
Bookmarks Select Menu > Web . Select Options > Go to > Bookmarks . You can select web addresses from a list or from a collection of bookmarks in the Recently visited pages folder. The toolbar helps yo u select frequently used functions of the browser. From the toolbar, sele ct from the following: Add bookmark â Add a new bookmark. Go to web address â Enter a new web address. Delete â Delete a bookmark. To go to a new web p age, select Options > Go to > New web page . To send and add bookmarks, or to set a bookmark as the homepage, select Optio ns > Bookmark options . To edit, move, or delete bookmarks, select Options > Bookmark manager . Empty the cache The information or services you have accessed are stored in the cache memory of the device. A cache is a memory location tha t is used to store data temporarily. If you have tried to access or have accessed confidential information re quiring passwords, empty the cache after each use. To empty the cache, select Options > Clear privacy data > Cache . End the co nnecti on To end the connection and close the browser, select Options > Exit . To delete the information the ne twork server collects about your visits to various web pages, select Option s > Clear privacy data > Cookies . Connection security If the security indica tor ( ) is displayed during a connection, the data transmission between the device and the internet gateway or server is encrypted. The security icon does not indi cate that the da ta transmission between the ga teway and the cont ent server (where the data is stored) is secure. The service provider secures the data transmi ssion between the gateway and the content server. Security certificates may be required for some services, such as banking services. You ar e notified if the identity of the server is not authentic or if you do not have the correct security certificate in your device. For more information, contact your service provider. Important: Even if the use of certificates makes the risks involved in remote connecti ons and software instal lation considerably smaller, they must be used correctly in order to benefit from increased se curity. The existence of a 75 Internet
certificate does not offer an y protection by itself; t he certificate manager must contai n correct, authentic, or trusted certificates for increased se curity to be available. Certificates have a restricted lifetime. If "Expired certificate" or "Certificate not valid yet" is shown, even if the certificate should be valid, check th at the current date and time in your device are correct. Before changing any certific ate settin gs, you mu st make sure that you really trust the owner of t he certificate and that the certificate really belong s to the listed owner. Web setting s Select Menu > Web and Options > Settings and from th e following: General setti ngs Access point â Change the default access point. Some or all access points may be preset for your device by your service provider. You may not be able to change, create, edit, or remove them. Homepage â Define the homepage. History list â If y ou select On , while browsing, to see a list of the pages you have visited during the current session, select Back . Web address suffix â Enter a web address suffix that the device uses by default when you enter a web address in the Go to field (for example, .com or .org). Security warnings â Hide or show security notificati ons. Java/ECMA s cript â Enable or disable the use of scrip ts. Java/ECMA script errors â Select whether you want to receive script notifications. Open whil e download ing â Select whether you want to be able to open a file while it is being downloaded. Page setting s Load co ntent â Select w hether you want to load imag es and other objects while br owsing. If yo u select Text only , to load images or objects later during browsing, select Options > Di splay option s > Load images . Default encoding â If text char acters are not shown correctly, you can select an other encoding according to the language for the current page. Block pop-ups â Allow or block automatic opening of different pop-up s while browsing. Automatic reload â Select whether you want the web pages to be refreshed automatically while browsing. Font size â Define the font size that is used for web pages. Privacy sett ings Recently visited pages â Enable or disable automatic bookmark collectin g. If you want to continue saving th e addresses of the visited web pages into the Recently visited pa ges folder, but hide the folder from the bookmarks view, select Hide folder . Form data saving â Select whether you want t he password data or data you en ter on different forms on a web page to be saved and us ed the next time you open the page. Cookies â Enable or disable the receiving and sending of cookies. 76 Internet
Web feed settings Acc. point for auto-upda te â Select the desired access point for updating. This opt ion is only available when Automatic u pdates is active. Update when roaming â Select whether you want the web feeds to be updated automa tically when roaming. 77 Internet
Positioning (GPS) You can use applications such as GPS data to calcula te your location or measure distance s. These applications require a GPS connection. About GPS The coordinates in the GPS are expressed using the international WGS-84 coordin ate system. The availability of the coordinates may vary by region. The Global Positioning System (GPS) is operated by the government of the United States, which is solely responsible for its accura cy and main tenance. The accuracy of location data can be affected by adjustments to GPS satellites made by the United Sta tes government and is subject to change with th e United States Department of Defense civil GPS policy and the Federal Radionavigation Plan . Accuracy can also be affected by poor satellite geometry. Avai lability and quality of GPS signals may be affected by your location, buildings, natural obstacles, and weather conditi ons. GPS signals may not be available inside buildings or underground and may be impaired by materials such as concrete and metal. GPS should not be used for precise location measurement, and you should never rely solely on location data from the GPS receiver and cellular rad io networks for positioning or navigation. The trip meter has limited ac curacy, and rounding errors may occur. Accuracy can also be affected by availability and quality of GPS signals. Different positioning methods can be enabled or disabled in positioning settings. Assisted GPS (A- GPS) Your device also supports A ssisted GPS (A-GPS ). A-GPS is a network service. Assisted GPS (A-GPS) is used to retrieve assistance data over a packet data connection , which assists in calculating the coordinates of your current location when your device is receiving signals from satellites. When you activate A-GPS, your device receives useful satellite informati on from an assista nce data serv er over the cellular network. With the help of assisted data, your device can obtain the GPS position faster. Your device is preconfigured to use the Nokia A-GPS service, if no service provider-specific A-GPS settings are available. The assist ance data is retrieved from the Nokia A-GPS service server only when needed. You must have an internet access point defined in the device to retrieve assistance data from the Nokia A-GPS service over a packet data co nnection. To define an access point for A-GPS, select Menu > Appli cations > Location and Posi tioning > Positioning se rver > Access point . A wireless LAN (WLAN) access point cannot be used for th is service. Only a packet data internet access point can be used. Your device asks for th e internet access point when GPS is used for the first time. 78 Positioning (GPS)
Hold your device correctly When using the GPS receiver, ensure you do not cover the antenna with your han d. Establishing a GPS connection may take from a couple of seconds to several minutes. Es tablishing a GPS connecti on in a vehicle may take longer. The GPS receiver draws its power from the device battery. Using the GPS receiver may drain the battery faster. Tips on creating a GPS connection Check satellite signal status To check how many satellites you r device has found, and whether your device is receiv ing satellite signals , select Menu > Applications > Locat ion and GPS data > Options > Satellite sta tus . If your device has found satelli tes, a bar for each satellite is shown in the satellite info view. The longer the bar, the stronger the satellite signal. When your device has received enough data from the satellite signal t o calculate your location, the bar colour changes. To view the positions of found satellites, select Chg. view . Initially your device must rece ive signals from at least four satellites to be able to ca lculate your location. When the initial calculation has been made, it may be p ossible to continue calculating your lo cation with three sat ellites. However, the accuracy is generally better when more satellites are found. If n o s at el li te s ig na l ca n b e found, c onsider the following: ⢠If you are indoors, go outdoors to receive a better signal. ⢠If you are outdoors, move to a more open spac e. ⢠Ensure that your hand does not cover the GPS a ntenna of your device. ⢠If the weather conditions ar e bad, the signal strength may be affected. ⢠Some vehicles have tin ted (athermic) windows, whi ch may block the s atellite signals. 79 Positioning (GPS)
Position req uests You may receive a request from a network service to receive your position information. Service providers may offer information about local topics, such as weather or traffic conditions, based on the location of your dev ice. When you receive a position request, the service that is making the request is displayed. Select Accept to allow your position information to be sent or Reje ct to deny the reques t. Landma rks Select Menu > Applica tions > Locatio n and Landma rks . With Landmarks, you can sa ve the position information of specific locations in your de vice. You can sort the saved locations into different catego ries, such as business , and add other information to them, such as addresses. You ca n use your saved lan dmarks in compatible applications, such as GPS data. GPS coordinates are expres sed using the international WGS-84 coordinate system. Select Optio ns and from the following: New landmark â Crea te a new landmark. To make a positioning request for your current location, select Current positio n . To enter the position information manually, select Enter manually . Edit â Edit or add information to a saved landmark (for example, a street address). Add to category â Add a landmark to a category in Landmarks. Select each catego ry to which you want to add the landmark. Send â Send one or several landmarks to a compatible device. Your received landmarks are placed in the Inbox folder in Messaging. You can sort your landmarks into preset categories, and create new categories. T o edit and create new landmark categories, ope n the categories tab, and select Options > Edit categories . GPS data Select Menu > Applica tions > Location and GPS data . GPS data is designed to provide route guidance information to a select ed destination, position information about your curre nt location, and travelling information, such as the approximate distance to the destination and the approxim ate duration of travel. The coordinates in the GPS are expressed using the international WGS-84 coordinate system. To use GPS data, the GPS rece ive r of your device must initially receive position in formation from at least four satellites to calculate your location. When the initial calculation has been made, it may be possible to continue calculating your location wi th three satellites. However, the accuracy is generally bette r when more satellites are found. Route guidance Select Menu > Applicat ions > Location and GPS data > Naviga tion . 80 Positioning (GPS)
Start the route guidance outdoor s. If started indoors, the GPS receiver may not receive the necessary information from the satellites. Route guidance is designed to show the straightest route and the shortest distance to the destination, measured in a straight line. A ny obstacles on the route , such as buildings and natura l obstacles, are ignored. Differences in altitude are not taken into a ccount when calculating the distance. Route guidance is active only when you move. To set your trip destinati on, select Op tions > Set destinati on and a landmark as the destination, or enter the latitude and longitude coordinates. To clear the destination set for your trip, select Stop navigation . Retrieve posi tion information Select Menu > Applic ations > Locat ion and GPS dat a > Position . In the position view, you can view the position information of your current lo cation. An estimate of the accuracy of the location is displayed. To save your current location as a landmark, select Options > Save positi on . Landmarks are saved locations with more information, a nd th ey can be used in other compatible applicati ons and transferred between compatible devices. Trip meter Select Menu > Applic ations > Locat ion and GPS dat a > Trip distance . The trip meter has limited accuracy, and rounding errors may occur. Accuracy can also be affected by availability and quality of GP S signals. To turn trip distance calculation on or off, select Options > Start or Stop . The calculated values remain on the display. Use this featur e outdoors to receive a better GPS signal. To set the trip distance and time and av erage and maximum speeds to zero, and to start a new calculation , select Options > Reset . To set the odometer and total time to zero, select Restart . Position ing set tings Select Menu > Applications > Location and Position ing . Position ing meth ods Select from the following: Integrated GPS â Use the integrated GPS receiver of your device. Assisted GPS â Use Assisted GPS (A-GPS) to receive assistance data from an assistance data server. Bluetooth GPS â Use a compatible external GPS receiver with Bluetooth connecti vity. Network based â Use information from the cellular network (network service). 81 Positioning (GPS)
Positioni ng server To define an access point and positioning server for network-assisted p ositioning met hods, such as a ssisted GPS or network-based positioning, select Position ing server . The positioning server may be preset by your service provider, and you may not be able to edit the setting s. Notation se ttings To select which measu rement system you want to us e for speeds and distances, s elect Measur ement system > Metric or Imperial . To define in which format the coordinate information is displayed in your devi ce, select Coordinate format and the desired format. 82 Positioning (GPS)
Maps Maps overvi ew Select Menu > Maps . Welcome to Maps. Maps show s you wh at is nearby, helps you pl an your rout e, and guides you where you want to go. ⢠Find cities, street s, and services. ⢠Find your way wit h tu rn-by-turn directions. ⢠Synchronise your favour ite locations and routes between your mobile device and the Ovi Maps internet service. ⢠Check weather foreca sts an d other local information, if available. Note: Downloading c ontent su ch as maps, satellite images, voice files, guides or traffic information may involve transmission of larg e amounts of data (network service). Some services may not be available in a ll countries, and may be provided only in sele cted languages. The services may be network dependent. For more information, contact your network service provider. Almost all digital cartography is inaccurate and incomplete to some extent. Never rely solely on the cartography that you download for use in this device. Content such as satellite ima ges, guides, weather and traffic information and relate d services are gener ated by third parties independent of Nokia. The content may be inaccurate and incomp lete to some extent and is subject to availability. Never rely solely on the aforementioned content and related services. About position ing methods Maps displays your location on the map using GPS, A-GPS, or cell ID based positioning. The Global Positioning System (GPS) is a sa tellite-based navigation system used for calculating your location. Assisted GPS (A -GPS) is a network service that sends you GPS data, improving the speed and accuracy of the positioning. When you use Maps for the first time, you are prompted to define an internet a ccess point to download map information or use A-GPS. indicates the ava ilability of the satellite signals. One bar is one satellite. When the device is searching for satellite signals, the bar is yellow. When there is enough data availabl e to calculate your location, the bar turns green . The more green bars, the more reliable the location calculation. The Global Positioning System (GPS) is operated by the government of the United States, which is solely responsible for its accura cy and maintenance. The accuracy of location data can be affected by adjustments to GPS satellites made by th e United States government and is subject to change with the United States Department of Defense civil GPS policy and the Federal Radionavigation Plan. Accuracy can also be affected by poor satellite geometry . Availability and quality of GPS 83 Maps
signals may be affected by your location, buildings, natural obstacles, and weather conditi ons. GPS signals may not be available inside buildings or underground and may be impaired by materials such as concrete and metal. GPS should not be used for precise location measurement, and you should never rely solely on location data from the GPS receiver and cellular rad io networks for positioning or navigation. The trip meter has limited ac curacy, and rounding errors may occur. Accuracy can also be affected by availability and quality of GPS signals. With cell ID based positioning, the position is determined through the antenna tower your mobile device is currently connected to. Depending on the availa ble positioning meth od, the accuracy of positioning may vary from a few metres to several kilometres. Use the c ompass If your device has a compass, when acti vated, both the arrow of the compass and the map rotate automa tically in the direction to which the top of your device is point ing. Select Menu > Maps and My position . Activate the compass Select . Deactivate the compass Select again. The map is oriented north. The compas s is active when ther e is a green outline. If the compass needs calibration, the outline of the compass is red or yello w. To calibrat e the compass , rotate the dev ice around all axes in a continuou s movement. The compass has limited accura cy. Electrom agnetic fields, metal objects, or other exte rnal circumstances may also affect the accuracy of the compass. The compass should always be properly calibrated. View your location and the map See your current location on the map, and br owse maps of different cities and countries. Select Menu > Maps and My position . When the GPS connection is active, marks your current or last known location on the map. If the icon's c olours are faint, no GPS sign al is available. If only cell ID based positioning is available, a red halo around the positioning icon in dicates the general area you might be in. The accuracy of the estimate increases in densely populated areas. Move on the map Drag the map with your finger. By default, the map is oriented north. View your current or last known location Select . 84 Maps
Zoom in or out Select or - . If you browse to an area no t covered by maps that are stored on your device and you have an active data connection, new maps are automatica lly downloaded. Map coverage varies by country and region. Map view 1 Selected location 2 Indicator area 3 Point of interest (for exam ple, a railway station or a museum) 4 Information area Change the look of the map View the map in different mode s, to easily identify where you are. Select Menu > Maps and My position . Select and from the following: Map view â In the standard ma p view, details such as location names or motorway numbers, are easy to read. Satellite v iew â For a detailed view, use satellite images. Terrain view â View at a glance the ground type and altitude, for example, when you are travelling off-road. 3D â For a more realistic view, change the perspective of the map. Landmarks â Display prominent buildings and attractions on the map. Night mode â Dim the colours of the map. When travelling at night, the map is easier to read in this mode. Find a location Maps helps you fin d specif ic locations and types of business you are looking for. Select Menu > Maps and Find places . 1 Enter search te rms, such as a stree t address or postcode. To clear the search field, select . 2 Select . 3 Select an item from the list of proposed matches. The location is displayed on the m ap. To view the other locations of the search result list on the map, 85 Maps
select one of the arrows beside the information area ( ). Return to the list of pro posed matche s Select List . Search for different types of nearby places Select Browse categories and a category, such a s shopping, accommodation, or transport. If no search results are found, ensure the sp elling of your search terms is correct. Pr oblems with your internet connection may als o affect re sults when searc hing online. To avoid data transfer costs , you can also get search results without an active internet conn ection, if you have maps of the searched area stored on your device. To ensure your device does not use the internet connection, in the main menu, select > Internet > Connection > Offline . View location details View more information about a specific location or place, such as a hotel or restaurant, if available. Select Menu > Maps and My position . View the detai ls of a place Select a place, its informat ion area ( ), and Show details . Rate a place Select a place, its in formation area ( ), Show details , and the star rating. For example, to rate a place a s being 3 out of 5 stars, select the third st ar. To rate a plac e, you need an active i nternet connection. When you find a place that does not exist or contains inappropriate information or in correct details, such as the wrong contact information or location, it is recommended that you report it to Nokia. Report incorrect information Select a place and its information area ( ), and select Show details > Re port this P lace and the appropriate option. To report a place, you need an active internet connection. The available options may vary. Plan a route Plan your journey, and create your route and view it on the map before setting off. Select Menu > Maps . Create a route 1 In the map view, tap a location. To search for an address or place, select Search . 2 Tap the location's information area ( ). 3 Select Add to route . 4 To add another route point, select Add new ro ute point and the appropriate option. Change the order of the route points 1 Select a route point. 86 Maps
2 Select Move . 3 Tap the place where you want to move the route point to. Edit the locati on of a r oute point Tap the route poin t, and select Edit and the appropria te option. View the route on the map Select Show route . Navigate to the destination Select Show route > Options > Start driving or St art walking . Change the settings for a route The route settings affect the na vigation guidance a nd the way the route is di splayed on the map. 1 In the route planner view, open the Settings tab. To get to the route planner view from the navigation view, select Opt ions > Route points or Ro ute point list . 2 Set the transportation mode t o Drive or Walk . If you select Walk , one-way streets are regarded as normal streets, and w alkways and routes through , for example, parks and shopping centres, can be used. 3 Select the desired option. Select the walking mode Open the Settings tab, and select Walk > Preferred route > Streets or Straight line . Straight line is useful on off-road terrain as it in dicates the walking direction. Use the faste r or shorte r driving route Open the Settings tab, and select Drive > Route selection > Faster route or Shorter route . Use the opt imised dri ving route Open the Settings tab, and select Drive > Route selection > Optimised . The optimised driving route combines the advantages of both the shorter and the faster routes. You can also choose to allow or avoid using, for example, motorways, toll roads , or ferries. Save places and routes Save addresses, places of interest, and routes, so they can be quickly used later. Select Menu > Maps . Save a place 1 In the map view, tap the loca tion. To search for an address or place, select Search . 2 Tap the location's information area ( ). 3 Select Save place . Save a route 1 In the map view, tap the loca tion. To search for an address or place, select Search . 2 Tap the location's information area ( ). 3 To add another route point, select Add to route . 4 Select Add new route point and the appropriate option. 87 Maps
5 Select Show route > Options > Save route . View your saved places and routes Select Favourites > Places or Rout es . View and organ ise places or routes Use your Favourites to quickly access the places and routes you have saved. Group the places and routes into a co llection, for example, when planning a trip. Select Menu > Maps and Favourites . View a saved place on th e map 1 Select Places . 2 Go to the place. 3 Select Map . To return to the list of saved places, select List . Create a collection Select Create new collection , and enter a collec tion name. Add a saved place to a collection 1 Select Places an d the place. 2 Select Organise collections . 3 Select New colle ction or an existi ng collection. If you need to delete places or routes, or add a route to a collection, go to the Ovi Maps internet service at www.ovi.com. Send places to your friends When you want to share pl ace information with your friends, send these details directly to their devices. Send a place to your fr iend's compatible d evice Select a location on th e map, tap the location's information area ( ), and select Send . Synchronise your Favourites Plan a trip on your computer at the Ovi Maps website, synchronise the saved places , routes, and collections with your mobile device, and ac cess the plan on the go. To synchronise plac es, routes , or collections between your mobile device and the Ovi Maps internet service, you need a Nokia account. If you do not have one, in the main view, select Accounts > Nokia account > Crea te new account . Synchronise save d places, routes, and collections Select Favourites > Synchron ise with Ovi . If you do not have a Nokia ac count, you are prompted to create one. Set the device to synchron ise Favourites automatically Select and Synchronisati on > Synchronisation > At start-up and shut-d. . The device starts the synchronisation when you open or close the Maps application. Synchronising requires an acti ve internet connection, and may involve the transmission of large amounts of data through your service providerâÂÂs network. Contact your 88 Maps
service provider for information about data transmission charges. To use the Ovi Maps internet service, go to www.ovi.com. Share location Publish your current location to Facebook, together w ith text and a photo. Your Facebook friends can see your location on a map. Select Menu > Maps and Share location . To share your location , you need a Nokia accou nt and a Facebook account. 1 Select Share location . 2 Sign in to your Nokia ac count, or, if you do not yet have one, select Create new account . 3 Sign in to your Facebook account. 4 Select your current location. 5 Enter your status update . 6 To attach a phot o to your post, select Add a photo . 7 Select Share location . Manage your Facebook a ccount In the main view, select Accounts > Share location settings > Facebook . Sharing your location and vi ewing the location of others requires an internet connec tion. This may involve the transmission of large amou nts of data and related data traffic costs. The applicable Facebook terms of use apply to sharing your location to Facebook. Familiarise yourself with the Facebook terms of us e and the privacy prac tices, and use appropriate consideration before disclosing your locati on data to others or viewin g the location of others. Before sharing your location , always consider carefully with whom you are sharin g. Check the privacy settings of the social network you are using a s you might share your location with a large group of people. Get voice guidance Voice guidance, if available for your language, helps you find your way to a destination , leaving you free to enjoy the journey. Select Menu > Maps and Drive or Walk . When you use drive or walk na vigation for th e first time, you are asked to select the language of the voice guidance, and download the appro priate files. If you select a la nguage that inc ludes street nam es, also the street names are said al oud. Voice guidance may not be available for your language. Change the voice guidance language In the main view, select and Navigation > Drive guidanc e or Walk guid ance and the appropriate option. When you are walking, in addi tion to voice guidance, your device can guide you wi th beep s and vibrations. 89 Maps
Use beeps and vib rations In the main view, select and Navig ation > Walk guidance > Beeps and Vibrations . Repeat the voice guidance for car navigation In the navigation view, select Option s > Repeat . Adjust the vo lume of the vo ice guidance for car navig ation In the navigation view, select Option s > Volume . Walk to yo ur destinatio n When you need directions to follow a route on foot, Maps guides you over squares, an d through parks, pedestrian zones, and ev en shopping centres. Select Menu > Maps . Walk to a destination Select Set destinatio n and the appropriate op tion. Walk to your home Select Walk home . When you select Drive home or Walk home for the first time, you are prompted to define you r home location. To later change the home lo cation, do the following: 1 In the main view, select . 2 Select Naviga tion > Home Location > Redefine . 3 Select the appropriate option. Tip: To walk without a set destination, select Map . Your location is displayed on the ce ntre of the map as you move. Drive to yo ur destination When you need turn-by-turn directions while driving, Maps helps you get to your destination. Select Menu > Maps and Drive . Drive to a destination Select Set destinatio n and the appropriate option. Drive to your home Select Drive home . When you select Drive home or Walk home for the first time, you are prompted to de fine your home location. To later change the home location, do the following: 1 In the main view, select . 2 Select Navigation > Home Location > Redefine . 3 Select the appropriate option. Tip: To drive without a set destina tion, select Map . Yo ur location is displayed on the ce ntre of the map as you move. Change views during navigation Swipe the screen, and select 2D vi ew , 3D view , Arrow view , or Route overview . Obey all local laws. Always k eep your hands free to operate the vehicle while driving. Your first consideration while driving should be road safety. 90 Maps
Get traffic and safety info rmation Enhance your driving experience with real-time information about traffi c events, lane assistan ce, and speed limit warni ngs, if av ailable for your country or region. Select Menu > Maps and Drive . View traffic ev ents on the map During drive navi gation, select Options > Traffic info . The events are displayed as triangles and lines. Update traffic information Select Options > Traffic info > Update traffic info . When planning a route, you can set the device to avoid traffic events, such as tr affic jams or roadworks. Avoid traffi c events In the main view, select and Navigation > Reroute due to traffic . The location of speed came ras may be shown on your route during navigation, if th is feature is enabled. Some jurisdictions prohibit or regu late the use of speed camera location data. Nokia is not re sponsible for the accuracy, or the consequences of using sp eed camera location data. Download and update ma ps To avoid mobile data transfer costs, download the latest maps and voice gu idance files t o your computer using the Nokia Map Loader application, and then transfer and save them to your device. To download and install Nokia Map Loader on your compatible computer, go to www.nokia.com/maps , and follow the instructions. Tip: Save new maps to your de vice before a journey, so you can browse the maps without an internet connecti on when travelling abroad. Before using Nokia Map Loader, you must browse maps in the Maps application in yo ur device at least once . Download maps with Nokia Map Loader 1 Connect your device to your compatible computer with a compatible USB data cable or Bluetooth connection. If you use a data cable, select PC Suite as the USB connection method. 2 Open Nokia Map Loader on the computer. 3 If a new map version or new voice files are available for your device, you are prompted to update the data. 4 Select a continent and a coun try. Larger countries may have several sub-maps so you can download the maps relevant for you. 5 Select the maps, and download and install them to your device. 91 Maps
Camera Your device supports an im age capture resolution of 2592x1944 pixels (5 megapix els ). The image resolution in this guide may appear different. To ensure good quality ph otos, wipe the cam era lens carefully with a cleaning cloth. Image ca pture Capture and reco rding settings To open the capture and reco rd ing settings view before capturing an image or recording a video clip, select Menu > Applications > Camera and . The capture and recording settings view provides you wit h shortcuts to different items and settings before capturing an image or recording a video clip. The capture and recording sett ings return to the default settings after you close the ca mera. Select from the following: Select the scene. or Switch between video and image mode. or Show or hide the viewfinder grid (images only). Activate the self-timer (images only). Activate sequenc e mode (images o nly). Open Photos Image setting s: Select a colour effect. Adjust the white balance. Select the current lighting conditions. This allows the camera to reproduce colours more accurately. Adjust the exposure compens ation (images only). If you are shooting a dark subject agai nst a very light background, such as snow, adjust the exposure to 1 or 2 to compensate for the background brightness. For light subjects against a dark background, use - 1 or -2. Adjust light sensitivity (ima ges only). Increase the light sensitivity in low light condit ions to avoid too dark images and blurry images. Increasing t he light sensitivity may also increase the image noise. Adjust contrast (images on ly). Adjust the difference between the lightest and da rkest parts of the image. Adjust sharpn ess (images only). The screen dis play changes t o match the set tings you define. The capture settings are shooting-mode specific. Switching between the modes does not reset the defined settings. If you select a new scene, the capture settings are replaced by the selected scene. You ca n change the capture settings after selecting a scene if needed. 92 Camera
Saving the captured image ma y take longer if you change the zoom, lighting, or colour settings. Capture images When capturing an i mage, note the following: ⢠Use both hands to keep the camera still. ⢠The quality of a digita lly zoomed image is lower than that of a non-zoomed image. ⢠The camera goes into battery saving mode if there are no actions for about a minute. To continue capturing images, select Continue . ⢠Keep a safe distance when using the flash. Do not use the flash on people or animals at close range. Do not cover the flash while taking a picture. To capture an image with the main camera, do the following: 1 To switch from video mode to image mode, if necessary, select > . 2 To capture an image, pres s the capture key. Do not move the device before th e image is saved and the final image displayed. Capture images with second ary camera To capture an image, select . Do not move the device before the image is saved an d the final image displayed. To zoom in or out when capt uring an image, use the zoom slider. To leave the camera open in the background and use other application s, press the menu ke y. T o return to the camera, press and hold the capture key. On-screen controls and indicators for still image capture The still image viewfinder displays the following: 1 Capture mode indicator 2 Zoom slider. To turn the zo om slider on and off, tap the screen. 3 Capture icon. Tap to capture an imag e. 4 Flash mode. Tap to change sett ings. 5 Capture settings . Tap to change set tings. 6 Battery charge level indicator 7 Image resolution indicator 8 Image counter (the estimated nu mber of images you can capture using the curren t image quality se tting and available memory) 9 Memory in use. Depending on the setup of your device, there are the following options: device memory ( ). 10 GPS signal indicator 93 Camera
Locatio n informatio n You can automatically add capture location information to the file details of the captured material. For example, in the Photos application, you can then view the location where an image was captured. Select Menu > Applica tions > Camera . Add location inf ormation to all captured ma terial Select Optio ns > Settings > Show GPS info > On . The location information is availa ble only for images captured with the main camera. It may take several minutes to obta in the coordinates of your location. The availabilit y and quality of GPS signals may be affected by your lo cation, buildings, natural obstacles, and weather conditions. If you share a file tha t includes location inform ation, also the location information is shared, and your location may be visible to third parties viewing the file. The device requires network services to acquire location information. Location information indicators: â Location informat ion unavailable. GPS stays active in the background for seve ral minutes. If a satellite connection is made and the indicator changes to within that time, all the images cap t ured and video clips recorded during that time are ta gged based on the received GPS positioning information. â Location information is available. Location information is added to the file details. Files with location information are indicated with in the Photos application. After capturing an im age After you capture an image, select from the following options (available only if you have selected Options > Settings > Show capt ured image > Yes ): â Send the image in a mu ltimed ia or e-mail message, or through connection methods such as Bluetooth connectivity. â Upload the image to a compatible online album. Delete â Delete the image. To use the image as wallpaper in the home sc reen, select Options > Use image > Se t as wallpaper . To set the image as a default call image to be used for every call situation, select Options > Use image > Set as call image . To assign the image to a cont act, Options > Use image > Assign to contact . To return to the viewfinder to cap ture a new image, p ress the capture key. Flash and video light Keep a safe distance when us ing the flash. Do not use t he flash on people or animals at close range. Do not cover the flash whil e taking a pi cture. The camera of your device has a dual LED flash for low light conditions. 94 Camera
To select the desired flash mode, tap the current flash mode indicator, which is one of the following: Automatic , Red uce red , On , and Off . Avoid touching t he flash LEDs w hen the back cover has been removed. The L EDs may get h ot after prolon ged usage. Video light To increase light levels when recording video in low light, select . Scenes A scene helps you to find th e right colour and lighting settings for the current enviro nment. The s ettings of each scene have been set according to a certain style or environment. The default scene in image and video modes is indicated with ( Automatic ). To change the scene, select > Scen e mode and a scene. To create your own scene suitable for a certain environment, select User defined and Edit . In the us er defined scene, you can adjust different lighting and colour settings. To copy the settings of another scene, select Based on scene mode and the desired scene. To save the changes and return to the scenes list, select Back . To activate your own scene, select User de fined > Select Capture images in a sequence Select Menu > Applications > Camera . Sequence mode is available only in the main camera. To start capturing images in a quick sequence, select > Seq uence . To close the settings window, s elect . Press and hold the capture key. The device captures images until you se lect Stop or until the memory runs out. The captured images are disp layed in a grid. To view an image, select the image. To return to the sequence mode viewfinder, press the capture key. You can also use sequence mode with the s elf-timer. To deactivate sequence mode, select > Single s hot . You in the i mage â self-timer Use the self-timer to delay th e capture so that you can include yourself in the image. To set the self-timer delay, select > , and the delay needed before the image is captured. To activate the self-timer, select Activate . The stop watch icon on the screen blinks and the remaining time is displayed when the timer is running. The camera captures the image after the selected delay elapses. 95 Camera
To switch off the self-timer, select > > . Tip: Select 2 seconds to keep your hand steady when capturing an image. Video recording Record a video clip 1 To switch from image mode to video mode, if necessary, sele ct > . 2 To start recording, press the capture key, or select . A red record icon is displayed. 3 To pause recording, select Paus e . To resume, select Continue . If you pause recording an d do not press any key within one minute, the recording stops. To zoom in or out, use the zoom keys. 4 To stop recording, press the capture key. The video clip is automatically save d in Photos . Video recording on-screen controls and indica tors The video vi ewfinder di splays the following: 1 Capture mode indicator 2 Audio mute on indicator 3 Capture icon. Select to record video clips. 4 Video light indicator 5 Recording settings. Select to change s ettings. 6 Battery charge level indicator 7 Video quality indicator. To change this setting, select Options > Settings > Video quality . 8 Video clip file type 9 Available recording tim e. Wh en you are recording, the current video lengt h indicator also shows the elapsed and remaining time. 10 The location to which the video clip is saved 11 GPS signal indicator After recording a video clip After you record a video clip, select from the following options (available only if you have selected Op tions > Settings > Show last captured video > Yes ): Play â Play the video clip you just recorded. â Upload the image to a compatible online album. Delete â Delete the video clip. To return to the viewfinder to record a new video clip, press the capture key. Camera settings Still image camera sett ings To change the main settings, in image mode, select Options > Settings and from the following: Image quality â Set the resolution. The higher the image resolution, the more memory the image consumes. 96 Camera
Show captured image â View the image after it is captured, or continue im age captur ing immediat ely. Default image name â Define the default name for captured images. Capture tone â Set the tone that sounds when you capture an image. Memory in use â Select where to store your images. Show GPS info â To add GPS location coordinates to each image file, select On . Receiving a GPS signal ma y take time, or the signal may not be availa ble. Auto-rotate images â Select whether you want imag es that are captured wh en the device is held upright to be rotated when you open them in Photos. Restore camera se ttings â Restore the camera settings to the default va lues. Video settings To change the main set tings, in video mode, select Options > Settin gs and from the following: Video quality â Se t the quality of the video clip. Se lect Sharing , if you want to send the video clip using a multimedia message. The cl ip is recorded with QCIF resolution, in the 3GPP file fo rmat, and the size is limited to 600 kB (approximately one minute) . You may not be able to send video clip s save d in the MPEG4 file format in a multimedia message. Show GPS info â To add GPS location coordinates to each file, select On . Receiving the GP S signal may take time, or the signal ma y not be availa ble. Audio recordi ng â Record sound. Show la st captu red video â View the first frame of the recorded video clip after the recording stops. To view the entire video clip, select Play . Default video name â Enter the default name for recorded video clips. Memory in use â Select where to store your video clips. Restore camera se ttings â Restore the camera settings to the default v alues. 97 Camera
Photos About Phot os Select Menu > Photos and from the following: Captured â View all the images and video clips you have captured. Months â View images and video clips categorised by the month they were captured. Applicable only for content captured or recorded with your device. Albums â View th e default albums and th e ones you have created . Tags â View the tags you ha ve created for each item. Downloa ds â View items and video clips downloaded from the web, received as a multimedia or e-mail message, saved on a me mory card, or copied to phone memory from a memory card or other sources. Share online â Post your images or video clips t o the web. View images and videos Select Menu > Photos . Images and video clips can also be sent to you from a compatible device. To be able to view a received image or video clip in Photos, you must first save it. The images and video clip files are ordered by date and time. The number of files is di splayed. To browse the files, swipe up or down. To open a file, select the file . To view the toolbar, tap the image. To zoom in the imag e, use the zoom slider. The zooming ratio is not stored permanently. To edit an image or a video clip, select the file and Options > Edit . 98 Photos
To view the details of an image, s elect Optio ns > Details . To print your images on a compatible printer, select Options > Print . View and edit fi le details Select Menu > P hotos . To view and edit the properties of an image or a video clip, select the file, Optio ns > De tails , and from the following: Name â View the thumbnail image of the file a nd the current file name. To edit th e file name, select the file name field. Description â View a free-form description of the file. To add a description, select the field. Tag â View the cu rrently used tags. T o add more tags to the current file, select New tag . Album â View in which albums the current file is located. Location â View GPS location information, if available. Resolution â View the size of the image in pixels. Duration â View the length of the video clip. Licence â View the DRM rights of the current file. The available options may vary. Organise images and video clips Select Menu > P hotos . You can organise files as follows: To view items in the Tags view, add tags to the items. To view items by months, select Months . To create an album to store items, select Albums > Options > New album . To add an image or a video clip to an album, go to the item, and select Options > Add to album . To delete an image or video cl ip, go to th e item, an d select Options > Delete . Photos toolbar From the active toolbar, select the desired option. The available options vary depend ing on the view you are in and whether you have selected an image or a video clip. When viewing an image or a video clip in the full screen mode, tap the item to show the toolbar and the zoom slider. Select an image or a video clip and from the following: Send the image or video clip. Mark the image or video clip. Upload the image or vide o clip to a compatible online album (only availabl e if you have se t up an account for a compatible online album ). Delete the image or video clip. Rename the image or video clip. View images as a s lideshow. Create a new album. 99 Photos
Albums Select Menu > Photos and Albums . With albums, you can conven iently manage you r images and video clips. To create a new album , select . To add an image or a video clip to an album, select the item and Options > Add to album . A lis t of albums opens. Select the album to which you want to add the image or video clip. The item you added to the album is still visible in Photos. To remove an image or a video clip from an album, select the album and t he item, and select Options > Remove from album . Tags Select Menu > Photos . Use tags to categorise media items in Photos. Tag browser shows the currently used tag s and the number of items associated with each t ag. To assign a tag to an image, select the image and Options > Add tag . To create a tag, select New ta g . To see the tags you ha ve created, select Tags . The size of the tag name corresponds to the number of items the tag is assigned to. To view all the images associated with a tag, select the tag from the list. To view the list in alphabetical order, select Options > Name . To view the list in most fr equently used order, select Options > Popularity . To remove an image from a tag, select the tag and th e image, and select Options > Remove from tag . Slide show Select Menu > Photos . To view your images as a slide show, select an image a nd Options > Slide s how > Play . The slide show starts from the selected file. To view only a selection of images as a sl ide show, select Options > Mark/Unmark > Mark to mark the images. To start the slide show, select Options > Slide show > Play . To resume a paused slide show, select Co ntinue . To end the slide show, select Back . Before starting the slide show, to adjust the slide show settings, select Options > Slide sho w > Settings and from the following: Image orde r â Display images from older to newer or vice versa. Song â Select a music file from the list. Transition spee d â Adjust the tempo of the slide show. 100 Photos
To adjust the volume during the slide show, use the volume keys. TV-out mode To view the captured images and recorded video clips on a compatible TV, use a Nokia Video Co nnectivity Cab le. Before viewing the images and video clips on a TV, you may need to configure the TV-o ut settings an d aspect ratio. To view images and video clip s on a TV, do the following: 1 Connect a Nokia Video Con nectivity Cable to the video input of a compat ible TV. 2 Connect the other end of the Nokia Video Connectivity Cable to the Nokia AV Connector of your device. 3 You may need to select the cable mode. 4 Select Menu > Photos , and browse fo r the file you want to view . All audio, including active ca lls, stereo video clip audio, keypad tones, and ringing tone i s routed to the TV when the Nokia Video Connectivity Cable is connected to the device. You can use the device microphone normally. For content other than video cl ips, the TV screen displays what is displayed on the screen of your device. Video clips are only displayed on the TV screen, not on the device screen. You can view images as a slid e show on the TV. All items in an album or marked images are displayed on the TV in full screen mode while the selected music plays. The quality of the TV image may vary due to differing screen resolutions. You cannot use the TV as the camera viewfinder in TV-out mode. Wireless radio signals , such as incoming calls, may cause interference in the TV image. Edit image s Image editor To edit an image, in Photos, scroll to the image, and select Options > Edit . To add effects to your images, select Options > Add effect . You can crop and rota te the image; adjust the brightness, colour, contra st , and resolution; and add effects, text, clip art, or a frame to the image. 101 Photos
Crop image To crop an image, select Options > Add effect and ( Crop ). To crop the image manually, select Manual . A cross appears in the upper left and lower right corner of t he image. To adjust the crop borders, drag the crosses from the corners. To set the crop area, select Set . When the crop area is set, you can drag to move th e crop area without changing the size or aspect rat io. When you are satisfied with the crop area, select Crop . If you select a predefined aspe ct ratio, the selected aspect ratio is locked when you adjust the crop borders. Reduce red-eye To reduce red-eye in an image, select Options > Add effect and ( Red-eye reducti on ). Drag the cross onto the eye, and select Options > Se t . Drag to resize and move the loop to outline the eye, and select Op tions > Reduce red-eye effect . When you have finished editing the image, select Done . To save the chan ges and return to the previous view, select Back . Edit vide o clips The video editor supports 3GP and MP4 video file formats, and AAC, AMR, MP3, and WAV audio file formats. It does not necessarily support all features of a file format or all the variations of file formats. To edit video clips in Photos, scroll to a video clip, select Options > Edit , and from the following: Merge â Add an image or a video clip to the beginning or the end of the selected video clip. Change sound â Add a new sound clip, and replace the original sound in the video clip. Add text â Add text to the beginning or the end of the video clip. Cut â Trim the video and ma rk the sections you want to keep in the video clip. To take a snapshot of a video clip, in the cut video view, select Options > T ake snapshot . Image pr int You can print images from yo ur device using a printer compati ble with Pic tBridge. Y o u can only prin t im ages that are in the JPEG file format. To print images in Photos, camera, or image viewer, mark the images, and select Options > Print . Connect to pr inter In the Print submenu, select whet her you want to print the image using Bluetooth connecti vity or using a compatible USB data cable. If you want to print using a US B data ca ble, firs t connect your device to a compatible printer using the USB data 102 Photos
cable, and select Image transfer as the USB connection mode. Print preview After you select the printer, the selected images are displayed using predefined layouts. To change the layout, scroll left or right to browse through the available layouts for the se lected printe r. If the image s do not fit on a single page, sc roll up or down to display the additional pages. To select the paper size, select Paper size . To select the print quali ty, select Print quality . Share onlin e You can share images and vide o c lips in compatible online albums, weblogs, or in othe r compatible online sharing services on the web. You can upload content, save unfinished posts a s drafts and continue later, and view th e content of the albums. The supported con tent types may vary depending on the service provider. To share images an d videos online, you m ust have an account with an online image shar ing service. You ca n usually subscribe to such a service on the web page of your service provider. Contact your service provider for more information. Using this service may involv e the transmission of large amounts of data through your service provider's network. Contact your service provider for information about dat a transmission charges. The recommended connection method is WLAN. To upload a file from Photos to an online service, select Menu > Photos , the desired file and Options > Send > Upload or Share on Ovi . For more information on th e application and compatible service providers, see the Nokia product support pages or your local Nokia website. 103 Photos
Music Warning: Continuous exposure to high volume may damage your hearing. Listen to music at a moderate level, and do not hold the device near your ear when the loudspeaker is in use. Play a song or a podcast Select Menu > Music > Music library . To play a song or a pod cast: 1 Select categories to naviga te to the song or podcasts you want to hear. 2 To play an item, select the item from the list. To pause playba ck, tap ; to resume, tap . To fast-forward or rewind, tap and hold or . To go to the next item , tap . To return to the beginning of the item, tap . To skip to the previous item, tap again within 2 secon ds after a song or p odcast has started. To turn random play ( ) on or off, select Options > Shuffle play . To repeat the current item ( ), all items ( ), or to turn repeat off, select Options > Repeat . If you play podcasts, shuffle and repeat are automatically turned off. 104 Music
To modify the tone of the music playback, select Options > Equaliser . To modify the balance and stereo image or to enhance the bass, select Options > Settings . To return to the home screen and leave the player playing in the background, press the end key. To close the player, select Option s > Exit . Playlists Select Menu > Music > Mu sic libra ry and Playlists . To view details of the playlist, select Optio ns > Playli st details . Create a playlist 1 Select Options > New playli st . 2 Enter a name for the playlist, and select OK . 3 To add songs now, select Yes ; or to a dd the songs later, select No . 4 If you select Yes , select artists to find th e songs you want to add to the playlist. Select Add to add items. To show the song list under an artist title, select Expand . To hide the song list, sele ct Collapse . 5 When you have made your selections , select Done . The playlist is saved to the mass memory of your device. To add more songs later, when viewing the playlist, select Options > Add songs . To add songs, albu ms, artists, genr es, and composers to a playlist from the different views of the music menu, select an item and Options > Add to playlist > Saved playlist or New pla ylist . To remove a song from a playlist, select Options > Remove . This does not delete the so ng from the device; it only removes it from the playlist. To reorder songs in a playlist, select the song you want to move, and Options > Reorder playlist . To grab a song and drop it to a new position, select t he song in the desired position and Drop . To finish reordering the playlist, select Done . Podcasts Select Menu > Music > Music library and Podcasts . The podcast menu di splays the podcasts available in the device. Podcast episodes have three states : never played, partially played, and completely p layed. If an episode is partially played, it plays from the last playback position the next time it is played. If an ep isode has never been played or completely played, it plays from the beginning. 105 Music
Transfer music from a computer You can use the following methods to transfer music: ⢠To view your device on a computer as a mass memory device where you can transfer any data files, make t he connection with a compatible USB data cable or Bluetooth connectivity. If you are using a USB data cable, select Mass storage as the connection mode. ⢠To synchronise music with Windows Media Player, connect a compatible USB data cable, and select Media transfer as the connection mode. ⢠To install Noki a Music to mana ge and organise your music files, download the PC software from www.music.nokia.com/down load, and follow the instructions. To change the def ault US B connection mode, select Menu > S ettings and Connectivity > USB > USB connection mode . Nokia Music Store Select Menu > Music > Music store . In the Nokia Music Store (netwo rk service) you can search, browse, and purchase music to download to your device. To purchase music, you firs t need to register for the service. To access the Nokia Music Store, you must have a valid internet access point in the device. Nokia Music Store is not available for all countries or regions. Nokia Music Store settings The availabilit y and appearance of t he Nokia Music St ore settings may vary. Th e settin gs may also be predefined and not editable. You may be asked to select the access point to use when connecting to the Nokia Music Store. Select Default access point . In the Nokia Music Store, yo u may be able to edit the settings by selecting Options > Settings . Nokia Podcasting With the Nokia Podcasting a pplication (network service), you can search, discover, subscribe to, and download podcasts over the air, and play, manag e, and share audio and video podcasts with your device. Podcasti ng settings To open Nokia Podcasting, select Menu > Applications > Podcasting . Before using Nokia Podcasting, define your connection and download setti ngs. The recommended connection method is WLAN . Check with your service provider for terms and data service fees before using different connec tion methods. For example, a flat rate data plan can allow large da ta transfers for one monthly fee. Connecti on settings To edit the connection settings, select Options > Settings > Connection and from the following: 106 Music
Default access point â Select the access point to define your connect ion to the internet. Search service U RL â Define the podcast search s ervice URL to be used in searches. Download settings To edit the download settings, select Options > Settings > Downl oad and from the following: Save to â Define the location where you want to save your podc asts. Update interval â Define how often podcasts are updated. Next update date â Define the date of the next automatic upda te. Next update t ime â Define the time of the next automatic upda te. Automatic updates only occu r if a specific default access point is selected and Nokia Podc asting is running. If N okia Podcasting is not running, the automatic update s are not activated. Download limit (%) â Define the percentage of memory that is reserved for podcast downloads. If limit ex ceeds â Defi ne what to do if the downloads exceed the download limit. Setting the application to retrieve podcasts automa tically may involve the tran smission of large amounts of data through your service providerâÂÂs network. Contact your service provider for information about data transmission charges. To restore the default settings, select Option s > Restore default in the settings view. Search podcasts The search service helps you to find podca sts by keyword or title. The search service uses the p odcast search service web address defined in Podcasting > Options > Settings > Connection > Search servi ce URL . To search for podcasts, select Menu > Applica tions > Podcasting and Search , and enter the desired keywo rds. Tip: The search service looks for podcast tit les and keywords in descriptions, not specific episodes. General topics, such as football or hip-hop, usually give better results than a specific team or artist. To subscribe to a found pod cast, select the title of the podcast. The podcast will be added to your list of subscribed podcasts. To start a new sea rch, select Op tions > New search . To go to the website of a podcast, select Options > Open web page (network service). To view the details of a podcast, select Options > Description . 107 Music
To send a podcast to anot her compatible device, select Options > Send . Directo ries To open directories, select Menu > Appli cations > Podcasti ng and Directories . Directories help you find new podcast episodes to which to subscribe. The contents of the directorie s change. Select the desired directory to upda te it (network service). The colour of the directory changes, when the update is complete. Directories can include podcas ts listed by popularity or themed folders. To open a themed folder, select the fol der. A list of podcasts is displayed. To subscribe to a podcast, select the title and Subscribe . After you have subscribed to episodes of a podcast, you can download, manage, an d play them in the podcasts menu. To add a new web directory or folder, select Options > New > Web directory or Folder . Enter the title and URL of the outline processor markup language (OPML) file, and select Done . To edit the selected folder, web link, or web directory, select Options > Edit . To import an OPML file st ored on your device, select Options > Import OPML file . Select the location of the file, and import it. To send a directory folder as a multimedia mess age or using Bluetooth connectiv ity, select the folder and Options > Send . When you receive a message with an OPML file using Bluetooth co nnectivity, open the file to save the file into the Received folder in Directories. Open the folder to subscribe to any of the links to add to y our podcasts. Downloads After you have subscribed to a podcast, from directories, search, or by entering a we b address, you can manage, download, and play episodes in Podcasts. To see the podcasts you have subscribed to, select Podcasti ng > Podcasts . To see individual episode titl es (an episode is a particular media file of a podcast), select the podcast title. To start a download, select the epis ode title. To download or to continue to download select ed or marked episodes, select Options > Download . You can download multiple episodes at the same time. To play a portion of a podcast during download or after partial downloading, se lect the podcas t and Options > Play previe w . 108 Music
Fully downloaded podcasts ca n be found in the Podcasts folder, but are not shown unti l the library is refreshed. Play and manage podcasts To display the available episodes from the selected podcast , in Podcasts , select Open . Under each episode, you see the file format, the size of the file, and time of the upload. When the podcast is fully do wnloaded, to play the full episode, select it and Play . To update the selected podcas t or marked podcasts, for a new episode, select Option s > Update . To stop the updating, select Options > Stop up date . To add a new podcast by entering th e URL of the podcast, select Options > New podcast . If you do not have an access point defined or if during packet data connection you are asked to enter a user name and password, contact your service provider. To edit the URL of the selected podcast, select Optio ns > Edit . To delete a downloaded podc ast or marked podcasts from your device, select Opt ions > Dele te . To send the selected podcast or marked podcasts to another compatible device as .opml files as a multimedia message or by Bluetooth connectivity, select Options > Send . To update, delete, and send a group of selected podcasts at once, select Options > Mark/Unmark , mark the desired podcasts, and select Options to choose the desired action. To open the website of the podcast (n etwork servic e), select Options > Open web page . Some podcasts provide the op portunity to interact with the creators by commenting and voting. To connect to the internet to do this, select O ptions > View comments . FM radio Listen to the radio Select Menu > Music > Radio . The FM radio depends on an antenna other than the wireless device antenn a. A compatible headse t or accessory needs to be attached t o the device for the FM radio to function properly. When you open the applicat ion for the first time, you can choose to have the local stat ions tuned automatically. To listen to the next or the previous station, select or . To mute the rad io, select . Select Options and from the following: Stations â View saved radio stations. Tune stations â Sear ch for radio stations. 109 Music
Save â Save the radio station. Activate loudspeaker or Deactivate loudsp eaker â Turn the loudspeaker on or off. Alternative f requencies â Select whet her you want t he radio to automatically search for a better RDS frequency for the station if the frequency level becomes low. Play in background â Retu rn to the home screen with the radio playing in th e background. Manage radio stations Select Menu > Music > Radio . To listen to saved stations, select Options > Stations , and select a station from the list. To remove or rename a station, select Opti ons > Stations > Options > Delete or Rename . To set the desired frequency manually, select Options > Tune stations > Opt ions > Manual t uning . 110 Music
Videos You can downloa d and stream video clips over the air from compatible internet video services (network service) us ing a packet data or WLAN connection. You can also transfer video clips from a compatible PC to your dev ice to view them. Downloading videos may involv e the transmission of large amounts of data through your service provider's network. Contact your service provider for information about dat a transmission charges. Your device may have predefined services. Service providers may provide free content or charge a fee. Check the pricing in the service or from the service provider. Download and view video clips Select Menu > Videos & TV . Connect to video services To connect to a service to install video services, select Video feeds > Video directory and the desired video service. To add a video feed manually, in the Video feeds view, select Options > Add feed > Add manually . View a video clip To browse the content of installed video services, select Video feeds . The content of some video services is divided into categories. To browse video clips, select a category. To search for a video clip in the service, select Video search . Search may not be available in all services. Some video clips can be streamed over the air, but others must be first downloaded to your device. To download a video clip, select the Downlo ad icon. Downloads continue in the background if you exit the application. The downloaded video clips are saved in My videos. To stream a video clip or view a downloaded one, select the Play icon. To view the control keys duri ng playback, tap the screen. To adjust the volume, use the volu me key. Schedule downloads To schedule an au tomatic do wnload for video clips in a service, select Options > Schedule downloads . New video clips are automatically downloaded daily at the time you define. To cancel scheduled downloads, select Manual download as the download method. 111 Videos
Video feeds Select Menu > Videos & TV . The content of the installed vi deo services is distributed using RSS feeds. To view and manage your feeds, select Video feeds . Select Optio ns and from the following: Feed subscripti ons â Check your current feed subscriptions. Feed details â Vi ew information about a video feed. Add feed â Subscribe to new feeds. Select Via Video directory to select a feed from the services in the video direct ory. Refresh feeds â Refresh the content of all feeds. Manage account â Manage your account options for a particular feed, if available. Move â Move video clips to a desired location. To view the video clips availa ble in a feed, select a feed from the l ist. My videos My videos is a storage place for all videos. You can list downloaded videos and video clips recorded with the device camera in separate views. To open a folder and view video clips, select the folder. When a video clip is playing, to use the control keys for controlling the play er, tap the screen. To adjust the volume, press the volume key. Select Options and from the following: Resume download â Resume a p aused or failed download. Cancel download â Can cel a download. Video details â View information about a video clip. Memory status â View the amount of available and used memory. Sort by â Sort video clips. Select the desired category. Move and copy â Mo ve or copy video clips. Select Copy or Move and the desired location. Transfer videos from your PC Transfer your own video clips from compatible devices using a compatible USB data ca ble. Only video clips which are in a format supported by your device are sh own. 1 T o vi e w yo u r de v ic e on a P C a s a m a ss m em o r y d e vi c e where you can transfer an y data files, connect using a USB data cable. 2 Select Mass storage as the connection mode. 3 Select the video clips you want to copy from your PC. 4 Transfer the video clips to E:\My Videos in the mass memory of your device, or to F:\My Videos in a compatible memory card, if availa ble. The transferred video clips ap pear in the My videos folder. Video settings Select Menu > Videos & TV . Select Options > Settings and from the following: 112 Videos
Video service selection â Select the video services that you want to appear in the main v iew. You can also add , remove, edit, and view the details of a video service. You cannot edit preinstalled video services. Network connection â Define the network destination used for the network connect ion. To select the connection manually each time a ne tw ork connection is opened, select Always ask . Parental control â Set an age limit to videos. The required password is the sa me as the device lock code. The factory setting for the lock code is 12345. In video-on- demand services, videos whic h have the same or a higher age limit than you have set , are hidden. Preferred memory â Select where to save downloaded videos. If the s elected memory beco mes full, the devi ce saves the videos in another memory. Thumbnails â Select whether to download and view thumbnail images of video feeds. 113 Videos
Personalise your device You can personalise your devi ce by changing the standby mode, main menu, tone s, themes, o r font size. Most of the personalisation option s, such as changi ng the font size, can be accessed through the device settings . Change t he look of your device Select Menu > Settings and Themes . You can use themes to change the look of the display, such as the background image. To change the theme that is used for all the applications in your device, select General . To preview a theme before activating it, go to the theme, and wait for a few seconds. To activate the theme, select Op tions > Set . indicates the active theme. To have an image or a slide show of changi ng images as the background in the home screen, select Wall paper > Image or Slide show . To change th e image displaye d in the home screen when a call is received, select Call image . Profiles You can use profiles to set and customise the ringi ng tones, message alert tones, and other tones for different events, environments, or calle r groups. The name of the selected profile is displayed at the top of the home screen. If the General profile is in us e, only the date is displayed. Select Menu > Settings and Profile s . Go to a profile, and select from the following: Activate â Activa te the profile. Personalis e â Personalise the profile. Timed â Set the profile t o be active until a certain time within the next 24 hours. When the time expires, the profile changes back to the previously active non-timed profile. In the home screen, indicates a timed profile. The Offline profile cannot be timed. To create a new profile, select Options > Create new . 3-D tones With 3-D tones, you can enab le three-dimensional sound effects for ringing tones. No t all ringing tones support 3- D effects. Select Menu > Settings and Profiles . Go to a profile, and select Options > Personalise . To enable a 3-D effect that is applied to t he ringing tone, select 3-D ringing tone effect and the desired effect. T o c h a n g e t h e 3 - D e c h o e f f e c t t h a t i s a p p l i e d t o t h e r i n g i n g tone, select 3-D ringing tone echo and the desired effect. To listen to a 3-D effect before selecting it, go to the effect, and wait for a second. 114 Personalise your device
Modify the home sc reen T o m o d i f y i te m s , s u c h a s e - m a i l n o t i fi c a t i o n s , i n t h e h o m e screen, select Options > Edit content . To select an image or image slide show as the background image in the home screen, select Menu > Settings and Themes > Wallpape r . To change the clock shown in the home screen, tap the clock in the home screen, and select Options > Settings > Clock ty pe . Modify the main menu In the menu you can access th e functions in your device. To open the main menu , press the menu key . To change the menu view, select Options > List view or Grid view . To reorganise the main menu, select Options > Organise . For example, to move a menu icon to another folder, select the icon, Options > Move to folder , and the new folder. You can also drag and drop an icon to a new location in the main menu. 115 Personalise your device
Applications Calendar To open the calendar, select Menu > Calendar . Calendar views To switch between month, week, and to-do note view, select Options > Change view > Day , Week , or To-do . To change the starting day of the week, the view that is shown when you open the calendar, or the calendar alarm settings, select Options > Settings . To go to a certain date, se lect Options > Go to date . Calendar toolbar From the toolbar, select from the following: Next view â Select the month view. Next view â Select the week view. Next view â Select the day view. Next view â Select the to-do view. New meeting â Add a new meeting reminder. New to-do not e â Add a new to-do note. Create a calendar entry Select Menu > Calendar . 1 Go to the desired date, and select Options > New entry and from the following: Meeting â Set a reminder for your meeting. Meeting request â Create and send a new meeting request. A mailbox needs to have been set up. Memo â Write a general note for the day. Anniversary â Add a reminder of birthdays or special dates (entries are repeated annually). To-do note â Set a reminder for a task that m ust be done by a specific date. 2 Fill in all the fields. Select a field to enter the text. To close the text input dialog, select . To add a description to an entry, select Opti ons > Add descriptio n . 3 Select Done . The available options may vary. Mute or stop a calendar alarm Select Silence or Stop . Set an alarm to snooze Select Snooze . To define the period after which the calendar alarm sounds again when set to snooze, select Options > Settings > Alarm snooz e time . Manage calendar entries To delete several events at a time, open the month view, and select Opt ions > Delete entr y > Be fore selected date or All entries . 116 Applications
To mark a task as completed in the t o-do view, select the task and Options > Mark as done . To send a calendar not e to a compatible dev ice, select Options > Send . If the other device is not compatible with Coordinated Universal Ti me (UTC), the ti me information of received calendar entries may not be d isplayed corr ectly. Clock Set time a nd date Select Menu > Applications > Clock . Select Options > Settings and from the following: Time â Set the time. Date â Set the date. Automatic ti me update â Set the network to automatically updat e the time, date, and time zone information for your device (network service). Alarm clock Select Menu > Applications > Clock . To set a new ala rm, select New alar m . Set th e alarm time. Select Repeat to set whether and when the a larm is repeated, and select Done . To view your active and inactive ala rms, select Alarms . When the alarm is activ e, is displayed. When the alarm is repeated, is displayed. To remove an alarm, select Alarms , scroll to the alarm, and select Options > Delete alarm . To turn off the alarm when the ala rm expires, select Stop . To snooze the alarm, select Snooze . If your device is switched off when an alarm expires, your device switches itself o n and starts sound ing the alarm tone. To define the snooze time, select Optio ns > Settings > Alarm snooze t ime . To change the alarm tone, select Opti ons > Settings > Clock alarm tone . World clock Select Menu > Applications > Clock . To view the current time in different locations, select World clock . To add locations to the list, select Options > Add location . To set your curren t location, scroll to a location, and select Options > Set as current location . The time i n your device is changed according to the selected location. Ensure that the time is correct and matches your time zone. RealPlayer With RealPlayer, you can play video cl ips or stream me dia files over the air without saving t hem to the device first. 117 Applications
RealPlayer does not necessarily support all file formats or all the variations of file formats. Play video cl ips Select Menu > Applica tions > RealPlayer . To play a video clip, select Video clips , and a clip. To list recently played files, in the application main view, select Recently played . In the list of video clips, scroll to a clip, select Options and from the following: Use video clip â As sign a video to a contact or set it as a ringing tone. Mark/Unmark â Mark items in the list to send or delete multiple items at the same time. View details â View details of the selected item, such as format, resolution, and duration. Settings â Edit settings for vid eo playback and streaming. In the Video clips, Recently played and Streaming links views, the following toolbar icons may be available: Send â Send a video clip or streaming link. Play â Play the video clip or video stream. Delete â Delete the video clip or streaming link. Remove â Remove a file from the recently played list. Stream content ov er the air In RealPlayer, you can only open an RTS P link. However, RealPlayer pl ays a RAM file if you open an HTTP link to it in a browser. Select Menu > Applica tions > RealPlayer . To stream content over the air (network service), select Streaming links and a link. You can als o receive a streaming link in a text me ssage or multim edia message, or open a link on a web page. Before live content begins streaming, your device connects to the site and starts loading the content. The content is not saved in your device. RealPlayer settings Select Menu > Applica tions > RealPlayer . You may receive RealPlayer se ttings in a sp ecial message from your service provider. For more information, contact your service provider. To select the settings for the video, select Options > Settings > Video . To select whether to use a proxy server, to change the default access poin t, and to set the port range used when connecting , select Optio ns > Sett ings > Streaming . For the correct settings, contact your s ervice provider. 1 To edit the advanced settings, select Options > Settings > Streaming > Network > Options > Advanced sett ings . 118 Applications
2 To select the bandwidth used for a network type, select the networ k type and the desired value. To edit the bandwidth yourself, select User defined . Recorder Select Menu > Applications > Recorder . With the Recorder application, you can record voice memos and telephone conversations. The recorder cannot be used when a data call or GPRS connection is active. To record a sound clip, select . To stop recording a sound clip, select . To listen to the sound clip, select . To select the recording qualit y or where you want to save your sound clips, se lect Optio ns > Settings . To record a telephone conver sation, open recorder during a voice call, and select . Both parties hear a tone at regular intervals during recording. Notes Write notes To write a note, select Options > New note . Tap the note field to enter text, and select . You can save plain text files (.txt file format) you receive to Notes. Manage notes Select Menu > Applications > Notes . Select Options and from the following: Open â Open the note. Send â Send the note to other compatible devices. Delete â Delete a note. You can also delete several notes at once. To mark each note you want to delete, select Options > Mark/Unmark , and delete the notes. Synchronisation â Synchronise the notes with compatible applicat ions on a co mpatible device, or define the synchronis ation settings. Office File manager About File m anager Select Menu > Applications > Office > File mgr. . With File manager, you ca n browse, manage, and open files on your device, mass memory, memory card, or a compatible external drive. The available options depend on the memory you select. Find and organise files Select Menu > Applications > Office > File mgr. . To find a file, select Option s > Find . Enter a search text that matches the file name. 119 Applications
To move and copy files and folders, or to create new folders in the memory, select Options > Organise and the desired option. To sort files, select Options > Sort by and the desired category . Edit the memory card You can format a memory card to erase th e data on it, or you can protect the data on the memory card with a password. Select Menu > Applica tions > Office > File mgr. . Rename or format a memory card Select Optio ns > Memory card options and the desir ed option. Password protect a memory card Select Optio ns > Memory card password . These options are available on ly if a compatible memory card is inserted in the device. Back u p files on a me mory c ard Select Menu > Applica tions > Office > File mgr. . To back up files, select the file types you want to back up on a memory card and Options > Back up now . Ens ure that your memory card has enough free memory for the files that you have chosen to back up. Format m ass memo ry Select Menu > Applica tions > Office > File mgr. . When the mass memory is re formatted, all data in the memory is permanently lost. Back up data you want to keep before formatting th e mass memory. You can u se Nokia Ovi Suite to back up data to a compatible compu ter. Digital rights ma nagement (DRM) technologies may prevent some backup data from being restored. For more information about DRM used for your content, contact your service provider. To format the mass memory, select Opti ons > Form at mass memory . Do not format the mass memory using PC software because it may cause degraded performance. Formatting does not guara ntee that all confidential data stored in the device ma ss memory is permanently destroyed. Standard format ting only marks the formatted area as available spa ce and deletes the address to fi nd the files again. The recovery of formatted or even overwritten data may still be possible wi th special recovery tools and software. Dictionary Select Menu > Applica tions > Office > Dictionary . To translate wo rds from one language t o another, en ter text in the search field. As you en ter text, suggestions of words to translate are displayed. To transla te a word, select the word from the list. All languages may not be supported. 120 Applications
Select Options and from the following: Listen â Listen to the selected word. History â Find previously translated words from the current session. Languages â Change the source or target language, download languages from th e internet, or remove a language from the dictiona ry. You cannot remove the English language from t he di ctionary. You can have two additional langua ges inst alled, besides English. Speech â Edit the voice feature settings. You can adjust the speed and volume of the voice. Quickoffice About Quicko ffice Select Menu > Applications > Office > Quickoffice . Quickoffice consists of Quic kword for viewing Microsoft Word documents, Quicksheet for viewing Microsoft Excel worksheets, Quickpoint for Microsoft PowerPoint presentation s, and Quic kmanager for purchasing software. You can view Microsoft Office 2000, XP, 200 3, and 2007 documents (DOC, XLS, a nd PPT file formats) with Quickoffice. If you have the editor version of Quickoffice, you can also edit files. Not all file formats or features are supported. Converter With Converter, you can convert measures from one unit to anoth er. The converter has lim ited ac curacy, and rounding errors may occur. Currency converter Select Menu > Applications > Office > Converter . Select Type > Currency . Before you can make currency conversions, you must select a base currency and add exchange rates. The default base currency is Home. The rate of the base currency is always 1. 1 Select Options > Curre ncy rates . 2 The default name for the cu rrency items is Foreign. To rename a currency, select Options > Rename currency . 3 Add the exchange rates for the currencies, and select Done . 4 In the other Unit field, sele ct the currency to which you want to convert. 5 In the first A mount field, enter the valu e you want to convert. The other Amount field shows the converted value automatically. To change the base currency, select Options > Currency rates , a currency and Options > Set as base currency . When you change base curre ncy, you must ent er new exchange rates because a ll previously set exchange rates are cleared. Convert measures Select Menu > Applications > Office > Converter . 1 In the Type field, select the measure you want to use. 2 In the first Un it field, select the unit from which you want to convert. 121 Applications
3 In the other Unit field, select the unit to which you want to convert. 4 In the first Amount field, enter the value you want to convert. The other Amount field sh ows the converted value automatic ally. Calculator Make calculations Select Menu > Applica tions > Office > Calculator . This calculator has limited a ccuracy and is designed for simple calculations. To make a calculati on, enter the first number of the calculation. T o remove a numb er, select the backspace key. Select a function such as add or su btract. Enter the second number of the calculation, an d select = . Save calculations To save the results of a calculation, select Options > Memory > Save . The saved result replaces the previously stored result in the memory. To retrieve the results of a calculation from the memory and use them in a calculation, select Options > Memory > Recall . To view the last saved resu lt, select Options > Last result . Exiting the Calculator ap plication or switching off the device does not clear the memory. You can recall the last saved result the next time you open the Calculator application. Zip manager Select Menu > Applica tions > Office > Zip . With Zip manager, you can crea te new archive files to store compressed ZIP formatted files; add single or multiple compressed files or directories to an archive; set, clear, or change the archive pa ssword for protected archives; and change settin gs, such as compress ion level. You can save the archive files in t he device memory or on a memory card. Active notes Active notes allows you to crea te notes that contain images and sound or video clips. You can also link a note to a contact. The note is displayed during a call with the conta ct. Create and ed it notes Select Menu > Applica tions > Office > Active notes . To create a note, start writing. To edit a note, select the note and Opti ons > Editing options . To add boldface, italics, or underlining to your text or change the font colour, press and hold th e Shift key, and scroll to select the text. Then select Options > Text . 122 Applications
Select Options and from the following: Insert object â Insert images, sound or video clips, business cards, web bookmarks, an d files. Send â Send the note. Link note to call â Select Add contacts to link a note to a contact. The n ote is displayed when making a call to or receiving a call from the contact. Settings fo r Active notes Select Menu > Applications > Office > Active note s and Options > Settin gs . To select where to sav e notes, select Memory in use and the desired memory. To change the layout of active notes, or to view the notes as a list, select Change view > Grid or List . To see a note in the backgrou nd when making or receiving phone calls, select Show note during call > Yes . Adobe Re ader Select Menu > Applications > Office > Adobe PDF . With Adobe Reader, you can rea d PDF documents with your device; search for text in the documents; modify settings, such as zoom level and page views; an d send PDF files using e-mail. 123 Applications
Settings Some settings may be preset for the device by your service provider, and you may not be able to change them. Phone setti ngs Date and time s ettings Select Menu > Settings and Phone > Date and time . Select from the following: Time â Enter the current time. Time zone â Select your location. Date â Enter the date. Date forma t â Select the date forma t. Date sep arator â Select the symbol that separa tes days, months, and years. Time format â Select the time format. Time separator â Select the symbol that separates hours and minutes. Clock type â Select the clock type. Clock alarm tone â Select the tone for the alarm clock. Alarm snoo ze time â A djust the snooze time. Workdays â Select your working days. You can then set an alarm only for working day mo rnings, for example. Automati c time update â To updat e the time, date, a nd time zone, select On . This network service may not be available on all networks. Speech Select Menu > Settings > Phone > Spee ch . With Speech, you can set the language, voice, and voice properties for the message reader. To set the language for the message r eader, select Language . To download additional languages to your device, select Options > Download languages . Tip: When you download a new language, you mus t download at least one voice for that language . To set the speaking voice, select Voice . The voice depends on the selected language. To set the s peaking rate, select Speed . To set the speakin g volume, select Volume . To view details of a voice, open the voice tab, and select the voice and Options > Voice details . To listen to a voice, select the voice and Options > Play voice . To delete languages or v oices, select the item and Options > Delete . Message reader settings To change t he messag e reader settings, open the Settings tab, and define the following: Language detection â Act ivate auto matic reading language detection. Continuous reading â Activate continuous readin g of all selected messages. 124 Settings
Speech prompts â Set the message reader to insert prompts i n messages . Audio source â Listen to messages through the ear piece or loudspeaker. Language settings Select Menu > S ettings and Phone > Language . To change the device language, select Phone l anguag e . To change the writing la nguage, select Writing language . To turn predictive text input on or off, select Predictive text . Display settings Select Menu > S ettings and Phone > Display . Select from the following: Light sensor â Adjust the light sensor sensitivity of your device. The light sensor turn s the lights on when the lighting of your location is dim and off when it is bright. Font size â S e l e c t t h e s i z e o f t e xt and i cons on the display. Welcome note / logo â Select whether you want to display a note or image when you switch on the device. Light time-out â Set how long the light stays on when you stop us ing the device. Voice commands To activate enhanced voice comm ands, to start applications a nd profiles, press and hold the call key in the home screen. To control your devi ce with enhanced voice commands, press and hold the call key in the home screen, and say a voice command. The voice command is the name of the application or profile displayed in the list. Select Menu > Settings and Phone > Voice commands . Select Options and from the following: Change command â Edit the voice commands. Playback â Listen to the synthesised voice tag. Remove voice comman d â Remove a voice command that you added manually. Settings â Adjust the settings. Voice command tutorial â Open the tutorial for voice commands. Sensor settings and display rotatio n When you activate the s ensors in your device, you can control certain functions by turning the device. Select Menu > Settings and Phone > Sensor settings . Select from the following: Sensors â Activate the sensors. Turning control â Selec t Silencing calls and Snoozi ng alarms to mute calls and snooze alarms by turning your 125 Settings
device so that the disp lay faces down. Select Auto-rotate display to rotate the display content aut omatically when you turn the device on its left side or back to a vertical position. Some applications an d fea tures may not suppor t rotating the display content. Slide settings Select Menu > Settings and Phone > Phone mgmt . > Slide settings . To set the device to lock the keypad when you clos e the slide, select Lock keys with slide close . Accessory settings Select Menu > Settings and Phone > Accessories . Some accessory connectors indicate which type of accessory is connected to the device. Select an accessory and from the following: Default profil e â Set the profile that you want activated each time you connect a certain comp atible accessory to your device. Automati c answer â Select whet her you wa nt the device to answer an incomi ng call automatically after 5 seconds. If the ringing type is set to Beep once or Silent , automatic ans wer is disabled. Lights â Set whether lights rema in on after the time-out. The available settings depend on th e type of accessory. TV-out settings To change the settings for a TV-out connection, sele ct TV- Out and from the following: Default profil e â Set the profile that you want activated each time you connect a Noki a Video Connectivity Cable to your device. TV aspect ratio â Select th e aspe ct ratio of the TV: Normal or Widescreen for widescreen TVs. TV system â Select t he analogue video signal sys tem that is compatible with your TV. Flicker filter â To improve image quality on the screen of your TV , sele ct On . The flicker filter may not diminish image flicker on all TV screens. Applicat ion settings Select Menu > Settings and Phone > Applicat ion sett. . In application settings, you can edit the settings of some of the applications in your device. To edit the settings, you can al so select Options > Settings in each application. Device updates Select Menu > Settings and Phone > Phone mgmt . > Device updates . With Device updates, you ca n connect to a server and receive configuration set tings for your device, create new server profiles, view existing software version and device information, or view and manage existing server profiles. If software updates over the air are supported by your network, you may also be able to request u pdates through the device. You may receive server profiles and d ifferent configuration settings from your service providers and 126 Settings
company information manage ment department. These configuration settings may include connection and other settings used by different applications in your device. To connect to the server and receive configuration sett ings for your device, select Optio ns > Server profil es , a profile, and Options > Start configuration . To create a server profile, select Options > Server profiles > Options > New server p rofile . To delete a server profile, select the profile and Options > Delete . To check for software updates, select Opt ions > Check for updates . Warning: If you install a software upda te, you cannot use the device, even to make emergency calls , until the installation is completed and the device is restarted. Be sure to back up data before accepting ins tallation of an update. Downloading software up dates may involve the transmission of large amounts of data (network service). Make sure that the device ba ttery has enough power, or connect the charger before st arting the update. Security settin gs Phone and SIM Select Menu > S ettings and Phone > Phone mgmt. > Security settin gs > Phone and SIM card . Select from the following: PIN code request â When active, the code is requested each time the device is swit ched on. Deactivating the PIN code request may not be allowed by some SIM cards. PIN code , PIN2 co de , and Lock code â You can chan ge the PIN code, PIN2 code, and lock code. These codes can only include numbers from 0 to 9. Avoid using access codes similar to the emergency numbers to prevent accidental dialling of the emergency numb er. If you forget the PIN or PIN2 code, contact your se rvice provider. If you forget th e lock code, contact a Nokia Care point or your service provider. Phone autol ock period â To avoid unauthorised use, you can set a time-out after w hich the device automatically locks. A locked device cannot be used until the correct lock code is ente red. To turn off the autolock period, select None . Lock if SIM card changed â You can set the device to ask for the lock code when an unknown SIM card is inserted into your device. The device mai ntains a list of SIM cards that are recognised as the ownerâÂÂs cards. Remote phone lo cking â Enable or disable remote lock. Closed user group â You can specify a group of people to whom you c an call and who can call you (network service). Confirm SIM servi ces â You can set the device to display confirmation messages when you are using a SIM card service (network service). Certifica te managemen t Select Menu > Settings and Phone > Phone mgmt. > Security settings > Certificate mana gement . 127 Settings
Digital certificates should be used if you want to connect to an online bank or anothe r site or remote server for actions that involve transferring confident ial information. Th ey sh oul d a ls o b e u se d if yo u w an t t o r ed uc e th e ri s k of viruses or other malicious so ftware and be sure of the authenticity of software when downloading and installin g software. Select from the following: Authority certificates â View and edit authority certificates. Trusted site certificates â View and edit trusted site certificates. Personal certificat es â View and edit personal certificates. Phone certi ficates â View and edit device certificates. Digital certificates do not gu arantee safety; they are used to verify the origin of software. Importa nt: Even if the use of certificates makes the risks involved in remote connection s and software inst allation considerably smaller, they must be used correctly in order to benefit from increased security. The existen ce of a certificate does not offer an y protection by itself; t he certificate manager must contai n correct, authentic, or trusted certificates for increased se curity to be available. Certificates have a restricted lifetime. If "Expired certificate" or "Certificate not valid yet" is shown, even if the certificate should be valid, check th at the current date and time in your device are correct. View certificate details â check authenticity You can only be sure of the correct identity of a server when the signature and the va lidity period of a server certificate have been checked. You are notified if the identity of the server is not authen tic or if you do not have the corr ect security certificate in your devic e. To check the details of a certificate, select Options > Certificate details . The validity of the certificate is checked, and one of the follo wing notes may be displayed: Certificate not tr usted â You have not set any application to use the certificate. Expired certificate â The certificate validity period has ended. Certificate not v alid yet â The certificate validi ty period has not yet begun. Certificate corrupted â The certificate cannot be used. Contact the certificate issuer. Change the trus t settings Before changing any certific ate settings , you mus t make sure that you really trust the owner of t he certificate and that the certificate really belongs to th e listed owner. To change the settings for an authority certificate, select Options > T rust settings . Depending on the certificate, a list of the application s that can use the selected certificate is shown. For example: 128 Settings
Symbian in stallation : Yes â The certificate is able to certify the origin of a new Symbian operating system application. Internet : Yes â The certificate is able to certify servers. App. installation : Yes â The certificate is able to certify the origin of a ne w Java application. To change the value, s elect Opti ons > Change trust setting . Security module Select Menu > S ettings and Phone > Phone mgmt. > Security settin gs > Security module . To view or edit a security module (if available), select it from the list. To view detailed information about a security module, select Options > Security details . Restore origina l settings Select Menu > S ettings and Phone > Phone mgmt. > Factory settings . You can reset some of the settings to their original values. To do this, you need the lock code. After resetting, th e device may take a longer time to p ower on. Documents and fi les are unaffected. Protected content To manage digital rights licences, select Menu > Settings and Phone > Phone mgmt. > Securit y settings > Protected co ntent . Digital rights management Content owners may use different types of digital rights management (DRM) technologies to protect their intellectual property, includ ing copyrights. This device uses various types of DRM software to access DRM- protected content. Wi th this device you can access content protected with WMDRM 10, OMA DRM 1.0, and OMA DRM 2.0. If certain DRM software fails to protect the content, content owners may ask tha t such DRM softwa re's ability to access new DRM-protected content be revoked. Revocation may also prev ent renewal of such DRM- protected content alread y in your device. Revocation of such DRM software does not affect the use of content protected with other types of DRM or the use of non-DRM- protected content. Digital rights manag ement (DRM) protected content comes with an associated licence that defines your rights to use the content. If your device has OMA DRM-p r otected content, to back up both the activation keys and the content , use the backup feature of Nokia Ovi Suite. If your device has WMDRM-pr otected content, bo th the licence and the content will be lost if the device memory is formatted. You may also lo se the licence and the content if the files on your device get corrupted. Losing the licence or the content may limit your a bility to use the same 129 Settings
content on your device again. For more information, contact your service provider. Some licence may be connected to a specific SIM card, and the protected content can be accessed only if the SIM card is inserted in the device. Notifica tion light s Select Menu > Settings and Phone > Notifi cation lights . To turn the standby breathing ligh t on or off, select Standby br. light . When the standby breathing li ght is turned on, the menu key lights up periodically. To turn the notification light on or off, select Notification light . When the notification light is turned on , the menu key lights up for a period you define to notify of missed events, such as missed calls or unread messages. Application manager About Application manager Select Menu > Settings and Application mgr. . With Application manager, you can see the software packages installed in your device. You can view details of installed applications, remove applications, and define installation settings. You can install the following types of applications and software to your device: ⢠JME applications based on Java⢠te chnology with the .jad or .jar file extensions ⢠Other applications and soft ware suitable for the Symbian operating system with the .sis or .sisx file extensions ⢠Widgets with the .wgz file extension Only install software that is compatible with your device. Install applications You can transfer installation files to your device from a compatib le compute r, downlo ad them during browsing, or receive them in a multim edia message, as an e-mail attachment, or using othe r co nnectivity methods, such as Bluetooth connectivi ty. You can use Nokia Application Installer in Nokia Ovi Suite to install an application to your device. Icons in Application manage r indicate the following: SIS or SISX application Java applicati on widgets application installed in the memory card application installed in the mass memory Important: Only install and use applications and other software from trusted s ources, such as app lications that are Symbian Signed or ha ve passed the Java Verified⢠testing. Before installation, note the following: 130 Settings
⢠To view the application ty pe, version number, and the supplier or manufacturer of the application, select Options > View details . To view the security certificate details of the application, select Details: > Certificates: > View details . Control the use of digital certificates in Certificate management. ⢠If you install a file that contains an update or repair to an existing application, you can only restore the original application if you have the original installation file or a full backup copy of the removed software package. To restore the original application, remove the application, and install th e application again from the original ins tallation file or the backup copy. The JAR file is required for installing Java applications. If it is missing, the device may ask you to download it. If there is no access point defined for the application, you are asked to select one. To install an applicat ion, do the following: 1 To locate an insta llation file, select Menu > Settings and Applicatio n mgr. . Alternatively, search installation file s using File mana ger, or select Messaging > Inbo x , and open a mes sage that contains an installation file. 2 In Applicat ion manager, select Options > Install . In other applications, select the installation file to start the installation. During installat ion, the device shows information about the progress of the insta llation. If you inst all an application witho ut a digital sign ature or certification, the device di splays a warning. Continue installation only if you ar e sure of the origin and contents of the applicati on. To start an insta lled applicat ion, locate the application in the menu, and select the application. If the application does not have a default folder de fined, it is installed in the Installed apps. folder in the main menu. To see which software packa g es are installed or removed and when, select Options > Vie w log . Important: Your device can only support one antivirus application . Having more than one applicati on with antivirus function ality could af fect performanc e and operation or cause the devi ce to stop functioning. After you install app lications to a comp atible memory card, installation files (.sis, .sisx) remain in the device memory. The files may use large amounts of memory and prevent you from storing other files. To maintain sufficient memory, use Nokia Ovi Suite to back up installation files to a compatible PC, t hen us e the file manager to remo ve the installation files from the device memory. If the .sis file is a message attachment , delete the message from the Messaging inbox. Remove applications Select Menu > Settings and Application mg r. . To remove a software package, select Installed apps. > Options > Uninstall . Select Yes to confirm. If you remove softwa re, you can only reinstall it if you have the original software package or a full backup of the 131 Settings
removed software package. If you remove a software package, you may no longer be able to op en documents created with that software. If another software packag e depends on the software package that you removed, the other software package may stop working. Refer to the documentation of the installed software package for details. Application manager settings Select Menu > Settings and Application mgr. . Select Installation settings and from the following: Software installation â Select whether Symbian software that has no verified digital signature can be installed. Online certificate check â Select to check the online certificates before inst alling an ap plication. Default web address â Set the default web address used when checking online certificates. Calling sett ings Call settings With call settings, you can defi ne call specific settings in your device. Select Menu > Settings and Calling > Call . Select from the following: Send my caller ID â Select Ye s to show your phone number to the person you are calling. To use the setting agreed upon with your service provider, select Set by network ) (network service). Send my internet call ID â Select Yes to sho w your internet call ID to the person you are calling. Call waiting â Set your device to notify you of incoming calls while you are in a call (network service), or check whether the feature is activated. Internet call waiting â Set you r devic e to no tify yo u of a new incoming internet ca ll while you are in a call. Internet call alert â To set your device to alert for incoming internet calls, select On . If you select Off , you receive only a notification if you missed a call. Reject call with message â Send a text message when you reject a call, informing the caller why you could not answer the call. Message text â Write the standard text message that is sent when you reject a call. Own video in recvd. call â A l l o w o r d e ny v i d e o s e n d i ng during a video call from your device. Image in v ideo call â If video is not sent during a video call, select the image to be displayed instead. Automatic redial â Se t your device to make a ma ximum of 10 attempts to connect the ca ll after an unsuccessful call attempt. To stop automatic re dialling, press the end key. Show call duration â Display the leng th of a call during a call. Summary after call â Display the length of a call after a call ends. Speed dialling â Activate speed dialling. Anykey answer â Activate a nykey answer. Line in us e â This setting (network service) is shown only if the SIM card supports two subscriber numbers, that is, two phone lines. Select which phone line you want to use 132 Settings
t o m a k e c a l l s o r s e n d t e x t m e ssages. Calls on both lines can be answered irrespective of the selected line. If you select Line 2 , and have not subscribed to t his network service, you are not able to make calls . When line 2 is selected, is displayed in the home screen. Line change â Prevent phone li ne selection (network service), if supported by yo ur SIM card. To change this setting, you need the PIN2 code. The available options may vary. Call divert Select Menu > S ettings and Callin g > Call divert . Call divert allows you to divert incoming calls to your voice mailbox or another phone number. For details, contact your service provider. 1 Select the type of calls to divert and a diverting option. For example, to divert all voice calls, select Voice calls > All voice calls . 2 To activate call divert, select Activate . 3 To divert calls to your voice mailbox, select To voice mailbox . 4 To divert calls to anot her phone number, select To other number , and enter the number, or select Find to retrieve a number saved in the cont acts list. Several diverting opti ons can be active at the sa me time. When all calls are diverted, is displayed in the home screen. Call barring Select Menu > Settings and Calling > Call barring . Call barring (network service) allows you to restrict the calls that you make or receive with the device. For example, you can res trict all outgoing internation al calls or incoming calls when you are abroad. To change th e settings, you need the barring password from your service provider. Voice call barring Select the desired barring option and Activate , Deactivate , or Check stat us . Call barring affects all calls, including data calls. Internet call barring To select whether anonymous calls are allowed from the internet, select Anon ymous call barring . 133 Settings
Troubleshooting To view frequently asked ques tions about your device, see the product support pages a t www.nokia.com/support . Q: What is my password for the lock, PIN, or PUK codes? A: The default lock code is 12345. If you forget the lock code, contact your device dealer. If you forget a PIN or PUK code, or if you have not received such a code, contact your network service provider. For information about passwords, contact your access point provider, for ex ample, a commercial internet service provider (ISP) or network service provider. Q: How do I close an ap plication that is not responding? A: Select Options > Show open apps. , and go to the application using the menu key. Press and hold the menu key to open the application, and select Options > Exit . Q: Why do images l ook smudgy? A: Ensure that the camera lens protection windows are clean. Q: Why do missing, di scoloured, or bri ght dots app ear on the screen ev ery time I swit ch on my device? A: This is a characteristic of this type of display. S ome displays may contain pixels or dots that remain on or off. This is normal, not a fault. Q: Why can't my Nokia device establish a GPS connection? A: Establishing a GP S connect ion may take from a couple of seconds t o several minut es. Establishing a GPS connection in a vehicle may ta ke longer. If you are indoors, go outdoors to receive a better signal. If you are outdoors, move to a more open space. Ensure that your hand does not cover the GPS antenna of your device. If th e weather conditions are bad, the si gnal strength may be affected. Some vehicles have tinted (a thermic) windows, which may block the satellite signals. Q: Why canâÂÂt I find my frien dâÂÂs device while using Bluetooth connectivity? A: Check that both devices are compatible, have a ctivated Bluetooth connectivity, a nd are not in hidden mode. Check also that the distance between the tw o devices is not over 10 metres (33 feet) and that there are no walls or other obstructions between the devices. 134 Troubleshooting
Q: Why canâÂÂt I end a Bluetooth connection? A: If another device is connected to your device, you can close the connection from the other device or deactivat e Bluetooth connectivity in your device. Select Menu > Settings and Connectivity > Bluet ooth > Bluetooth > Off . Q: Why can't I see a wireless LAN (WLAN) access point even though I know I'm within it s range? A: The WLAN access point may use a hidden service set identifier (SSID). You ca n only access networks that use a hidden SSID if you kno w the co rrect SSID, and have created a WLAN internet access poin t for the n etwork on your Nokia device. Q: How do I turn the wire less LAN (WLA N) off on my Nokia device? A: The WLAN on your N okia device is deactivated wh en you are not connected or trying to conn ect to another access point, or not scanni ng for available networks . To further reduce battery consumption, you can specify that your Nokia device does not scan, or scans less often, for available networks in th e background. The WLAN is deactivated in between background scans. To change the backgroun d scan settings, do th e following: 1 Select Menu > Settings and Connectivity > Wireless LAN . 2 To increase the background scan time int erval, adjust the time in Scan for networks. To stop background scans, select Show WLAN availability > Never . 3 To save your ch anges, select Back . When Show WLAN availability is set to Never , the WLAN availability icon is not displayed in the home screen. However, you can still manually scan for available WLAN networks, and connect to WLAN networks as usual. Q: What do I do if the memory is full? A: Delete items from the memory. If No t enough memory to perform operation. Delete so me data first. or Memory low. Delete so me data from pho ne memory. is displayed when you are de leting several items at the same time, delete items one by one, beginning with the smallest items. Q: Why canâÂÂt I select a contact for my message? A: The contact card does not have a phone number, address, or e-mail address. Select Menu > Contacts and the relevant contact, and edi t the contact card. Q: How can I en d the data connection whe n the device starts a data connection again and again? A: The device may be trying to retrieve a multimedia message from the multimedia mes sage centre. To stop the device from making a data connection , select Menu > Messaging and Optio ns > Settings > Multimedia message > Multimedia retriev al . Select Manual to have 135 Troubleshooting
the multimedia messaging ce ntre save messages to be retrieved later, or Off to ignore all incoming multimedia messages. If you select Manual , you receive a notification when you have a new message in the multime dia message centre. If you select Off , the device does not make any network connections related to multimedia messaging. To set the device to use a packet data connection only if you start an application or action that needs it, select Menu > S ettings and Connectivity > Admin. settings > Packet data > Packe t data connection > When needed . If this does not help, switch the device off and then on again. Q: Can I use m y Nokia devi ce as a fax modem with a compatible PC? A: You cannot use your device as a fax m odem. However, with call diverting (network service), you can divert incoming fax calls to a fax number. Q: How do I cali brate the scre en? A: The screen is calibrated at the factory. If it is necessary to recalibrate the screen, select Me nu > Settings and Phone > Touch input > Touch screen calibration . Follow the instructions. 136 Troubleshooting
Green tips Here are tips on how you can co ntribute to protect ing the environment. Save energy When you have fully charged the battery and disconnected the charger from the device, unplug the charge r from the wall outlet. You do not need t o charge your battery so often if you do the following: ⢠Close and disable applic ations, services, and connections when not in use. ⢠Decrease the brightness of the screen. ⢠Set the device to enter the power saver mode after the minimum period of inactivity, if available in your device. ⢠Disable unnecessa ry sounds, such as keypad and ringing tones. Recycle Most of the materials in a Nokia phone are recyclable. Check how to recycle your Nokia products at www.nokia.com/werecycle, or with a mobile device, www.nokia.mobi/werecy cle. Recycle packaging and user guid es at your local recycling scheme. Save paper This user guide helps you get started with your device. For more detailed instructions, open the in-device help (in most applications, select Options > Help ). For further support, see www.nokia.com/support. Learn more For more information on the environmental attributes of your device, see www.nokia.com/ecodeclaration. Product and safe ty information Acces sori es Warning: Use only batter ies, chargers, and accesso ries approved by Nokia fo r use with this particular model. The use of any other types may invalidate any approval or warranty, and may be danger ous. In particular, use of unapproved chargers or batt eries may present a risk of fir e, explosion, leakage, or other hazard. For availability o f approved accessori es, please check with your de aler. When you disconnect the power cord of any accessor y, grasp and pull the plug, not the co rd. Battery Battery and charger informatio n Your device is pow ered by a recharg eable battery. The battery intended for use with this device is BL-4D. Nokia may make addit ional battery models availab le for this device. This device is intended for us e wh en suppl ied with power from t he follow ing chargers: AC-10. The ex act charger model num ber may vary depending o n the type of plug. The pl ug variant is ide ntified by one o f the followin g: E, EB, X, AR, U, A, C, K, or UB. The battery can be charged and discharged hundreds of times, but it will eventually wear out. Whe n the talk and stand by times are not iceably shorter than no rmal, 137 Green tips
replace the battery. U se only Nokia approved batteries, and recha rge your battery only with Nokia approved chargers designated for this device. If a battery is being used for the fir st time or if the battery has not been used for a prolonged perio d, it may be necessary to connect the charger, then di sconnect and reconnect it to begin charging the battery. If th e battery is c ompletely discharge d, it may take several minutes before th e charging indi cator appears on the display or before any calls c an be made. Safe removal. Al ways switch the device off and di sconnect the charg er before removing the battery. Proper chargi ng. Unplug th e charger fro m the electrical plug and the d evice when not in use. Do not leave a fully charged battery connected to a charger, since overcharging may shorten its lifet ime. If le ft unused, a fully charged battery will lose its charge o ver time. Avoid extreme tempe ratures. Always tr y to keep the battery between 15ðC and 25ðC (59ðF and 77ðF). Extreme te mperat ures re duce the ca pacity a nd life time of th e battery . A device with a hot or cold batt ery may not work temp orarily . Batter y performance is pa rticularly limite d in temperatures we ll below free zing. Do not short-circuit. Acc idental short-circuiting can occur when a metallic object such as a coin, clip, or pen causes direct connect ion of the positive ( ) and negative (-) termin als of t he batt ery. ( These look li ke me tal stri ps on th e batt ery.) T his might happen, for example, when you carry a spar e battery in yo ur pocket or p urse. Short- circuiting the terminals may dama ge the battery or t he connecting object. Disposal. Do not dispose of batte ries in a fire as they may explode. Dispose of batte ries according to local regulations. Please r ecycle when possible. Do not dispose as household waste. Leak. Do not d ismantle, cut, open, crush, bend, puncture, or shred cells or batte ries. In the event o f a batter y leak, prevent batter y li qu i d c o nt ac t wi t h s k in or e ye s. If t hi s happens, flush the affected ar eas immediat ely with water, or seek medica l help. Damage. Do not modify, remanufa cture, attempt to insert foreign objects into the battery, or i mmerse or expo se it to wat er or other liquids. Batte ries may explod e if damaged. Correct use. Us e the battery only for its intended purpos e. Improper b attery use may result in a fire, explosion, or other hazard. If the device or battery is dropped, especially on a hard surface, and you b elieve the battery has been d amaged, take it to a service cent re for inspection before continuing to use it. Never use any charger or battery that is damaged. K eep your batter y out of the reac h of small children. Nokia battery authentication guidelines Always use original Nokia batteries for your safety. To check that you are getti ng an original Noki a battery, purcha se it from a Nokia authorised serv ice centre or dealer, and inspect the hologram label using the following steps: Authenticate hologram 1 W hen you look at the hologram on the label, you should see the Nokia connecting hands symbol from one angle and t he Nokia Original Enhancements logo when looki ng from anot her angle . 2 When you angle the hologram left, right, d own and up, you should see 1, 2, 3 and 4 dots on each side respectively. Successful completion of the steps is not a total assurance of the authenticity of the battery. If you cannot confirm authenticity or if you hav e any r eason to belie ve th at your Nokia battery with the ho logram on the label is not an authentic Nokia ba ttery, you should refrain from using it, and take it to the nearest Nokia authorised service centre or dealer for assistance. 138 Product and safety information
To find out more a bout original Nokia bat teries, see www.nokia.com/battery. Taking care of your device Your device is a product of superior design and crafts manship and should be treated with care. The following suggestions will help you protect your warrant y coverage. ⢠Keep the devi ce dry. Prec ipitation, humid ity, and all type s of liquids or moistu re can contain minerals that will corrod e el ectronic cir cuits. If your devi ce does get wet, remo ve the battery, a nd allow the d evice to dry co mpletely before replacing it. ⢠Do not use or s tore the device in d usty, dirty areas . Its moving parts and electronic comp onents can be dama ged. ⢠Do not store the device in hig h or cold temper ature. High temp eratures can shorten the life o f electronic de vices, damage b atteries, and w arp or melt certain plastics. When the device warms to its nor mal temperature from a cold temperature, moi sture can form insi de the device and damage electronic circuit boards. ⢠Do not attempt to open the devic e other than as instructed in th is guide. ⢠Do not drop, knock, or shake the device. Rough handling can break inter nal circuit boards and fine mechanic s. ⢠Do not use harsh chemicals, cleaning solvents, or strong det ergents to clean the devi ce. Only use a soft, clean, dry cloth t o clean the su rface of th e device. ⢠Do not paint t he device. Paint c an clog the moving parts and pr event proper operation . ⢠Use only the supplied or an approved rep lacement antenna. Unauthor ised antennas, modificatio ns, or attachments could d amage the device and may violate regulations gover ning radio devices. ⢠Use chargers indoors. ⢠Backup all data you want to keep, such as contact s and calendar notes. ⢠To rese t the device from ti me to t ime fo r opti mum p erforman ce, pow er off t he device an d remove t he battery . These suggestions apply equally to your de vice, battery, charger, or any accessory. Recycle Always return yo ur used electr onic products, b atteries, and packaging materi als to dedicated co llection points. This w ay you help prevent uncontrolled wast e disposal and promote the recycling o f materials. Ch eck product envir onmental informati on and how to recycle your Nokia pro duc ts at www.nokia.com/we recycle, or nokia.mobi/werecycle. The crosse d-out whe eled-bin symbol on your produ ct, battery , liter ature, or packaging reminds you th at all electrical and electronic products, ba tteries, and accumulators must be taken to s eparate coll ection at the e nd of their wo rking life. This requirement applies in the Europ ean Un ion. Do not dispose of these pro ducts as unsorted municipal waste. For more enviro nmental informat ion, see the product Eco - Declarations at www.nokia.com/environment. Additional safety information Small children Your device and its accessories are not toys. They may contain smal l parts. Keep them out of the reach of small children . Operating environment This device meets RF expos ure guidelines in the normal use posit ion at the ear or at least 1.5 centime tres (5/8 inch) awa y from the body. Any carry case, be lt clip, or hold er for body-worn operation should not contain metal and should position the device the above-s tated distance fro m your body. To send data fi les or messages req uires a quality co nnection to the network. Data files or messages may be delayed until such a connection is available. Follo w the separation distance instructi ons until the transmission is completed. Parts of the device are magne tic. Metallic mat erials may be attra cted to the device . Do not place cr edit cards or o ther magnetic s torage media near the device, b ecause information st ored on them may be erased. Medical devices Operation of rad io transmitting equip ment, including wireles s phones, may inter fere with the func tion of ina dequately protec ted medical devices. Consult a physician or the manufacturer o f the medical device to d etermine whether they are a dequately shielded f rom external RF e nergy. Switch off your devic e when regulations posted instruct you to do so. Hospitals or health care facilities ma y use equipment sensitive to external RF energy. Implanted medical devices Manufacturers of med ical devices recommend a minimum separation of 15.3 centimetres (6 inches) between a wireless device and an implanted medical device, 139 Product and safety information
such as a pacemaker or implanted cardioverter d efibrillator, to avo id potential interference wit h the medical device. Persons wh o have such devices should: ⢠Always keep the wireless device more than 15.3 centimetr es (6 inches) fr om the medica l device. ⢠Not carry the wireless d evice in a breast pocket. ⢠Hold the wirel ess device to the ear opposite the medical d evice. ⢠Turn the wireless device off if there is any reaso n to suspect that inte rference is taking place. ⢠Follow the manufacturer direct ions for the implanted medica l device. If you have any questions about using yo ur wireless device wi th an implanted medical device, consult your health car e provider. Hearing aids Some digital wireless devices may interfere with some hearing ai ds. Vehicles RF signals may affect improperly installed or inad equately shielded electr onic systems in motor vehicles such as electronic fuel injection, electroni c antilock braking, electronic speed contr ol, and air bag systems. For more inf ormation, check with the manufacturer of your vehicle or its equipment. Only qualified personnel should ser vice the device or install the device in a vehi cle. Faulty instal lation or servic e may be dangero us and may i nvalid ate you r warran ty. Check regularly that all wi reless device equipment in your vehicle is mounted and operating pr operly. Do not s tore or carr y flammable liquids , gases, or ex plosive materials in the same compar tment as the device, its parts, or accessorie s. Remember that air bags inf late with great force. Do not place your device or accesso ries in the air bag dep loymen t area. Switch off your device before boarding an ai rcraft. The use of wireless t eledevices in an aircraft may be dangerous t o the operation o f the aircraft and may be illegal. Potentially explosive environments Switch off yo ur device in any a rea with a p otentially expl osive atmospher e. Obey all posted instructions. Sparks in such areas coul d cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily injury or death. Switch off the device at refuelling points such as near ga s pumps at service stat ions. Observe restriction s in fuel depots, storage, and distribution area s; chemical plants; o r where blasting oper ations are in progress. Areas with a poten tially explosive atmo sphere are often, but not always, clearly marked. They include areas where yo u would be advised to turn off your vehicle engine, below deck on boat s, chemical transfer or storage faciliti es and where the air contains chemicals or particles such a s grain, dust, or met al powders. You should check with the manufacturers o f vehicles using liquefied petr oleum gas (such as propane or but ane) to determin e if this devi ce can be safely used in their vicinity. Emergency calls Important: This device operates using radio signals, wireless netw orks, landline networks, and user-programmed funct ions. If your device supports voice calls over the internet (int ernet calls), activat e both the inter net calls and t he cellular phone. The device will attem pt to make emergency call s over both the ce llular networks a nd through your internet call provider if both are activated. Connect ions in all conditions cannot be guaranteed. You should never re ly solely on any wirele ss device fo r essential communications like medical emergencies. To make an emergency call : 1 If the device is not on, switch it on. Check for adequate signal str ength. Depending on your d evice, you may also need to complete the following: ⢠Insert a SIM card if your device uses one. ⢠Remove certain call restrictions you have activated in your device. ⢠Change your pr ofile from offl ine profile mo de to an active profile. ⢠If the screen and keys are locked, sli de the lock switc h on the side of t he device to unlock them. 2 P ress the end key as ma ny times as needed to clear the di splay and ready th e device f or calls . 3 O pen the dia ller by selec ting the d ialler icon ( ). 4 Ent er the official emergency numb er for your present l ocation. Emergency numbers vary by location. 5 P ress the call key. When making an emergency call, give all t he necessary information as accurately as possible. Your wireless device may be the only means of communication at the sc ene of an accident. Do not en d the call until given permission to do so. Certification informa tion (SAR) This mobile device meets guidel ines for exposure to radio waves. Your mobile devic e is a radio transmitter and receiver. It i s designed not to exceed the limits for exposure to radio waves recommend ed by international gu idelines. These guidelines were develop ed by the in dependent scientific organi sation ICNIRP 140 Product and safety information
and include s afety margins designed to assure the prot ection of all persons , regardless of age and health. The exposure guidelines fo r mobile devices employ a unit of measurement k nown as the Spe cific Absorption Rate or SAR. The S AR limit stated in the ICNIRP guidelines is 2.0 watts/kilogram (W/kg) ave raged over 10 grams of tissue. Tests for SAR are conducted using stan dard operating positions with the device transmitting at it s highest certified power level in all tested frequency band s. The actual SAR level of an operating device can be be low the maximum value because the device is d esigned to use only the power required to reach the network. Tha t amount changes depending on a number o f factors such as how close you are to a network base station . The highest SAR valu e under the ICNIRP g uidelines for us e of the device at the ear is 0.67 W/kg. Use of device accessories may result i n different SAR va lues. SAR values ma y vary depending on national reporting a nd testing requirements a nd the network band. Additional SAR information may be pr ovided under prod uct information at www.nokia.com. 141 Product and safety information
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY Hereby, NOKIA CORPORATION declares that this RM-555 product is in compliance with the essential requirements and other r elevant provisions of D irective 1999/5/EC. A copy of the Declarati on of Conformity can be found at ht tp://www.nokia.com / phones/declaration_of_conformity/. Nokia, Nokia Connecting People, Nserie s, N97 mini, N-Gage, Nokia Original Accessories logo, and Ovi are trademarks or registered tradem arks of Nokia Corporation. Nokia tune is a sound mark of Nokia C orporation. Other product and company names mentioned herein ma y be trademarks o r tradenames of their respective owners . Reproduc tion, tra nsfer, dis tributio n, or storage of part or al l of the con tents i n this document in a ny form wi thout the pr ior written permission of Nokia is prohibited . Nokia operates a policy of continuous development. No kia reserves the right t o make changes and improv ements to any of the products de scribed in this d ocument without prior no tice. US Patent No 5818437 and other pending patents. T9 text input software Copyright Symbian and Symbian OS are trademarks of Sy mbian Ltd. Java and all Java-b ased marks are trad emarks or registered tr ademarks of Sun Micros ystems , Inc. reserved. This product is licensed under the MPEG- 4 Visual Patent Portfolio License (i) for personal and noncommercial use in conne ction with information which has been encoded in comp liance with t he MPEG-4 Visu al Standard by a consumer engage d in a perso nal and nonco mmerci al acti vity an d (ii) for use in connection with MPEG-4 video provided by a licensed video pr ovider. No lice nse is granted or shall be implied for any other use. Additional information, including that related to promotional, internal, and commercial uses, may be obtained from MPEG LA, LLC. See http:// www.mpegla.co m. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL NOKIA OR ANY OF ITS LICENSORS BE RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY LOSS OF DATA OR INCOME OR ANY SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL , CONSEQUENTIAL OR INDIRECT DAMAGES HOWSOEVER CAUSED. The third-party applicat ions provided w ith your device may have been created and may be owned by persons or entiti es not affiliat ed with or relat ed to Nokia. Nokia does not own the cop yrights or intell ectual p roperty ri ghts to th e third- party applications. As such, Nokia does not take any responsibility for end-user support, functionality of the applications, or t he i nformation in the applicat ions or these materials. Nokia do es not provid e any warranty fo r the third-part y applications. BY USING THE APPLICATIONS YOU ACKNOWLEDGE THAT THE APPLICATIONS ARE PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPR ESS OR IMPLIED, TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED B Y APPLICABLE LAW. YOU FURT HER ACKNOWLEDGE THAT NEITHER NOKIA NOR ITS AFFILIATES MAKE ANY REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF TITLE, MERCHANTABILITY OR FI TNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OR THAT TH E APPLICATIONS WILL NOT INFRINGE ANY THIRD-PARTY PATENTS, COPYRIGHTS, TRADEMARKS, OR OTHER RIGHTS. THE CONTENTS OF THIS DOCUMENT ARE PROVIDED "AS IS". EXCEPT AS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NO WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, B UT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMP LIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PUR POSE, ARE MADE IN RELATION TO THE ACCURACY, RELIABILITY OR CONTENTS OF THIS DOCUMENT. NOKIA RESERVES THE RIGHT TO REVISE THIS DOCUMENT OR WITHDRAW IT AT ANY TIME WITHOUT PRIOR NOTICE. Reverse engineering of software in the device i s prohibited to t he extent permitte d by appl icable law. Inso far as thi s user gu ide conta ins any limit ations on Nokia 's representations, warr anties, damages and liabilities, such limitati ons shall likewise limit any representati ons, warranties, dama ges and liabilities o f Nokia's licensors. The availability of particular prod ucts and applications and services for these products may vary b y region. Please check with your No kia dealer for details and availability of language op tions. This device may contain commo dities, technology é 2010 Nokia. All rights reserved. This product includes software licensed from Sy mbian Software Ltd é1998-2010. Portions of the Nokia Maps software ar e é1996-2010 The FreeType Project. Al l rights é 1997-2010. Tegic Communications, Inc. All rights reserved.
or software subject to export laws and regulations from the US and other countrie s. Diversion contrary to law is pro hibited. FCC/INDUSTRY CANADA NOTIC E Your device may cause TV or radio inter ference (for ex ample, when us ing a telephon e in close pr oximity to re ceiving equipment ). The FCC or Industry Can ada can requir e you to stop using your telephone if such interference cannot be eliminated. If you require assistance, contact your local se rvice facility. This devi ce complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operatio n is subject to the foll owing two conditions : (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device mus t accept any interference received, includi ng interferenc e that may cause und esired opera tion. Any changes or modifications not ex pressly approved by Nokia could void the user's authority t o operate this equipment. /Issue 3 EN
Index Symbols/Nu mbers 3-D ringing tones 114 A A-GPS (as sisted GPS) 78 access codes 10 access points 64 â groups 65 accessories 126 accounts 51 active notes 122 â settings 123 active toolbar â in Photos 99 alarm â calendar note 116 alarm clock 117 albums, media 100 answering calls 35 antennas 16 application manager 130 â settings 132 application settings 126 applications 130 assisted GPS (A-GPS) 78 attachments 54, 56 audio message s 53 auto-update for time/date 117 B background image 114, 115 backing up device memory 119 battery â charging 17 â inserting 14 â saving power 10 blogs 74 Bluetooth connectivit y â blocking devices 70 â device address 69 â device visibility 68 â pairing devices 69 â receiving data 70 â security 69 â sending data 69 â settings 68 â turning on/off 68 bookmarks 75 browser â bookmarks 75 â browsing pages 73, 74 â cache memory 75 â searching conte nt 74 â security 75 â settings 76 â toolbar 73 C cable connection 71 cache memory 75 calculator 122 calendar 116 â toolbar 116 calendar entry â deleting 116 â sending 116 call log 4 1, 42 call waiting 36 calls 34 â answering 35 â conference 35 â dialled numbers 29 â duration of 42 â internet calls 39 â options during 34 â redialling 132 â rejecting 35 â restricting See fixed dialling â settings 132 â video calls 37 camera â assign ing images to contacts 94 â flash 94 â image mode 93 â image quality 96 â indicators 93 â location information 94 â options 94 â recording 96 â scenes 95 â self-timer 95 144 Index
â sending image s 94 â sequence mode 95 â settings 92, 96 â video mode 96 â video quality 97 cell broadcast messages 57 certificates 127 charging the battery 17 chat services (IM) 49 clock 115, 117 â setting date 117 â settin g time 117 computer connections 71 See also data connections conference calls 35 connectors 14 contacts 43 â adding 43 â copying 45 â creating groups 46 â defaults 43 â deleting 43 â editing 43 â favourites 27 â groups 46 â ringing tones 44 â saving 43 â sending 43 â synchronising 67 â voice tags 43 content â synchronising, sending, and retrieving 24 converter 121 copyright protection 129 currency â converter 121 D data connections â cable 71 â device updates 126 â PC connectivity 71 â synchronisation 67 date and time 117 date and time settings 124 declining calls See rejecting calls device updates 126 dictionary 120 dismissing calls 35 display rotation 125 display settings 125 DRM (digital rights management) 129 duration of calls 42 E e-mail 61 â notifications 26, 27 e-mail messages 55 end all calls option 36 F factory settings â restoring 129 feeds, news 74 file management 120 file manager 119, 120 â backing up files 120 â organisi ng files 119 fixed dialling 45 FM radio 109 G general information 8 GPS â position requests 80 GPS (global positioning system) 78 H headset 18 help application 8 home screen 27, 114, 115 â contact s 27 â music player 27 â notifications 26 HSDPA (high-speed downlink packet access) 30 I IAPs (internet access points) 64 IM (instant mes saging) 49 145 Index
images 99 â editing 101 â sharing online 103 inbox â message 54 inbox, message 54 indicators and icons 2 7 installing applications 130 internet browser 73 internet calls 38 â log in 38 â making 3 9 â settings 39 internet connection 73 See also browser invitations â video shar ing 41 J Java applications 130 JME Java application support 130 K keyb oard 21 keygua rd 23 keypa d lock 23 keys 13, 14 L landmarks 80 language settings 125 licences 129 location information 78 lock code 10, 16 locking â remotely 10 loudspeaker 29 M Mail for Exchange 61 mailbox â e-mail 55 â video 35 â voice 35 Maps 83 â browsing 84 â changing views 85 â compass 84 â display elements 85 â downloading maps 91 â driving routes 90 â Favourites 88 â finding locations 85 â navigating 90 â organising places 88 â organising routes 88 â planning routes 86 â positioning 83 â saving places 87 â saving routes 87 â sending places 88 â sharing locations 89 â synchronising 88 â traffic information 91 â viewing location details 86 â voice guidance 89 â walking 90 mass memory â formatting 120 media â RealPlayer 117 memory â clearing 11 â web cache 75 memory card 120 â backing up files 120 message reader â selecting voice 124 messages â e-mail 55 â folders for 53 â icon for incoming 54 â multimedia 54 â settings 57 â voice 35 Mini Map 74 MMS (multimedia mess age service) 53, 54, 58 multimedia messages 53, 54, 58 music player 27, 104 â playlists 105 â transferring music 106 music store 106 muting sound 35 my music 104 146 Index
N navigation tools 78 network settings 62 news feeds 74 Nokia account 31, 47, 51 Nokia Ma p Loader 91 Nokia Music Store 106 nokia software upda ter 9 Nokia support information 8 notes 119 notification light 130 O offline profile 30 outbox, message 53 Ovi Contacts 47 â adding friends 48 â availability status 48 â connection settings 52 â landmarks 51 â personalisation 52 â presence 51 â profiles 48 â searching 48 â settings 50 â sharing your location 48, 51 â synchronising 50 Ovi Store 31 â creating an account 31 â details 32 â purchasing 32 â searching 31 â settings 32 â sharing with friends 32 â signing in 31 P packet data connection â access point settings 66 â counters 42 â settings 71 page overview 74 PDF reader 123 personal certificates 127 personalisation 114 photographs See camera photos 99 â file de tails 99 â red-eye 102 â tags 100 â toolbar 99 â viewing 98 PIN code 10 pin code 16 PIN2 code 10 podcasting 107 â directories 108 â downloads 108 â playing 109 â settings 106 positioning information 78 positioning settings 81 presence 51 presentations, multimedia 55 profiles 25, 114 â changing profiles 28 â offline restrictions 30 â personalisation 25 proximity sensor 34 proxy settings 66 PUK codes 10 R radio 109 â listening 109 â stations 110 RealPlayer 117 recent calls 41 recording â video clips 96 red-eye removal 102 rejecting calls 35 remote locking 10 remote mailbox 55 remote SIM mode 70 removing applications 131 ringing tones 25, 114 roaming 62 S scenes 95 search â settings 29 searching 29 â podcasts 107 147 Index
security â certificates 127 â web browser 75 security code 10 security module 129 self-timer â camera 95 sensors 125 sent messa ges folder 53 service commands 57 service messages 55 settings 126 â access point na me control 72 â access points 64, 65 â active notes 123 â applications 126 â Bluetooth connectivity 68 â browser 76 â call barring 133 â call divert 133 â calls 132 â camera 92 â certificates 127 â date and time 124 â display 125 â e-mail notifications 27 â internet calls 39 â language 125 â messages 58 â network 62 â packet data 7 1 â packet data access points 6 6 â podcasting 106 â positioning 81 â SIP 72 â slide 126 â tv-out 126 â video 112 â video sharing 40 â WLAN 64, 66 Share online 27 shared video 39 sharing your location 50 shooting modes â camera 95 SIM card â inserting 14 â messages 56 SIM card security 127 SIP 72 slide settings 126 slide show 100 SMS (short mes sage service) 53 software â updating 9 software applications 130 software updates 9 songs 104 speakerphone 29 speech 124 speed dialling 36 support resources 8 Symbian applications 130 synchronisation 50 synchronisation of data 67 T text messages â receiving and reading 54 â replying to 54 â sending 53 â settings 57 â SIM messages 56 themes 114 time and date 117 tones 25, 114 â 3-D 114 touch screen 19 transferring content 24 troubleshooting 134 TV configuration 126 TV-out mode 101 U updates 9 UPIN code 10 UPUK code 10 USB cable connection 71 USB charging 17 useful information 8 V video â downloading 111 â my videos 112 â playing 112 148 Index
â settings 112 â shared 41 â transferring video clips 112 â video feeds 112 â viewing 111 video calls 37, 38 video clips 99 â editing 102 â shared 39 video set tings 97 video shar ing â requirements 39 â sharing live video 40 â sharing video clips 40 voice calls See calls voice commands 29, 36, 125 See also voice dialling voice control 125 voice dialling 36 voice mai lbox 29 volume controls 29 W web browser 73 web connection 73 web logs 74 week settings â calendar alarm 116 widgets 27 wireless LAN (WLAN) 63 wireless LAN set tings 64 WLAN (wireless local area network) 66 wrist strap 19 Z Zip manager 122 149 Index
Contents Safety 6 About your device 6 Office applications 7 Network services 7 Shared memory 7 ActiveSync 7 Magnets and magnetic fields 7 Find help 8 Support 8 In-device help 8 Do more with your device 8 Update device software 9 Settings 10 Access codes 10 Remote lock 10 Prolong battery life 10 Free memory 11 Get start ed 13 Keys and parts (front) 13 Keys and parts (back) 13 Keys and parts (sides) 14 Keys and parts (top) 14 Insert the SIM card and battery 14 Memory card 15 Antenna locations 16 Switch the device on and off 16 Charge the battery 17 Headset 18 Attach wrist s trap 19 Touch screen actions 19 Write text 20 Lock the keys and touch screen 23 Nokia Switch 24 Profiles 25 Your dev ice 26 Home screen 2 6 Display indicators 27 Shortcuts 28 Search 29 Volume and loudspeaker control 29 Offline profile 30 Fast downloading 30 Ovi (network service) 31 Make calls 34 Proximity sensor 34 Voice calls 34 During a call 34 Voice and video mailboxes 35 Answer or reject a call 35 Make a conference call 35 Speed dial a phone number 36 Call waiting 36 Voice dialling 36 Make a vid eo call 37 During a vide o call 37 Answer or reject a video call 38 Internet calls 38 Video sharing 39 Log 41 2 Contents
Contacts (phonebook) 43 Save and edit names and numbers 43 Contacts toolbar 43 Manage names and numbers 43 Default numbers and addresses 43 Contact cards 44 Set contacts as favourit es 44 Ringing tones, images, and call text for contacts 44 Copy contacts 45 SIM services 45 Contact groups 46 Ovi Contacts 47 About Ovi Contacts 47 Start using Ovi Contacts 47 Connect to the service 47 Create and edit your profile 48 Find and add friends 48 Chat with your friends 49 Ovi Sync 50 Share your location 50 Ovi Contacts set tings 50 Nokia account settings 51 Presence settings 51 Personalisation settings 52 Connection settings 52 Messaging 53 Messaging main view 53 Write and send messages 53 Messaging inbox 54 Mailbox 55 View messages on a SIM card 56 Cell broadcast messages 57 Service commands 57 Messaging settings 57 Mail for Exchange 61 Connectivity 62 Data connections and access points 62 Network settings 62 Wireless LAN 63 Access points 64 Active data connections 67 Synchronisation 67 Bluetooth connectivity 68 USB 71 PC connections 71 Administra tive settings 71 Internet 73 Browse the web 73 Browser toolbar 73 Navigate pages 74 Web feeds and blogs 74 Content search 74 Bookma rks 75 Empty the cache 75 End the connection 75 Connection security 75 Web settings 76 Position ing (GPS) 78 About GPS 78 Assisted GPS (A -GPS) 78 Hold your device correctly 79 3 Contents
Tips on creating a GPS connection 79 Position requests 80 Landmarks 80 GPS dat a 80 Positioning settings 81 Maps 83 Maps overview 83 About positioning methods 83 Use the compass 84 View your location and th e map 84 Map view 85 Change the look of the map 85 Find a location 85 View location details 86 Plan a route 86 Save places and routes 87 View and organise places or routes 88 Send places to your friends 88 Synchronise your Favourites 8 8 Share location 89 Get voice guidance 89 Walk to your destination 90 Drive to your destination 90 Get traffic and safety information 91 Download and update maps 91 Camera 92 Image capture 92 Video recording 96 Camera settings 96 Photos 98 About Photos 98 View images and videos 98 View and edit file details 99 Organise images and video clips 99 Photos toolbar 99 Albums 100 Tags 100 Slide show 100 TV-out mode 101 Edit images 101 Edit video clips 102 Image print 102 Share online 103 Music 104 Play a song or a podcast 104 Playlists 105 Podcasts 105 Transfer music from a computer 106 Nokia Music Store 106 Nokia Podcasting 106 FM radio 109 Videos 111 Download and view video clips 111 Video feeds 112 My videos 112 Transfer videos from your PC 112 Video settings 112 Personalise your device 114 Change the look of your device 114 Profiles 114 4 Contents
3-D tones 114 Modify the home screen 115 Modify the main menu 115 Applications 116 Calendar 116 Clock 117 RealPlayer 117 Recorder 119 Notes 119 Office 119 Settings 124 Phone settings 124 Application manager 130 Calling settings 132 Troubleshoot ing 134 Green tips 137 Save energy 137 Recycle 137 Save paper 137 Learn more 137 Product and safety informatio n 137 Index 144 5 Contents
Safety Read these simple guidelines . Not following them may be dangerous or illegal. Read the complete user guide for further information. SWITCH ON SAFELY Do not switch the device on when wireless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger. ROAD SAFETY CO MES FIRST Obey all local laws. Alwa ys keep your hands free to operate the vehicle while driving. Your first consideration while driving should be road safety. INTERFERENCE All wireless devices may be suscepti ble to interference, whic h could affect perform ance. SWITCH OFF IN R ESTRICTED ARE AS Follow any restrict ions. Switch the device off in aircraft, near medical equipment, fuel, chemicals, or blasting area s. QUALIFIED SERVICE Only qualified personnel may install or repair this product. ACCESSORIES AN D BATTERIES Use only approved accesso ries and batteries. Do not connect incompatible products. WATER-RESISTAN CE Your device is not water-resistant. Keep it dry. About your device The wirele ss device de scribe d in this guide is approved for use on the (E)GSM 850, 9 00, 1800,1900, a nd UMTS 900, 1900, 2100 networks. Contact your service provider for more information about networks. Your device supports severa l connectivity methods and like computers may be exposed to viruses and other harmful content. Ex ercise caution with me ssages, connectivity requests, browsing, and downloa ds. Only install and use services and software from trustworthy sources that offer adequate securit y and protection, such as applications th at are Symbian Signed or h ave passed the Java Verified⢠testing. Co nsider installing antivirus and other security software on your device and any connecte d computer. Your device may have preinstalled bookmarks and links for third-party internet sites an d may allow you to access third-party sites. These ar e not affiliated with Nokia, and Nokia does not endorse or assu me liability for them. If you access such sites, take preca utions for security or content. 6 Safety
Warning: To use any features in this device, other than the alarm clock, the device must be sw itched on. Do not switch the device on when wireless device use may cause interference or danger. When using this device, obey all laws and respect local customs, privacy and legitimate rights of others, including copyrights. Copyright protection may prevent some images, music, and othe r content from being copied, modified, or transferred. Make back-up copies or keep a written record of all important information stored in your device. When connecting to any other device, read its user guide for detailed safety inst ructions. Do not connect incompatible products. The images in this guide may differ from your device display. Refer to the user guide for othe r important informat ion about your device. Office applicatio ns The office applications support common features of Microsoft Word, PowerPoint, and Excel (Microsoft Office 2000, XP, and 2003). Not all file forma ts are supported. Network services To use the device you must have service from a wireless service provider. Some features are not available on all networks; other features may require that you make specific arrangements with your service provider to use them. Network services invo lve transmission of data. Check with your service provid er for details about fees in your home network and when roaming on other networks. Your service provider can explain what charges will apply. Some networks may have limitation s that affect how you can use some features of this device requiring network support such as support for specific te chnologies like WAP 2.0 protocols (HTTP and SSL) that run on TCP/IP protocols and la nguage-dependent charac ters. Your service provider may ha ve requested that certain features be disabled or not activated in your device. If so, these features will not appear on your device menu. Your device may also have cus tomized items such as menu names, menu order, and icons. Shared memory The following features in th is device may share memory: multimedia messaging (MMS), e-mail application, instant messaging. Use of one or mo re of these features may reduce the memory available for the remaining features. If your device displays a message that t he memory is full, delete some of the inform ation stored in the shared memory. ActiveSync Use of the Mail for Exchange is limited to over-the-air synchronisation of PIM info rmation between the Nokia device and the authorised Microsoft Exchange server. Magnets and magnetic fields Keep your device away from magnets or magnetic fields. 7 Safety
Find help Support When you want to learn more about how to use your product or you are unsure how your dev ice should function, see the supp ort pages at www. nokia.com/ support or your local Nokia website, www. nokia.mobi/ support (with a mobile device), the Help applicati on in the device, or the user guide. If this does not resolve your issue, do one of the following: ⢠Restart the device: switch off the device, an d remove the battery. After about a minute, replace the battery, and switch on the device. ⢠Restore the original factor y settings as explained in the user guide. Your do cuments and files will be deleted in the reset, s o back up your data first. ⢠Update your device software regularly for optimum performance and possible ne w features, as explained in the user guide. If your issue remains unsolved, contact Nokia for repair options. See www.nokia.com/rep air. Before sending your device for repair, always back up the data in your device. In-device help Your device contains instructions to help to use the applications in your device. To open help texts from the main menu, select Menu > Applications > Help and the application for which you want to read instructions. When an application is open, to access the help text for the current view, select Optio ns > Help . When you are reading the instructions, to change the size of the help text, select Options > Decrease font size or Increase font s ize . You may find links to related topics at the end of the h elp text. If you select an underlined word, a short explanation is displayed . Help texts use the following indicators: Link to a related help topic. Link to the application being discussed. When you are reading the instructions, to switch betw een help texts and the applicat ion t hat is open in the background, select Options > Show open apps. and the desired application. Do more with y our device There are various applications provided by Nokia and third party software developers, th at help you do more with your device. To find and down load applications, visit the Ovi Store at store.ovi.com. These applications are explained in the guides that are available on the product support pages at www.n okia.com/support or your local Nokia website. 8 Find help
Update device software Software updat es over th e air Select Menu > Applications > SW update . With Software update (netwo rk service), you can check if there are updates available fo r your device software or applications, and download th em to your device. Downloading software up dates may involve the transmission of large amounts of data (network service). Make sure that the device ba ttery has enough power, or connect the charger before st arting the update. Warning: If you install a software upda te, you cannot use the device, even to make emergency calls , until the installation is completed and the device is restarted. Be sure to back up data before accepting ins tallation of an update. After updating your device software or applications using Software update, the instru ctions related to the updated applications in the user guid e or the helps may no longer be up to date. To download the available up dates, select . To unmark specific updates that you do not want to download, select the updates fro m the list. To view information on an update, select the upda te and . To view the status of previou s updates, select . Select Options and from the following: Update via PC â Update your device using a PC. This option replaces the Start up date option when up dates are only available using the Nokia Software Updater PC application. View update history â View the status of previous updates. Settings â Change the settings, such as the default access point used for downloading upda tes. Disclaimer â View the Nokia licence agreement. Software updates using your P C Nokia Software Updater is a PC application that en ables you to update your device so ftware. To update yo ur device software, you need a compatible PC, broadband internet access, and a compatible US B data cable to connect your device to the PC. To get more information , to check the release notes for the latest software v ersions, and to download the N okia Software Updater applic ation, see www.nokia.com/ softwareupdate or your local Nokia website. To update the device software, do the following: 1 Download and install the Nokia Software Updater application to your PC. 2 Connect your device to the PC using a USB data cable, and select PC Suit e mode . 3 Open the Nokia Software Updater application. The Nokia Software Updater application guides y ou to back up your files, update the software, and restore your files. 9 Find help
Settings Your device normally has MMS, GPRS, streaming, and mobile internet settings automatica lly configured, based on your network service provider information. You may have settings from your service providers already installed in your device, or you may receive or request the settings from the network service providers as a special message. You can change the general se ttings in your device, such as language, standby mode, display, and keypad lock settings. Access codes If you forget any of the access codes, contact your service provider. Personal identification numb er (PIN) code â This code protects your SIM card ag ainst unauthorise d use. The PIN code (4 to 8 digits) is usually su pplied with the SIM card. After three consecutive incorr ect PIN code entries, the code is blocked, and you need the PUK code to unblock it. UPIN code â This code may be supplied with the USIM card. The USIM card is an enhanced version of the SIM card and is supported by UMTS mobile phones. PIN2 code â This code ( 4 to 8 digits) is supplied with some SIM cards, and is requi red to access some funct ions in your devic e. Lock code (also known as security code) â The lock code helps you to protect your device against unauthorised use. The preset code is 12345. You can create and change the code, and set the device to re quest the code. Keep the new code secret and in a safe place separate from your device. If you forget the code and your device is locked, your device will require service. Additional charges may apply, and all the personal data in your device may be deleted. For more information, contact a Nokia Care point or your device dealer. Personal Unblocking Key (PUK) code and PUK2 code â These codes (8 digits) are required to change a blocked PIN code or PIN2 code, respectively. If the codes are not supplied with the SI M card, conta ct the opera tor whose SIM card is in your device. UPUK code â This code (8 digi ts) is required to change a blocked UPIN code. If the co de is no t supplied with the USIM card, contact the operator whose USIM card is in your devic e. Remote lock To prevent unauthorised use of your device, you can lock your device and memory card remotely using a text message. You must define the text message, and to lock your device, send the text message to you r device. To unlock your device, you need the lock code. To enable remote locking, and to define the text message, select Menu > Settings and Phone > Phone mgmt. > Security settings > Phone and SIM card > Re mote phone loc king > Enabled . Tap the text input field to enter the text message content (5-2 0 characters), select , and verify the message. Enter the lock code. Prolong batte ry life Many features in your devi ce increase the demand on battery power and reduce the ba ttery lifetime. To save battery power, note the following: 10 Find help
⢠Features that use Bluetooth technology, or allowing such features to run in the background w hile using other features, increase the demand on battery power. Dea ctivate Bluetooth technolog y when you do not need it. ⢠Features that use wireless LA N (WLAN), or allowing such features to run in the background w hile using other features, increase the demand on battery power. WLAN on your Nokia devi ce deactivates when you are not trying to connect, not connected to an access point, or not scanni ng for available networ ks. To further reduce batt ery consum ption, you ca n specify that your dev ice does not scan , or scans less often, for available networks in the background. ⢠If you have set Packet data connection to When available in connection settings, and there is no packet data coverage (GPR S), the device periodically tries to establish a packet data connection. To prolong the operating time of your device, select Packet data connection > When n eeded . ⢠The Maps application downloads new map information when you scroll to new areas on the map, which increases th e demand on battery power. You can prevent the automatic dow nload of new maps. ⢠If the signal strength of the cellular network varies much in your area, your device must scan for the available network rep eatedly. This increases the demand on battery power. If the network mode is set to dual mode in the network settings, the device searches for the 3G net work. You can set the device to use only the GSM network. T o use only the GSM network, select Menu > Settings and Connectivity > Ne twork > Ne twork mode > GS M . ⢠The backlight of the di spla y increases the demand on battery power. In the display setti ngs, you can change the length of the time-out period after w hich the backlight is switched off. Select Menu > Settings and Phone > Display > Light time-out . To adjust th e light sensor that observes lighting conditions and adjusts the display brightness, in the display settings, select Light se nsor . ⢠Leaving applications running in the background increases the demand on ba ttery power. To close the applications you are not using, if they are not responding, select Options > Show open apps. , and go to the application usin g the menu key. Press and hold the menu key to open the application , and select Options > Exi t . Free memory To view how much space is available for different data types, select Menu > Applications > Office > File mgr. . Many features of the device use memory to store data. The device notifies you if the memory in different memory locations is low. To free memory , transfer data to a compatible m emory card (if available) or to a co mpatible computer. To remove data you no longer need, use File manager or open the respective applicat ion. You can remove the following: ⢠Messages in the folders in Messa ging and retrieved e- mail messages in the mailbox 11 Find help
⢠Saved web pages ⢠Contact information ⢠Calendar notes ⢠Applications shown in Application manager that you do not need ⢠Installation files (.sis or .s isx) of applications you have installed. Transfer the in sta llation files to a compatible computer. ⢠Images and video clips in Photos. Back up the files to a compatible comput er. 12 Find help
Get started Note: The surface of this device does not contain nickel in the platings. The surface of this device cont ains stainless steel. Keys and parts (front) 1 Proximity sensor 2 Earpiece 3 Touch screen 4 Menu key 5 Call key 6 Secondary camera lens 7 Light sensor 8 End key Do not cover the area above the touch screen, for example, with protective film or tap e. Keys and parts (back) 1 Camera flash 2 Camera lens 13 Get started
Keys and parts (sid es) 1 Stereo speaker 2 Charging indicator light 3 Micro USB connector 4 Lock switch 5 Volume up/Zoom in key 6 Volume down/Zoom out key 7 Capture key Keys and part s (top) 1 Power key 2 Nokia AV connector (3.5 mm) Insert the SI M card and battery Follow the instructions carefu lly, to avoid damaging the back cover. Safe removal. Always switch the device off and disconnect the charger before removing the batt ery. 1 Remove the back cover by lifting it from the bottom end of the device. 2 If the battery is inserted , lift the battery in the direction of the arrow to remove it. 3 Pull out the SIM card holder , and insert the SIM card. Ensure that the gold-colou red contact area on the card is facing down and that the bev elled corner on the card is facing the bevelled corner on the holder. Push the SIM card holder back in. 14 Get started
4 Align the contacts of the ba ttery with the corresponding connectors on the battery compartment, and insert the battery in the direction of the arrow. 5 To replace the back cov er, direct the top locki ng catches toward their slots, an d press down until the cover locks into place. Memory card Use only compatible microSD cards ap proved by Nokia for use with this device. Noki a uses approved industry standards for memory cards, but some brands may not be fully compatible with this de vice. Incompatible cards may damage the card and the device and corrupt da ta stored on the card. Insert the memory card A memory card may be alread y inserted in the device. If not, do the following: 1 Remove the back cover of the device. 2 Insert a compatible memory card in the slot. Ensure that the contact area on the card is facing down and towards the slot. 15 Get started
3 Push the car d in. You can hear a click when the card locks into place. 4 Replace the back cover . K eep the device facing down when replacing the cover. Ensure that the cover is prop erly c lose d. Remove the m emory card Importa nt: Do not remove the memory card during an operation when the card is being accessed. Doing so may damage the memory card and the device, and corrupt data stored on the card. 1 Before you remove the card, pr ess the power key, and select Remove memory card . All applications are closed. 2 When Removing memory card will close all open applications. Remove anyway? is displayed, select Yes . 3 When Remove memory card and press 'OK' is displayed, remove the back cover of the device. 4 Press the memory card to release it from the slot. 5 Pull out the memory card. If the device is switched on, select OK . 6 Replace the back cover . Ensure that the cover is prop erly c lose d. Antenna locations Your device may have internal and exte rnal antennas. Avoid touching the anten na area unnecessaril y while the antenna is transmitting or receiving. Contact with antennas affects the communicat ion quality and may cause a higher power level during operation and may reduce the battery life. Switch the device on and off To switch on the device: 1 Press and hold the power key. 16 Get started
2 If the device asks for a PIN code or lock code, enter it, and select OK . The preset lo ck code is 12345 . If you forget the code and your device is locked, your device will require service and additional ch arges may apply. For more information, contact a Nokia Care point or your device dealer. To switch off th e device, press th e power key briefly, and select Switch off! . Charge the b attery Your battery has been partially charged at the factory. There may not be a need to charge the battery in advance. If the device indicates a low ch arge, do the following: Regular charging 1 Connect the charge r to a wall outlet. 2 Connect the charger to the device. The charging indicator light next to the USB connector is lit when the battery is being charged. 3 When the device indicates a full charge, disconnect the charger from the device, th en from the wall outlet. You do not need to charge the battery for a specifi c length of time, and you can us e the de vice while it is charging. If the battery is com pletely disc harged, it may take several minutes before the charging indicator a ppears on the display or before any calls can be made. Tip: Disconnect the charger from the wall outlet when the charger is not in use. A charge r that is connected to the outlet consumes power even when it is not connected to the device. USB charging You can use USB charging w hen a wall outlet is not available. With USB charg ing, you can also transfer dat a while charging the device. 1 Connect a compatible US B device to your device using a compatible USB cable. 17 Get started
The efficiency of USB chargi ng varies significantly. In some cases, it may take a very long time for charging to start and the device to start functioning. 2 If your device is switched on, you can select from the available USB mode options on the display of the device. Headset You can connect a compatible headset or compatible headphones to your device. You may ne ed to select the cable mode. Some headsets come in two parts, a remote control unit and headphones. A remote control unit ha s a microphone and keys to answer or end a phone call, adjust the volume, and play music or video files. To us e the headphones with a remote control unit, connect the unit to t he Nokia AV Connector in the device, then connect the headphones to the unit. Warning: When you use the headset, your abilit y to hear outside sounds may be affected. Do not use the headset where it can endanger your safety. Do not connect products that create an output signal as this may c ause dama ge to the device. D o not conn ect any voltage source to the Nokia AV Connector. When connecting any external device or any headset, other than those app roved by Nokia for use with this 18 Get started
device, to the Nokia AV Connector, pay special attention to volume levels. Attach wris t strap Thread the wrist strap, an d tighten it. Touch screen actions Use the touch screen with your finger or with a stylus (if available). Important: Use only a stylus approved by Nokia for use with this device. Using any other s tylus may invalidate an y warranty applying to the devi ce and may damage the touch screen. Avoid scratching the touch screen. Never us e an actual pen or pencil or other sharp objects to write on the touch screen. Tap and double-t ap To open an application o r other element on the touch screen, you normally tap it with your finger. However, to open the following items, you must tap them twice. ⢠List items in an app lication, such as the Drafts folder in the Messaging appli cation. ⢠Files in a file list, for exam ple, an image in the Captured folder in the Photos application. Tip: When you open a list view, the first item is already highlighted. To open the hi ghlighted item, tap it once. If you tap a file or similar item once, it is not opened, it becomes highlighted. To see the op tions available for the item, select Options or, if available, select an icon from a toolbar. Select In this user docu mentation, to open applications or items by tapping them once or twic e, you "select" them. If you need to select several item s in a sequence, th e display texts to select are separated by arrows. Example: To select Options > Help , tap Optio ns , and then tap Help . Drag To drag, plac e your finger on the screen, and slide it acr oss the screen. Example: To scroll up or down on a web page, drag the page with your finger. 19 Get started
Swipe To swipe, slide your finger quickly left or right on the screen. Flick To flick, place your finger on the screen, slide it quickly across the screen, then quickly lift your finger. The content of the screen will continue scrolling with the speed and direction it had at the moment of release. To select an item from a scrolling list and to stop the movement, tap the item. In your device, flicking is availa ble in Music player. Scroll To scroll up or down in lists th at have a scroll bar, drag the slider of the scroll bar. In some list views, you can place your finger on a list i tem and drag up or down. Tip: To view a brief description of an icon, place your finger on the icon. Descriptions are n ot available for all icons. Touch screen backlight To turn the screen backlig h t on, unlock the screen and keys, if necessary, a nd press the menu key. Write text You can enter text in several ways. When the slide is open, the full keyboard works as a traditional keyboard. When the slide is closed, you can use the virtual keypad to enter text, or use handwriting mode to write chara cters directly on the s creen. To open th e virtual keypad , select any text input field. To switch between the virtua l keypad and hand writing mode, select and the desired input mode. The input methods and lan guages supported by the handwriting recognition vary by regio n. 20 Get started
Keyboard input Keyboard Your device has a full keyboa rd. To open the keyboard, push the touch screen up. In all applications, the screen rotates automatically from port rait to landscape when y ou open the keyboard. 1S y m k e y . To insert special ch aracters not shown on the keyboard, press the sym key once, and select the desired character from the table . 2 Function key . To insert special characters printed at the top of keys, press the function key, an d then press the corresponding alphabet key, or press and hold the alphabet key only. To enter several special characters in a row, press the function key twice quickly, and then press the desired alphabet keys. To return to normal mode, press the function key once. 3S h i f t k e y . To change between uppercase and lowercase modes, press the sh ift key twice. To enter a single uppercase letter in lowercase mode, or a single lowercase letter in upperc ase mode, press the shift key once, and then the desired alphabet key. 4S p a c e k e y 5A r r o w k e y s . To move up, down, left, or right, use the arrow keys. 6E n t e r k e y 7 Backspace key . To erase a char acter, press the backspace key. To erase several char acters, press and hold the backspace key. 21 Get started
Insert lett ers not shown on the keyboard It is possible to insert variations of letters, for example, letters with accents. To inse rt á, press and hold the sym key, and sim ultaneously pres s the A key repeatedly, until the desired character is displayed. The order and availability of letters de pe nds on the selected writing language. Touch input Handwr iting To activate handwriti ng mode, tap and Handwr iting . Write legible, upright characters on the text input area, and leave a space between each character. To teach the device your handwrit ing style, tap and Handwritin g training . To enter letters and numbers (default mode), write words as you would normally. To select nu mber mode, tap in the right pane of the input area. To enter non-Latin characters, tap the corresponding i con, if available. To write special characters, write them as you would normally. You can also tap in the right pane of the input area, and select a desired chara cter from the pop-up table. To delete characters or move the cursor back, swipe backwards (see Figure 1). To insert a space, swipe forwards (s ee Figure 2). Touch input settings Select Menu > Sett ings and Phone > Touch input . To configure text input sett ing s for the touch screen, select from the following: Handwrit ing traini ng â Open the handwriting tra ining application. Train th e device to recognise your handwriting better. This opt ion is not available in all languages. Writing languag e â Define which language-specific characters in your handwrit ing are recognised and ho w your on-screen keyb oard is laid out. Writin g speed â Adjust the speed at which ha ndwriting is recognised. Guiding line â Show or hide the guiding line in the writing area. The guiding line helps you write in a straight line, and it also helps the device recognise your writing. Pen trail wi dth â Change the thickness of the text written with the stylus. 22 Get started
Writing colour â Chan ge the colour of the text written with the sty lus. Icons and funct ions Use the on-screen keypad ( Alphanumeric keypad ) to enter characters like y ou would with a t raditional phone keypad with numbers on the keys. For an explanation of each icon and its function , see the following figure. 1 Close - Closes on-screen keypad ( Alphanumeric keypad ). 2 Input menu - Opens th e touch input m enu, which includes commands such as Activate predictive text and Writing language . 3 Text input indicator - Op ens a pop-up window, in which you can turn predicti v e text input modes on or off, change the character case, and switch between letter and number mode. 4 Input mode - Opens a pop -up window, in which you can select from the availa ble input modes. When you tap an item, the current inpu t method view closes, a nd the selected one opens. 5 Arrow keys - Moves the cursor left or right. 6 Backspace - Deletes the previously entered character. 7 Number keys - Enters the desired numbers or characters according to the current case and input mode. 8 Star - Opens a specia l char acters table. 9 Shift - Changes the character case, turns predicti ve text input modes on or off, and switches between the alphabet and number modes. Lock the keys and touch scre en When the device or keypad is locked, calls may be possible to the official emergency number programmed into your device. To lock or unlock the touch screen and the keys, slide the lock switch on the side of the device. When the touch screen and keys are locked, the touch screen is turned off and the keys are inactive. To modify settings for automatic screen and key locking, select Menu > Settings an d Phone > Pho ne mgmt. > Auto. keygu ard . 23 Get started
Nokia Swi tch Transfer conten t You can use the Switch applic ation to copy content su ch as phone numbe rs, addresses, calendar items, and images from your previous Nokia device to your de vice. The type of content that can be transferred depends on the model of the device from which you want to transfer content. If that device supports synchronisation, you can also synchronise data between the devices. Your device notifies you if the other device is not compatible. If the other device cannot be switched on without a SIM card, you can insert your SIM card in it. When your device is switched on without a SI M card, the Offline profile is automatically activated, and transfer can be done. Transfer conten t for the first time 1 To retrieve data from the other device for the first time, on your device, select Menu > Se ttings > Connectivity > Data transfer > Phone s witch . 2 Select the connection type you want to use to transfer the data. Both devi ces must support the sele cted connection type. 3 If you select Bluetooth connectivity as t he connection type, connect the two devices. To have your device search for devices with Bluetooth connectivity, select Continue . Select the device from which you want to transfer content. You are as ked to enter a code on your device. Enter a code (1-16 digits), and select OK . Enter the same code on the other device, and select OK . The devices are now paired. Some earlier No kia devices may not have the S witch application. In this case, th e Switch application is sent to the other device as a message. To install the Switch application on the other device, open the message, and follow the instructions on the display. 4 On your device, select the content you want to trans fer from the other device. When the transfer has started, you can canc el it and continue later. Content is transferred from the memory of the other device to the corresponding location in your device. The transfer time depends on the amount of data to be transferred. Synchronise, retrieve, or send conte nt Select Menu > Sett ings > Connectivity > Dat a transfer > Ph one switch . After the first transfer, s elect from the following to start a new transfer, depending on the model: to synchronise content between your device a nd the other device, if the other device supports synchronisation. The sync hronisation is two-way. If an item is deleted in one device, it is deleted in both. You cannot restore deleted items with synchronisation. to retrieve content from the oth er device to your device. With retriev al, content is tra nsferred from the other device to your device. You may be asked to keep or delete the original content in the other device, depending on the device model. to send content from your device to your other device 24 Get started
If you cannot send an item, depending on the type of the other device, you can add the item to the Nokia folder, to C:\Nokia or E:\Nokia in your devi ce. When you selec t the folder to transfer, the item s are synchronised in the corresponding folder in the other device, and vice versa. Use shortcuts to repeat a transfer After a data transfer, you can save a shortcut with the transfer settings to the ma in view to repeat the same transfer later. To edit the shortcut, select Options > Shortcut settings . For example, you can cr eate or change the name of the shortcut. A transfer log is shown af ter every transfer. To view the log of the last transfer, select a shortcut in th e main view and Options > View log . Handle transfer conflicts If an item to be transferred has been edited in both devices, the device attemp ts to merg e the changes automatically. If this is not possible, there is a transfer conflict. Select Check one by one , Pr iority t o this phone , or Priority to other phone to solve the conflict. Profiles Select Menu > S ettings and Profiles . You can use pr ofiles to se t and customise the ringing tones, message a lert tones, and oth er tones for different events, environments, or calle r groups. The name of the selected profile is displayed at the top of the home screen. To change a profile, scroll to the profile, and select Options > Activate . To personalise a profile, scroll to the profile, and select Options > Personalise . Select the sett ing you wa nt to change. To set the profile to be active until a certa in time within the next 24 hou rs, scroll to the profile, s elect Options > Timed , and set t he time. When the time expires, the profile changes back to the previo usly acti ve non- timed profile. When the profile is timed, is displayed in the home screen. The Offline profile cannot b e timed. To create a new profile, select Options > Cr eate new . 25 Get started
Your device Home screen About the h ome screen In the hom e screen, you can quickly access your m ost frequently used appl ications, control applications, such as the music player, view your favourite contacts, and view at a glance if you have missed calls or new messages. Interactive h ome screen elem ents To open the clock application, tap the clock (1). To open calendar or change profiles in the home screen, tap the date or the profile name (2) . To view or change connectivity settings ( ), to see the av a il a bl e w ir e le ss L A Ns i f W L A N s c an ni n g is e na b le d , o r to view the missed events, tap the top right corner (3). To make a phone call, select (4). To open the main menu, press the menu key (5). To hide and show content, swipe the home screen with your finger. Add item s to the hom e screen To add an item to the home screen, select Options > Edit content > Options > Add content , and select the item from the list. Using widgets may involve th e transmission of large amounts of data (network service). To move an item, select Options > Ed it content , select the desired item, and drag and drop it to a new location. Remove an it em from the home screen Select Options > Edit content and the item to be remov ed. Select Options > Remove > Done . E-mail notifications About e-mail notifications E-mail notifications in the home screen help you keep track o f e - m a i l m e s s a g e s i n y o u r mailbox. You can set the device to show a preview of e-mail headers or just the number of unread e-mail. 26 Your device
Work with e-ma il in the home scr een To add e-mail to the home screen, in the home screen, select Options > Edit content > Option s > Add content > E-mail widget . To set up your e-mail accoun t, in the home screen, select Set up e-mai l , and follow the instructions. When the setup is complete, the e-mai l icon appears in the home screen. To open your e-mail mailbox, tap the icon. Music player in the home screen You can use the music player from the home s creen. To activate the music player con trols, select Opti ons > Edit content > Op tions > Add content > Music player . Go to Music appears in the home screen. To open the music player, tap Go to Music , and select the items you want to listen to. The music player control keys, an d, if available, the title of the song, a rtist, and albu m art are dis played when a so ng is played. Favourite contacts in t he home scre en You can add sev eral contacts di rectly to the home screen, and quickly make calls or send messages t o the contacts, view the contacts' web feeds, or access the contact information and settings. 1 To add your favourite con t acts to the ho me screen, select Optio ns > Edit conte nt > Options > Add content > Favourit e contacts . A row of icons is displayed in the home screen. 2 Select any of the icons ( ) and a contact from Contacts. Add your favourite Share online feed to your home screen By adding the Share online widget to your home screen, you can quickly access your favourite Share online feed. 1 In the home screen, select Options > Edit content > Options > Add content > Share onli ne . 2 Select the feed you want to add. You may need to register to a service of your service provider before you are able to add a feed. The widget displays thumbn ail images from a selec ted feed of any of your Share online accounts. The latest images are displayed fi rst. Display indicators The device is being used in a GSM network (network service). The device is being used in a UMTS network (network service). You have one or more unread messages in the Inbox folder in Messaging. You have received new e-mail in the remote mailbox. There are messages waiting to be sent in the Outbox folder. 27 Your device
You have missed calls. The ringing type is set to Silent, and the m essage and e-mail alert tones are turned off. A timed profil e is active. The touch screen and keys are locked. A clock alarm is active. The second phone line is being used (network service). All calls to the device are diverted to another number (network service) . If you have two phone lines, a number indicates the active line. Your device is connected to a network via wireless LAN or UMTS (network se rvice) and ready for an internet call. A compatible headset is connected to the device. A compatible TV out cable is connected to the device. A compatible text phone is connected to t he device. A data call is active (network service). A GPRS packet data connec tion is active (network service). indicates that the connection is on hold and that a connection is av ailable. A packet data connection is active in a part of t he network that supports EG PRS (network service). indicates that the conn ection is on hold and that a connection is avai lable. The icons indicate that EGPRS is available in th e network, but your device is not necessarily using an EGPRS connection to transfer data . A UMTS packet data connection is active ( network service). indicates that the connection is suspended and that a connection is being established. High-speed downlink packet access (HSDPA) is supported and active (network service). indicates that the connecti on is suspended and that a connection is bei ng established. You have set the device to scan for wi reless LA Ns, and a wireless LAN is available (network service). A wireless LAN connection is active in a network that uses encryption. A wireless LAN connection is active in a network that does not use encryption. Bluetooth connectivity is a ctivated. Data is bein g transm itted using Bluetooth connectivity. When the indicator is blinking, your device is trying to conne ct with another device. A USB connection is active. Synchronisation is in progress. GPS is active. Shortcuts To switch between open applications, press and hold the menu key. Leaving applications running in the background increases the demand on battery power and reduces the battery life. To open the browser applicat ion, in the dialler, tap and hold 0 . To change the profile, press the po wer key, and select a profile. 28 Your device
To call your voice mailbox (net work service), in the dialler, tap and hold 1 . To open a list of last dialle d numbers, in the home screen, press the call key. To use voice commands, in the home screen, press and hold the call key. When writing, to change the writing language, p ress and the sym key. Search About Search Select Menu > Applications > Search . Search enables yo u to use va rious internet-based search services to find, for example, websites, and images . The content and availability of the services may vary. Start a search Select Menu > Applications > Search . To search the contents of yo ur mobile device, enter search terms in the search field, or browse the content categories. While you enter the search term s, the results are organised into categories. The most rece ntly accessed results appear at the top of the re sult list, if th ey match your se arch terms. To search for web pages on the intern et, select Search the Internet and a searc h provider, and enter your s earch terms in the se arch field. Th e search provider you selected is set as your default in ternet search provider. If a default search provider is already set, select it to start a search, or select More search services to use anot her search provider. To change the default sea rch provider, select Options > Settings > Search services . To change the country or re gion setting to find more search providers, select Options > Sett ings > Country or region . Search settings Select Menu > Applications > Search . To change the Search a pplication settings, select Options > Settin gs and from the following: Country or region â Select the country or region you want to search from . Connection â Select the access p oint, and allow or deny network connections. Search services â Select whether service providers and search categories are shown. General â Enable or disable tooltips, and clear the search history. Volume and loudspeaker control To adjust the volume level wh en you have an active call or are listening to a sound clip, use the volume key. 29 Your device
The built-in loudspeaker allo ws you to speak and listen from a short dis tance without having to hold the device to your ear. To use the loudspeaker during a call, select Act ivate loudsp . . To turn off the loudspeaker, select Activate handset . Offline prof ile To activate the offline profil e, press the po wer key briefly, and select Offlin e . The offline profile lets yo u use the device without connecting to the wireless cellular network. When you activate the offline profile, the connection to the cellular network is turned off, as indicated by in the signal strength indicator area. All radio frequency (RF) sign als to and from the device to t he cellular network are prevented. If you try to send messages using th e cellular network, they are placed in the Outbox folder to be sent later. When the offline profile is ac tive, you can use your device without a SIM card. If the SIM card is not pr operly in place, the device starts in the offline profile. Important: In the Offline profile you cannot make or receive any calls, or use other features that require cellular network coverage. Calls may still be possible to the official emergency number programmed into your device. To make calls, you must first activate the p hone function by changing profiles. If the device has been locked, enter the lock code. When you have activated the o ffline profile, you can still use the wireless LAN, for exam ple, to read your e-mail or browse on the internet. Yo u can also use Bluetooth connectivity while in the offline profile. Remember to comply with any applicable safety requirements when establishing and using a wi reless LAN or Bluetooth connections. To switch to another profile, press the power key briefly, and select anot her profile. Th e devi ce re-enables wireless transmissions (prov iding there is sufficient signal strength). Fast downlo ading High-speed downlink packet access (HSDPA, also called 3.5G, indicated by ) is a network service in UMTS networks and provides high-speed data downloads. When HSDPA support in the device is activated an d the device is connected to a UMTS network that supports HSDPA, downloading data such as mess ages, e-mail, and browser pages through the cellular network may be faster. An active HSDPA connection is in dicated by . 30 Your device
You can activate or deactivate support for HSDPA in pa cket data setti ngs. For availability and subscription to data connection services, contact your service provider. HSDPA only affects the download sp eed; sending data to the network, s uch as messages and e-mail, is not affected. Ovi (network service) Open Ovi with your Nokia N97 mini Ovi is your door to different Nokia services. For a tour and more information, see www.ovi.com. Ovi store About Ovi S tore In Ovi Store, you can down load mobile games, applications, videos, images, and ringing tones to your device. Some of the items are free of charge; other s you need to purchase us ing your credit card or through your phone bill. Ovi Store offers you content that is compatible with your mobile device and relevant to your tastes and location. The content in Ovi Store is sorted into the following categories: ⢠Recommended ⢠Games ⢠Personalisation ⢠Applicati ons ⢠Audio & video Create a Nokia account When you create a Nokia Account , you can access Ovi and all its services with a s ing le user name and password. 1 Select Create a Nokia account . 2 Enter a user name. 3 Select your country from the list. 4 Enter your date of birth. 5 Enter your e-mail address or phone number. 6 Enter a passw ord, and confirm it. 7 Enter the characters displayed in th e box on the right. 8 Select Submit . Sign in to O vi Store Sign in Select Sign in , and enter your Nokia accou nt user name and passwo rd. Retrieve forgot ten user n ame or password Select Options > Re trieve . Search Ovi Store Items in Ovi Store are organi sed into categori es. You can browse the categ ories, or searc h with a keyword. You can also select the type of items you want to see: free or most popular items, or items recommended for you. 31 Your device
View details of an item Select an item to see detaile d information and other users' reviews. If you have signed in to Ovi Store, you can also write your own reviews. Read more revi ews from oth ers Select More reviews . Write a review Select the link to write a review, enter your review, and assign a rating to from 1 to 3 stars. View information about the publisher Select the publisher profile link. Find related items Select More related . Purchase content 1 Select the item you want to purchase. 2 Select Buy . 3 Enter yo ur Nokia account user na me and password . If you do not have an account, select Create a Nokia account , and enter the required information. 4 Select to pay using your credit card or through your phone bill. If you already have your credit card information stored in your Nokia account, and you want to use another credit card, select Edit payment settings , and enter the required information. To save your credit card information to your Nokia account, select the Save thi s card to my Nokia account check box. 5 Select the e-mail address to which you want to receive a receipt of your purchase. 6 Select Purchase . Share favourites with friends Ovi Store enables you to send a text message containing a link to items in Ovi Store. 1 Select the item you want to share. 2 Select Send to friend . 3 Enter a phone number in the international format. 4 Select Send . Report inappr opriate content Contact Nokia if you find inappropriate content in Ovi Store. 1 Select the item with inappropriate content. 2 Select Report issue . 3 Select the reason from the list, a nd enter additional details, if needed. 4 Select Submit . Edit the Ovi Store settings In the Ovi Store settings, yo u can change your ac count information, grant your friends permission to see your activities in Ovi Store, and change your password and security question. To change the Ovi Store settings, select Options > Settings and from the following: 32 Your device
Ovi sharing â Allow your Ovi contacts to se e your activities in Ovi Store. Account information â Change the details of your Nokia account. Change password â Change your Nokia account passwor d. Change security quest ion â Change the security question with which you can retri eve yo ur user name and password. Installation preferences â Sele ct how you wan t to install content in your device. 33 Your device
Make calls Proximity sensor Your device has a proximity sensor. To prevent accidental selections, the touch screen is disa bled automatic ally during calls when you place the device next to your ear. Do not cover the proximity sensor, for example, with protective film or tape. Voice calls 1 In the home screen, select or Dialler to open the dialler, and enter the ph one number, including the area code. To remove a number, select C . For international calls, select * twice for the character (which replaces the internati onal access code), and enter the country code, area code (omit the leading zero if necessary), and phone number. 2 To make the call, press the call key. 3 To end the call (or to cancel the call attempt ), press the end key. Pressing the end key always ends a call, even if another application is active. 1 To make a call from the contacts list, select Menu > Contacts . 2 Scroll to the desired name. Or, t ap the search field to enter the first lett ers or characters of the name, and scroll to the name. 3 To call the contact, press th e call key. If you hav e saved several numbers for a contact, select the desired number from the list, and press the call key. During a call To mute or unmute the microph one, select or . To put the call on hold or unhold it, select or . To activate the loudspeaker, select . If you have attached a compatible hea dset with Bluetooth connectivity, to route the sound to th e headset, select Options > Act ivate BT handsfree . To switch back to the handset, select . To end the call, select . To switch between the active and th e held call, select . Tip: When you have only one active voice call, to put the call on hold, press the call key. To activate the call, press the call key ag ain. To send DTMF tone strings (for example, a password), select Options > Send DTMF . Enter the DTMF string or search for it in the contacts list. 34 Make calls
To enter a wait character (w) or a pause character (p), press * repeatedly. To send the tone, select OK . You can add DT MF tones to the phone number or DTMF field in contact details. To end an active call and replace it by answerin g the waiting call, select Options > Replace . To end all your calls, select . Many of the options that yo u can use during a voice call are network services. Voice and video mailboxes To call your voice or video mailbox (network services, video mailbox available only in UMTS networks), in the home screen, select to open the dialler, tap and hold 1 , and select Voice mailbox or Video mailbox . 1 To change the phone num ber of your voice or video mailbox, select Menu > Settings and Calling > Call mailbox , a mailbox, and Options > Change number . 2 Enter the number (obtained from your networ k service provider), and select OK . Answer or reject a call To answer a call, press the ca ll key. If you do not want to answer a call, to reject the call, press the end key. If the call divert feature (network service) is activated, reject ing an incoming call also diverts the call. To mute the ring ing tone of an incoming call, select Silence . To send a reject call text message without actually rejecting the call, informin g the caller that you cannot answer the call, select Silence and Send msg. , edit the message text, a nd press the call key. To activate the reject call text mes sage feature, and to write a standard message, select Menu > Settings and Calling > Call > Reject call with message , and Message text . Make a conference call Your device supports conference calls between a maximum of six particip ants, including yourself. 1 Make a call to the first pa rticipant. 2 To make a call to another participan t, select Options > New call . The first call is put on hold. 3 When the new call is answered, to join the first participant in the conf erence call, select . To add a new person to the call, make a call to another participant, and add the new call to the conference call. To have a private conversat ion with one of the participants, select . 35 Make calls
Go to the participant, and select . The conference call is put on hold on your device. The other participants can still cont inue the conference call. To return to the conference call, select . To drop a participant, select , go to the partici pant, and select . 4 To end the active conference c all, press the end key. Speed dial a phone number To activate speed dialling, select Menu > Settings and Calling > Call > Speed dialling . To assign a phone number to one of the number keys: 1 Select Menu > Settings and Calling > Speed dialling . 2 Go to the key to which you want to assign the phone number, and select Options > Assign . 1 and 2 are reserved for the voice and video mailboxes if the network suppor ts these functions. To call in the home screen wh en speed dialling is active, select to open the dialler, and select and hold the assigned key num ber. Call wait ing You can answer a call when you h ave another call in progress. To activate call waiting (network service), select Menu > Settings and Calling > Call > Call waiting . 1 To answer the waiting call, press the call key. The first call is put on hold. 2 To switch between the two calls, select Options > Swap . 3 To connect a call on hold wi th an active call, and to disconnect yourself from the calls, select Option s > Transfer . 4 To end the active call, press th e end key. 5 To end both calls, select Options > End all calls . Voice dialling Your device automatically creates a voice tag for th e contacts. To listen to th e synthesised voice tag, select a contact and Opt ions > Voice tag details . Scroll to a contact detail, an d select Options > Play voice tag . Make a call with a voice tag Note: Using voice tags m ay be difficult in a noisy environment or during an em ergency, so you should not rely solely upon voice dialling in all circumstances. When you use voice dialling, the loudspeaker is in use. Hold the device at a short distance away when you say the voice tag. 1 To start voice dialling, in the home screen, press and hold the call key. If a co mpatible headset with the headset key is attached, p ress and hold the headset key to start voice dialling. 2 A short tone so unds, and Speak now is displayed. Say clearly the name th at is saved for th e contact. 36 Make calls
3 The device plays a syn thesised voice tag for the recognised contact in the selected device language, and displays the name an d number. To cancel the voice dialling, select Quit . If several numbers are sa ved for a name, you can say a lso the name and the number type, such as mobile or telephone. Make a video call When you make a video call (network service), you can see a real-time, two-way video between you and the recipient of the call. The live video im age, or video image captured by the camera in your device is shown to the video call recipient. T o b e a b l e t o m a k e a v i d e o c a l l , y o u m u s t h a v e a U S I M c a r d and be in the coverage of a UMTS network. For availability, pricing and subscription to video call services, contact your network service provider. A video call can only be made between two parties. The video call can be made to a compatible mobile device or an ISDN client. Video calls ca nnot be made while another voice, video, or data call is active. Icons You are not receiving video (the recipient is not sending video or the network is not transmitting it). You have denied vi deo se n ding from your device. To send a still image inste ad, select Menu > Settings and Callin g > Call > Image in vide o call . Even if you denied video sending during a video call, the call is still char ged as a video call. Check the pricing with your service provider. 1 In the home screen, select to open the dialler, a nd enter the phone number. 2 Select Options > Call > Video call . The secondary camera on the front is used by default for video calls. Starting a video call may take a while. If the call is not successful (f or example, video calls are not supported by the network, or the receiving device is not compatible), you are asked if you want to try a normal call or send a message instead. The video call is active when you see two video images, and hear t he soun d through the loudspeaker. The call recipient may deny video sending (indicated by ), and you only h ear th e voice of the caller and may see a still image or a grey screen. 3 To end the video call, press the end key. During a video call To change between showing video or hearing the voice of the caller only, select or . To mute or unmute the microphone, select or . To activate the loudspeaker, select . If you have attached a compatible hea dset with Bluetooth connectivity, to route the sound to the headset, select Options > Activate BT han dsfree . 37 Make calls
To switch back to the handset, select . To use the camera in the back of your device to send video, select Options > U se secondary camera . To switch back to the camera in the front of your device, select Options > U se main camera . To take a snapshot of the video you are s ending, select Options > Send snapshot . Video sending is paused and the snapshot is shown to th e recipient. The snap shot is not saved. To zoom your image in or out, select Options > Zoom . To change the vide o quality, select O ptions > Ad just > Video preference > Normal quality , Clearer detail or Smoother moti on . Answer or reject a video call When a video call arrives, is displayed. 1 To answer the video call, press the call key. 2 To start sending live video image, select Yes . If you do not activate the video sending, you only hear the voice of the caller. A grey sc reen replaces your own video image. To enable the video sending, select Option s > Enable > Sending video . To replace the grey screen with a still image captured by the camera in your device, select Menu > Settings and Calling > Call > Image in v ideo cal l . If you do not want to answer a video call, press the end key. Internet calls About internet calls With the internet call networ k service, you can make and receive calls over the internet . Internet call services may support calls between co mputers, between mobile phones, and between a VoIP dev ice and a traditional telephone. For availability and costs, contact y our internet call service provider. To make or receive an intern et call, you must be in the service area of a wireless LAN ( W L A N ) o r h a v e a p a c k e t d a t a (GPRS) connection in a UMTS network, and be connected to an internet call service. Your device may offer you an installation widget, t o install internet call services. Log into an internet call service When an internet call service has been insta lled, a tab for the service is displayed in the contacts list. To log into a servic e, sel ect Menu > Contacts , the service, and Options > Log in . To add contacts as service contac ts to the friends list manually or from the contacts list , select Options > New contact . 38 Make calls
Make internet calls To call a contact when you are logged into a service, tap the contact in the frie nds list, and select . To make an internet call in the home screen, select , enter the number, and select Options > Call > Internet call . To make an internet call to an internet call address , in the home screen, select and Options > Open keyb oard . Enter the address, and select . Internet communication settin gs Select Menu > S ettings and Connectivity > Admin. settings > Net se ttings . To view and edit the settin gs for a service, select [09] sett. . To remove a service from your service list, select Options > Delete service . Internet c all service se ttings Select Menu > Contacts , open a service tab, and select Options > Settin gs . To set an internet ca ll service as the defau lt service, select Default service . When you pres s the call key to call a number, you r device mak es an internet call using the default service if the service is connected. You can set only one service at a time as the default s ervice. To edit the service destination, select Service connectivity . Video sharing Use video sharing (ne twork service) to send live video or a video clip from your mobile device to another compatible mobile device during a voice call. The loudspeaker is active when you activate video sha ring. If you do not want to use th e loudspeaker for the voice call while you share video, you can also u se a compatible headset. Warning: Continuous exposure to high v olume may damage your hearing. Listen to music a t a moderate level, and do not hold the device near you r ea r when the loudspeaker is in use. Video shar ing requirements Video sharing requires a UMTS connection. Your ability to use video sharing depends on the availability of the UMTS network. For more information on the service, UMTS network availability, an d fees associated with using thi s service, contact your service provider. To use video sharing , ensure the following: ⢠Your device is set up for person-to-person connections. 39 Make calls
⢠You have an active UMTS connecti on and are within UMTS network coverage. If you move outside the UMTS network during a video sh aring session, the sharing stops while your voice call continues. ⢠Both the sender and recipient are registered to the UMTS network. If you invite someone to a sharing session and the recipientâÂÂs device is not within UMTS network coverage or does not have vi deo sharing installed or person-to-pers on connections set up, the recipient does not receive invitations. You receive an error message that indi cates that the recipient cannot accept the invitation. Settings To set up video sharing, yo u need person-to-person and UMTS connection s ettings. Person-t o-person c onnection setting s A person-to-person connection is also known as a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) connection. The SIP profile settings must be configured in your device before you can use video sharing. Ask your service provider for the SIP profile settings, and save them to your device. Your service provider may send you the settings or give you a list of the needed parameters. To add a SIP address to a con tact: 1 Select Menu > Contacts . 2 Open the contact or create a new contact. 3 Select Options > Edit . 4 Select Options > Add detail > Share video . 5 Enter the SIP address in the format username@domainname (you can us e an IP address instead of a domain name). If you do not know the SIP address for the contact, you can use the phone number of the recipient, including the country code, to share video (if supp orted by the network service provider). UMTS conne ction sett ings To set up your UMTS connection: ⢠Contact your service provider to e stablish an agreement for you to use the UMTS network. ⢠Ensure that the UMTS acce ss point connection settings for your device are configured properly. For more information about the setting s, contact your service provider. Share live vid eo or video clips During an active voice call, select Options > Share video . 1 To share live video during the call, select Live video . To share a video clip, select Video clip . A list of video clips saved in the device memory, the ma ss memory, or a memory card (if availa ble) opens. Select the clip you want to share. You may need to convert the video clip into a suitable f o r m a t t o b e a b l e t o s h a r e i t . I f y o u r d e v i c e n o t i f i e s y o u that the vid eo clip must be co nverted, select OK . Your device must have a video editor for the conversion to work. 2 If the recipient has severa l SIP addresses or phone numbers including the country code saved in Cont acts, 40 Make calls
select the desired address or number. If the SIP address or phone number of the recipient is not available, enter the address or number of the rec ipient including the country code, and select OK to send the invitation. Your device send s the invitation to the SIP address. Sharing begins automatically when the recipient accepts the invitation. Options during video sharing to mute or unm ute the micropho ne to switch the loudspeaker on an d off to pause and resume video sharing to switch to full screen mode (available for recei ver on ly) 3 To end the sha ring session, select Stop . T o end the voice call, press the end ke y. When you end the call, video sharing also ends. To save the live video you sh ared, select Yes when prompted. The device notifies you of the location of the saved video. If you access ot her applicat ions while you are sharing a video clip, the sharing is paused. To return to the vi deo sharing v iew and to con tinue sharing, in the home screen, select Options > Resume video sharing . Accept an invitation When someone sends you a vi deo sharing invitati on, the invitation message displays th e senderâÂÂs name or SIP address. If someone sends you a sharin g invitation and you are not within 3G network covera ge, you will not know th at you received an invitation. When you receive an invitation , select from the following: Yes â Accept the invitation, and a ctivate the sharing session. No â Reject the invitation. The sender receives a message that you rejected the invitation . You can also pr ess the end key to reject the invitation and end the voice call. To end the sharing session, se lect Stop . To end the voice call, press the end key. Wh en you end the call, video sharing als o ends. Log The log stores information about the communication history of the device. The device registers missed a nd received calls only if the ne twork supports these functions, the device is switched on, an d within the network service area. Recent calls You can view information about your recent calls. Select Menu > Applications > Log and Recent calls . View missed , received, and diall ed calls Select Missed calls , Received calls , or Dialled nu mbers . Tip: To open the dialled numbers list in the home screen, press the call key. Select Options and from the following: 41 Make calls
Save to Co ntacts â Save a phone number from a recent calls list to your contacts. Clear list â Clear the selected recent calls list. Delete â Clear an event in the selected list. Settings â Select Log duration and the length of ti me that the communication informat ion is saved in the log. If you select No log , no information is saved in the log. Call duration Select Menu > Applica tions > Log . To view the approximate duration of your last call, dialled and received calls, select Call duration . Note: The actual invoice for ca lls and services from your service provider may vary, depending on network features, rounding off for billing, taxes, and so forth. Packet dat a Select Menu > Applica tions > Log . To check the amount of data sent or received during packet data connections, select Packet data > All sent data or All received dat a . To clear both sent and received information, select Options > Clear counters . You need the lock code to clear the information. Monitor all communication events Select Menu > Applica tions > Log . To open the general log where you can monitor all voice calls, text messages, or data and wireles s LAN connections registered by the device, select the general log tab . Subevents, such as a text me ssage sent in mo re than on e part and packet data connections, are logged as one communication event. Connections to your mailbox, multimedia messa ging centre, or web pa ges are shown a s packet data connections. To view how much data was tra nsferred and how long a certain packet data connection lasted, scroll to an incoming or outgoing event indicated by GPRS , and select Options > View . To copy a ph one number fro m the log to the clipboard, and paste it into a text message, for example, select Options > U se number > C opy . To filter the log, select Options > Filter and a filter. To set the log duration, select Options > Settings > Log duration . If you select No log , all the log contents, recent calls register, and messaging delivery reports are permanently deleted. 42 Make calls
Contacts (pho nebook) To open Contacts, s elect Menu > Contacts . You can save and u pdate contact information, such as phone numbers, home addresses, or e-mail addresses of your contacts. You can add a personal ringi ng tone or a thumbnail image to a contact. You can a lso create contact groups, which allow you to s end text messages or e-m ail to many recipi ents at the sam e time. Save and edit names and nu mbers Select Menu > Contacts . Add a new contact to the cont acts list 1 Select . 2 Select a field to enter information. To close the text input, select . Fill in the appropriate fields, and select Done . Edit contacts Select a contact an d Options > Edit . Contacts toolbar On the contacts list toolbar, select from the following: Call â Call the desired contact. Create message â Send a message to the desired contact. New contact â Create a new contact. Manage names and numbers To copy or delete a contact, or to send a contact a s a business card to another dev ice, tap and hold a contact, and select Add to favourites , Edit , or Send business card . To delete several contacts at the same time, select Options > Mark/Unmark to mark the desired contacts, and to delete, select Options > De lete . To listen to the voice tag assi gned to a contact, s elect the contact and Opti ons > Voice tag details > Options > Play voice tag . Before using voice tags, note the following: ⢠Voice tags are not lang ua ge-dependent. They are dependent on the speaker's voice. ⢠You must sa y the name exactly as you said it when you recorded it. ⢠Voice tags are sensitive to background noise. Record voice tags and use them in a quiet environment. ⢠Very short names are not accepted. Use long names, and avoid similar names for different numbers. Note: Using voice tags may be difficult in a noisy environment or during an em ergency, so you shou ld not rely solely upon voice dia lling in all circumstances. Default numbers and addresses You can assign de fault numbers or addre sses to a contact. If a contact has several n umbers or addresses, you can easily call or send a message to a certain number or address. The default number is also used in voice dialling. 43 Contacts (phonebook)
1 In the contacts list, select a contact. 2 Select Options > Defaults . 3 Select a default to which you want to add a number or an address, and select Assign . 4 Select a number or an address you want t o set as a default. 5 To exit the Defaults view and sav e the changes, ta p outside the view. Contact cards Select Menu > Contacts and a contact. All available communica tion methods for the selecte d contact are displayed in the contact cards view. Select a contact from the list, the desired communication method, Optio ns , and from the following: Edit â Edit, add, or delete the contact card fields. Defaults â Define the num bers and addresses to use by default when you communicate with the contact, if a contact has more than one number or address defined. Voice tag details â View the voice ta g details, or listen to the voice tag for the contact. The available options and communication methods may vary. Set contacts as favourit es Select Menu > Contacts . Favourites are the contacts you have set as your favourite contacts. These contacts appe ar at the top of the contacts list. To set a contact as a favourite, select a contact and Options > Add to favourites . Favourites are marked with a star icon. To remove a contact from favourites, select a contact a nd Options > Remove from favourites . The removed contact is moved back to th e standard conta cts list. Ringing tones , images, and call text for contacts You can define a ringing tone for a conta ct or group, and an image and a call text for a contact. When the contact calls you, the device plays th e selected ringing tone and shows the call text or image (if the callerâÂÂs phone number is sent with the call and yo ur device recognises it). To define a ringing tone for a contac t or a contact group, select the contact or contact group and Options > Edit > Ringing tone , and a ringing tone. To add more fields to a cont act details view, select the contact and Opt ions > Edit > Options > Add detail . To define a call text for a contact, select t he contact and Options > Edit > Options > Add detail > Call alert text . Tap the text field to en ter the call text, and select . To add an image for a cont act saved in the device memor y, select the contact, Options > Edit > Add image , and an image from Photos. To remove the ringing tone, select Default tone from the list of ringing tones. 44 Contacts (phonebook)
To view, change or remove the imag e from a contact, select the contact, Options > Edit > Image > Options , and the desired option. Copy contacts When you open the contacts list for the firs t time, the device asks if you want to copy na mes and numb ers from the SIM card to your device. To start copying, select OK . If you do not want to copy the contacts from the SIM card to your device, select Cancel . The device asks if you want to view the SIM card contacts in the contacts directory. To view the contacts, select OK . The contacts list opens, and the names stored on your SIM card are indicated with . SIM services For availability and inform ation on using SIM card services, contact your SIM card v endor . This may be the service provider or other vendor. SIM contacts To set the names and numbers stored on the SIM card to be shown on the contacts list, select Option s > Settings > C ontacts to display > SIM memory . Y ou can add and edit SIM contacts, or call th em. The numbers you save in th e contacts list may not be automatically sav ed to your SIM card. To save numbers to the SIM ca rd, sele ct a contac t and Opt ions > Copy > SI M memory . To select whether the new contacts you enter are saved to your device or your SIM card, select Optio ns > Settings > Default saving memo ry > Phone me mory or SIM memory . Fixed dialling Select Menu > Contacts and Options > SIM numbers > Fixed dial contacts . With the fixed dialling servic e, you can restrict calls from your device to certain phone numbers. N ot all SIM cards support the fixed dialling service. For more information, contact your service provider. When security features that re strict calls ar e in use (such as call barring, closed user gr oup, and fixed dialling), calls may be possible to the official emergency number programmed into your device. Call barring and call diverting cann ot be active at the same time. You need your PIN2 code to activate and deactivate fixed dialling or edit your fixed dialling con tacts. Contact your service provider for your PIN2 code. Select Options and from the following: Activate fixed dialling â Activate the fixed dialing. Deactivate fixe d dialling â Deactivate the fixed dialing . New SIM contact â Enter the contact name and p hone number to which calls are allowed. Add from Contacts â Cop y a contact from the list of contacts to the fixed diallin g list. 45 Contacts (phonebook)
To send text messages to th e SIM contacts while the fixed dialling service is active, you need to add th e text message centre number to the fixed dialling list. Contact group s To open the group list, open the contacts list, and tap . Create contact groups 1 To create a new group, in the group list, select Options > Ne w group . Use the default name or enter a new name. Selec t OK . 2 To add members to the group, select the group and Options > Add members . 3 Mark each contact you want to add, and se lect OK . Manage contact groups To send a message to all group members, to set a ringing tone for a group, or to rename or delete a group, tap and hold the group, and select Cr eate message , Ringing tone , Rename , or Delete . To add a contact to a group, select the group and Options > Add members . To check which other groups a cont act belongs to, select the group, scroll to the contact, an d select Options > Belongs to grou ps . To remove a contact from a group, select the group, scroll to the contact, and select Opti ons > Remove from group . 46 Contacts (phonebook)
Ovi Contacts About Ovi C ontacts With Ovi Contacts, you can st ay connected to the people who matter most. Search for cont acts, and discover friends in the Ovi community. Keep in touch with your friends - chat, share your location an d presence, and easily follow what your friends are up to and where they a re. You can even chat with friends who use Google Talkâ¢. You can also sync your contacts, calenda r, and other content between your Nokia device and Ovi.com. Your important information is stored and kept up-to-dat e both in your device and on the web. With Ovi Cont acts, you can make your contacts list dynamic a nd be confident that your contacts are stored on Ovi.com. You must have a Nokia Accoun t to use the service. Create an account on your mobile device, or vis it www.ovi.com on your PC. Using Ovi Contacts may involv e the transmission of large amounts of data through your service provider's network. Contact your network service provider for information about data transm ission charges. Start using Ovi Contacts Select Contacts , and open the Ovi tab. The Ovi Contacts service is pa rt of Ovi, and uses the same account information. If you are new to Ovi and its serv ices, to start us ing the Ovi Contacts application, you must register to Ovi by creating a Nokia account. Create a Nokia account 1 Select Ovi Chat , and when prompted, connect to the internet. 2 Enter the required information. 3 In the My profile view, ente r your profile information. Your first and las t name are mandatory details. 4 Select Done . If you have already registered to Ovi using your PC or mobile device, yo u can start using Ovi Cont acts wit h the same account details. Sign in to Ovi Contacts and act ivate the service Select Ovi Chat , and enter your user name and pas sword. If you have not yet provided your profile information for Ovi Contacts, do so, and select Done . Your first and last name are manda tory deta ils. Connect to the service Connect to Ovi Contacts Select Go online and the connecti on method. Use a wireless LAN (WLA N) conne ction where available. Cancel the connection Select Options > Cancel connecting . A packet data connection ma y generate additi onal data transmission charges. For pricing details, contact your network service provider. Select Go online > Option s and from the following: 47 Ovi Contacts
Select â Select the item. Go onli ne â Connect to the service if you are offline. My profile â Edit your profile information. Recommend to friend â Invite a contact to join Ov i Contacts. T he invita tion is sent as a text mess age. Settings â Modify the Ovi Contacts settings. The available options may vary. Create and edit your p rofile Edit your profil e information Select My profile . View the profiles of you r Ovi Contacts frie nds Select a friend and Options > Profile . Your profile information is visible to your Ovi Contacts friends. Only the following pr ofile details are displayed to other Ovi Contacts users, for example during a search: first name and last nam e. To change your privac y settings, access Ovi on your PC, and sign in t o your Nokia account. Change your pr ofile image Select the profile image, Select existi ng image , and the new image. You can also edit or remove the current profile image or capture a new one. Change your availability By default, yo ur avai lability is set to Available . To change your availability, select the icon. Tell your friends what yo u are doin g at the moment Select What are you doing? , and enter text in the field. Show your friends what music you are currently listeni ng to Select Now playing . To do this, you must allow your now playing information to be shar ed in the presence settings. Edit your contact information Select a field, and enter text. In the My profile view, select Options and from the following: Edit text â Cut, copy, or pa ste text. Change â Change your stat us (when the statu s field is selected). Activate â Start broadcasting your location or your now playing information to your friends (when either field is selected). Undo changes â Undo the changes you made in th e profile view. Edit shared locations â Select the landmarks you want to broadcast to your friends (when the My location fi eld is selected). Stop sharing â Stop broadcasting your locati on to your friends (when the My loca tion field is selected). The available options may vary. Find and add friends Select Options > In vite frien d . 48 Ovi Contacts
Search for a friend Enter the name of the friend in the Search friends field, and select the search icon. You ca nnot search for fri ends based on their mobile number or e-mail address. Browse the search re sults Select Next results or Previous results . Start a new search Select New search . If the friends you s earched for could not be fou nd, they are not registered Ovi members, or they have chosen to be invisible in searches. When prompted, send a text message to your frie nds to invite them to join Ovi Contacts. Send an invita tion to join Ovi Cont acts Select Select service: and the service you know your friend uses. Enter your friendâÂÂs user name, and select the send icon. Select Options and from the following: Select â Select an item. Open â Open an item. Invite as friend â Send an invitation to the con tact. Show profile â View the profile of the contact. Renew invitati on â Resend an invitation to join Ovi Contacts to a pending friend. Search â Search for the contact whose name or other related keyword you entered in the Search friends field. Edit tex t â Cut, copy, or paste text. The available options may vary. Chat with your friends Start a chat with a friend Select the friend. Send a chat message Enter the text in the message field, an d select the send icon. In the chat view, select Options and from the following: Send â Send the message . Add smiley â Insert a smiley. Send my locat ion â Send your loc ation details to your chat partner (if supported by both devices). Profile â View the details of a friend. My profile â Select your presence status or profile image, personalise your message, or change your deta ils. Edit text â Copy or paste text. End chat â End the activ e chat. Exit â End all active chats, and close the ap plication. The available options may vary. To receive location information from your friend, you must have the Maps application. To send and receive location information, both the Maps and Positioning applications are needed. View the lo cation of your friend Select Show on map . 49 Ovi Contacts
Return to the Ovi Contacts main view wi thout ending the chat Select Back . Add, call, or copy phone numbers from a chat Go to a pho ne number in a chat, an d select Options and the appropriate option. Ovi Sync To sync your device with Ovi, you must have a Nokia account and activate the Ovi Cont acts service on your devic e. Sync your device with Ovi 1 If you sync your device with Ovi for the first time, use the Sync wizard to select what content you wan t to sync, and the sync interval. 2 Select Synchronise . If your device is in the Offline profile, connect to the internet when prompted. Select Optio ns and from the following: Start â Sync your device wi th Ovi. Cancel â Cancel an ongoing sync. Synchron isation se ttings â Modify your sync settings. The available options may vary. Share your location Open the Contacts application and the Ovi tab. To share your location, select Options > Settings > Presence > Share my location and from the following: Sharing allowed â Allow your friends to see your location. My shared landmarks â Select the landmarks from where your location is broadcast to your friends. Refresh interval â Select how often yo u broadcas t your current l ocation. Add and select landmarks: To add a location to the landmarks list, select Share my locat ion > My shared landmarks > Options > New landma rk . To add your current location as a landmark, select Current positio n . To browse for a location on a map, select Select from map . To add a landmark manually, select Enter m anually . To select the location s you want to share with your friends, select Share my location > My shared landmarks , and select the landmarks fr om the list. Select Options to edit, mark, and unmark it ems on the list. Whenever you are online with the Contacts on Ovi service, and in one of the selected lo cations, your friends can see your location. Ovi Contacts settings Select Options > Settings . Select from the following: 50 Ovi Contacts
Account â Access your account details, and define your visibility to others in a search. Presence â Show infor mation about your location to your friends, and allow them to see when you are making a phone call (call status). Personalisation â Modify the settings related to the startup and tones of the Ovi Con tacts application , and automatically accept friend invitations. Connection â Select the network connection t o use, and activate roaming wa rnings. Using a packet data conn ection may involve the transmission of large amounts of data through your service provider's network. For information about data transmission charges, cont act your network service provider. Exit â End all a ctive chats, and clos e the application. Nokia account settings Select Options > Settings > Account . Edit yo ur acc ount deta ils Select My account . Define your visibi lity in searches Select My account > Visibility in search . Y ou must be online to change your visibility. Presence settings Select Options > Settings > Presence . Modify pres ence settings Select from the following: Share my lo cation â Allow your friends to see your location. Share now playing â Allow your friends to see what music you are currently listening to on your mobile device. Share call status â Allow your fr iends to see your call status. Share your location Select Share my location and from the following: Sharing allowed â Allow your friends to see your location in selected landmarks. My shared landmarks â Select the landmarks from where your location is broadcast to your friends. Refresh interval â Select how often you broadcast your current location. Add a location to the landmarks li st Select Share my location > My shared landmarks > Options > New landmark . Add your current location as a landmark Select Current posit ion . Browse for a location on a map Select Select from map . Add a landmark manually Select Enter manually . 51 Ovi Contacts
Select locations you w ant to share with your frien ds 1 Select Share my location > My shared land marks . 2 Select the landmarks from the list. 3 Select Options to edit, mark, and unmark items on the list. Depending on your settings, your friends can see your location when you ar e in one of the selected locations. Personalisation settings Select Optio ns > Settings > Personalisation . Select from the following: Login on s tart-u p â Sign in au tomatically to Ovi Contacts when you switch on your mobile device. Auto-accept friend invit. â Accept friend requests automatically without noti fication. Auto-accept voice msgs. â Allow voice message to be accepted automatically. Message tone â Select a tone for new messages. Friend online tone â Select the tone that sounds when a friend comes online. Icon on Home screen â Add the Ovi Contacts shortcut icon to your device home screen. Connecti on settings Select Optio ns > Settings > Connection . Modify connection settin gs Select Network connection and the desired connection. To use the default connection defined in your device connection settings, select Default connection . Set the device to not ify you when you r home network is not available To receive a warning when your device is trying to connect to another network, select Roaming warning > On . 52 Ovi Contacts
Messag ing Messaging main view Select Menu > Messaging (network service). To create a new message, select New message . Tip: To avoid rewri ting messages that y ou send often, use texts in the Templates folder in My folders. You can also create and save your own temp lates. Messaging contains the following folders: Inbox â Received messages, except e-mail and cell broadcast messages, are stored here. My folders â Organise you r messages into folders. Mailbox â Connect to your remote ma ilbox to retrieve your new e-mail messages, or view your previously retrieved e-mail messages offline. Drafts â Draft messages that have not been sent are stored here. Sent â The last messages tha t have been sent, excluding me ssages sent using Bluetooth connectivity , are stored here. You can change the number of mess ages to save in this folder. Outbox â Messages waiting to be sent are temporarily stored in the outbox, for example, when your device is outside network coverage. Delivery reports â You can request the network to send you a delivery report of the text messages and multimedia messages you have sent (network service). Write and send messages Select Menu > Messaging . Important: Exercise caution wh en opening messages. Messages may contain ma liciou s software or otherwise be harmful to your device or PC. Before you can create a multimedia message or write a mail, you must have t he co rrect connection settings defined. The wireless network may limit the size of MMS messages. If the inserted picture exceed s this limit, the device may make it smaller so that it can be sent by MMS. Only devices that have comp atible features can receive and display multimed ia messages. The appearance of a message may vary dependin g on the receiving device. Check the size limit of mail messages wi th your service provider. If you at tempt to send a mai l message that exceeds the size limit of the mail server, the message is left in the Outbox folder, and the device attempts to res end it periodically. Sending a mail requires a data connection, and continuous attempts to rese nd the mail may incur charges from your service provider. In the Outbox folder, you can delete such a messag e or move it to the Dra fts folder. Messaging requires network services. Send a text or multimedia m essage Select New message . 53 Messaging
Send an audio or mail message Select Optio ns > Create message , and the relevant option. Select recipi ents or groups from the contac ts list Select from the toolbar. Enter the number or mail address manually Tap the To field. Enter the subj ect of the ma il or multimed ia message Enter it in the Subject field, . If the Subject field is not visible, select Opti ons > Message header fields to change the fields that are visible. Write the me ssage Tap the message field. Add an object to a message or mail Select and the relevant type of content. The message t ype may change to multimedia mes sage based on the inserted content. Send the message or mail Select , or press the call key. Your device supports text messages beyond the lim it for a single message . Longer messag es are sent as two or more messages. Your service provider may charge accordingly. Characters with accents, ot her marks, or some language options take more spa ce, and limit the number of characters that can be se nt in a single me ssage. Messaging inbox Receive mess ages Select Menu > Messa ging and Inbo x . In the Inbox folder, indicates an unread text message, an unread multimedia message, an unread audio message, and data received through Bluet ooth connectivity. When you receive a message, and 1 new mess age are displayed in the home screen. To open the message, select Show . To open a message in the Inbox folder, select the message. To reply to a re ceived message, select Options > Reply . Multimedia messages Important: Exercise caution when opening messages. Messages may contain malicious software or otherwise be harmful to your device or PC. You may receive a notification t hat a multimedia message is waiting in the multimedia message centre. To start a packet data connection to retrieve th e message to your device, select Options > Retrieve . When you open a multimedia message ( ), you may see an image and a mes sage. is shown if sound is included, or if video is included. To play the sound or the video, select the indicator. To see the media objects that have been included in the multimedia message, select Options > Obje cts . 54 Messaging
If the message includes a multimedia presentation, is displayed. To play the presen tation, select the indicator. Data, settings, and web servic e messages Your device can receive ma ny kinds of messages that contain data, such as business card s, ringing tone s, operator logos, calendar entr ies, and e-mail notifications. You may also receive settings from your service provider in a configuration message. To save the data from the message, select Options and the corresponding option. Web service messages are notifications (for example, news headlines) and may contain a text message or a link. For availability and subscrip tion, contact your service provider. Mailbox Define e-mail settings Select Menu > Messaging and Mailbox . To use e-mail, you must have defined a va lid internet access point (IAP) in the devi ce and have defined your e- mail settings correctly. You must have a separat e e-mail account. Follow the instructions given by your remote mailbox and internet service provider (ISP). If you select Messagi ng > Mailbox and have not set u p your e-mail a ccount, you are pr ompted to do so. To start creating the e-mail settings with the mailbox guide, select Start . When you create a new mailbox, the name you give to the mailbox replaces Mailbox in the Messaging ma in view. You can have up to six mai lboxes. Open the mailbox Select Menu > Messaging and a mailbox. When you open the mailbox, the device asks if you want to connect to the mailbox. To connect to your mailbox and retrieve new e-mail headers or message s, select Yes . When you view m essages online, you are continuously connected t o a remote mailbox using a data connection. To view previously retrieve d e-mail messages offline, select No . To create a new e-mail m essage, select Option s > Create message > E-mail . When you are online, to end the data connection to the remote mailbox, select Opti ons > Disconnect Retrieve e-mail messages Select Menu > Messaging and a mailbox. If you are offline, select Options > Connect to open a connection to the remote mailbox . 55 Messaging
Importa nt: Exercise caution when opening messages. Messages may contain ma liciou s software or otherwise be harmful to your device or PC. 1 When you have an open connection to a remote mailbox, select Op tions > Retrieve e-mail > New to retrieve all new messages, Selected to retrieve only selected messages, or All to retrieve all messages from the mailbox. To stop retrieving messages, select Cancel . 2 To close the connection an d view the e-mail messages offline, select Options > Disconnect . 3 To open an e-mail message, select the message. If t he e-mail message has not b een retrieved and you are offline, you are asked if you want to retrieve this message from the ma ilbox. To view e-mail attachments, open the message, and select the attachment field indicated by . If the attachment has not been retrieved to the device, select Opt ions > Retrieve . To retrieve e-mail mess ages automatically, select Options > E-mai l settings > Automatic ret rieval . Setting the device to retrieve e-ma il automatically may involve the transmission of large amounts of data through your service provider's network. Contact your service provider for information abou t data transmission charges. Delete e- mail mes sages Select Menu > Messaging and a mailbox. To delete the contents of an e-mail message from the device while still retaining it in the remote mailbox, select Options > Delete > Ph one only . The device mirrors the e-ma il headers in the remote mailbox. Although you delete the message content, the e- mail header stays in your de vice. If you want t o remove the header as well, you must be connected to the server when deleting the message from your device and the remote mailbox. It there is no connection to the server, the header is deleted when you make a connection from your device to the remote mailbox again to update the status. To delete an e-mail from the device and the remote mailbox, select Optio ns > Delete > Pho ne and server . To cancel deleting an e-mail that has been marked to be deleted from the device an d server during the next connection ( ), select Options > Restore . Disconnect from the mailbo x When you are online, to end the data connection to the remote ma ilbox, sel ect Options > Disconne ct . View messages on a SIM card Select Menu > Messa ging and Options > SIM messages . Before you can view SIM messages, you must copy them to a folder in your device. 56 Messaging
1 Select Options > Mark/Unmark > Mark or Mark all to mark messages. 2 Select Options > Copy . A list of folders opens. 3 To start copying, select a folder. To view the messages, open the folder. Cell broadcast messages Select Menu > Messaging and Options > Operator messages . Cell broadcast (network servic e) allows you to receive messages on variou s topics, such as weath er or traffic conditions, from your service provider. For available topics and relevant topic numbers, contact your service provider. This service may not be available for all regions. Cell broadcast messages ca nnot be received in 3G networks. A packet data co nnection may prevent cell broadcast reception. Service commands Select Menu > Messaging and Options > Service commands . With service commands (n etwo rk service) you can enter and send service reques ts (also kno wn as USSD commands), such as activation commands for ne twork services, to your service provider. This service may not be available for all regions. Messaging settings The settings may be preconfigured in your device, or you may receive them in a me ssage. To enter settings manually, fill in all fields marked with Must be defined or an asterisk. Some or all message centres or access points ma y be preset for your device by your service provider, and you may not be able to change, create, edit, or remove them. Text mes sage settin gs Select Menu > Messaging and Options > Settings > Text message . Select from the following: Message centres â View a list of all text message centres that have been defined. Message centre in use â Select which mes sage centre to use to deliv er text messages. Characte r encoding â To use character conversion to another encoding system when available, select Reduced support . Receive repo rt â Select whether the network sends delivery reports on your messages (ne twork service). Message validity â Select how long the message centre resends your message if the first a ttempt fails (network service). If the message cannot be sent within the validity period, the message is delete d from the message centre. Message sent as â To learn if your message centre is able to convert text messages into these other formats, contact your service provider. Preferred connection â Select the connection to use. Reply via same ce ntre â Select whether you want th e reply message to be sent us ing the same text message centre number (network service). 57 Messaging
Multimedia message set tings Select Menu > Messaging and Option s > Settin gs > Multimedia message . Select from the following: Image s ize â Define the size of the image in a multimedia message. MMS creation mode â If you select Guid ed , the device informs you if you try to send a message that may not be supported by the recipient. If you select Restricted , the device prevents you from sending messages that may not be supported. To include content in your messages without notifications, select Fr ee . Access point in use â Selec t which access point is used as the preferred connection. Multimedia retrieval â Select h ow you want to receive messages, if available. To receive messag es automatically in your home networ k, select Auto in home netw. . Outside your home network, you receive a notification that there is a message to retrieve in the multimedia message centre. If y ou select Always automatic , your device automatically makes an a ctive packet data connection to retrieve the message both in a nd outside your home network. Select Manual to retrieve multimedia messages from the message centre man ually, or Off to prevent receipt of any multimedia mess ages. Automatic retrieval ma y not be su pported in all regions. Allow anony mous msgs . â Reject messages from anonymous senders. Receive adverts â Receive multimedia message advertisements (network service). Receive reports â Display the status of sen t messages in the log (network service). Deny report sending â Prevent your device from sending delivery reports of received messages. Message validity â Select for how long the message centre resends your message if the first attempt fails (network service). If the me ssage cann ot be sent within this time period, the messa ge is deleted from the message centre . The device requires network support to indicat e that a sent message has been received or read. Depending on the network and other circumstances, this information may not always be reliable. E-mail settings Manage mailboxes Select Menu > Messa ging and Options > Settings > E- mail . To select which mailbox you want to use to send and receive e-mail, select Mailbox in use and a mailbox. To remove a mailbox and its messages from your device, select Mailboxes , tap the m ailb ox to b e remo ved if it is not already highli ghted, and select Opti ons > Delete . To create a new mailbox, select Mailboxes > O ptions > New mailbox . The name you gi ve to the new mailbox replaces Mailbox in the Mess aging main view. You ca n have up to six mailboxes. Select Mailboxes and a mailbox to change the con nection settings, user settings, retriev al settings, and au tomatic retrieval settings. 58 Messaging
Connection settings Select Menu > Messaging and Options > Settings > E- mail > Mailboxes , a mailbox, and Conne ction settings . To edit the settings for the e-mail you receive, select Incomi ng e-ma il , and from the following: User name â Enter your user na me given to you by your service provider. Password â Enter your password. If you leave this field blank, you are prompted for the password when you try to connect to y our remote mai lbox. Incoming mail server â Enter the IP address or host name of the mail server that receives your e-mail. Access point in use â Select an internet access point (IAP). Mailbox name â Enter a name for the mailbox. Mailbox type â Defines the e-mail protocol that your remote mailbox service provider recommends. The options are POP3 and IMAP4. This setting cannot be changed. Security â Select the security op tion used to secure the connection to the remote mailbox. Port â Define a port for the connection. APOP secure login (for POP3 only) â Use with the POP 3 protocol to encrypt the sending of passwords to the remote e-mail s erver while connecting to the mailbox. To edit the settings for the e-mail you send, select Outgoing e-m ail and from the fo llowing: My e-mail address â Enter the e-mail address given to you by your service provider. Outgoing mail server â Enter the IP address or host name of the mail server that sends your e-mail. You may only be able to use the outg oing server of your service provider. For more information, contact your service provider. The settings for use r name, passw ord, access point, security, and port are simila r to the ones in incoming e- mail. User settings Select Menu > Messaging and Options > Settings > E- mail > Mailboxes , a mailbox, and User se ttings . Select from the following: My name â Enter your own name. Your name replaces your e-mail address in the recipientâ s device if the recipientâÂÂs device supports this function. Send message â Define how e-mail is sent from your device. Select Immediately for the device to connect to the mailbox when you select Send message . If you select Duri ng next conn. , e-mail is sent when the connection to the remote mailbox is available. Send copy to self â Select whether you want to send a copy of the e-mail to your own mailbox. Include signature â Select whether yo u want to attac h a signatur e to your e-ma ils. New e-mail al erts â S e l e c t w h e t h e r y o u w a n t t o r e c e i v e the new e-mail indications (a tone, a note, and a mail indicator) when new e-mail is received. E-mail deletion â Select whether you want to delete e- mails from phone only, from phone and server, or to be asked each t ime se paratel y. 59 Messaging
Reply-to ad dress â Define an e-mail address to which replies to e-mails sent from the mailbox in question are deli vered . Retrieval settings Select Menu > Messaging and Option s > Settin gs > E- mail > Mailboxes , a m ailbox, and Retrieval se ttings . Select from the following: E-mail retrieval â Define which parts of the e-mail are retri eved : Headers only , Size limit (POP3), or Msgs. & attachments (POP3). Retrieval amount â Define how m any new e-m ail messages are retrieved to the mailbox. IMAP4 folder p ath (for IMAP4 only) â Define the folder path for folders to be subscribed. Folder subscri ptions (for IMAP4 only ) â Subscribe to other folders in the remo te mailbox, and retrieve content from those folders. Automatic retrieval settings Select Menu > Messaging and Option s > Settin gs > E- mail > Mailboxes , a m ailbox, and Automati c retrieval . Select from the following: E-mail notifications â To automatically retrieve the headers to your device when you receive new e-mail in your remote mailbox, select Auto-update or Only in home net w. E-mail retrieval â To automatically retrieve the headers of new e-mail from your remote mailbox at defined times, select Enabled or Only in home netw. Define when and how often the e-mails are retrieved. E-mail notifications and E-mail retrieval cannot be active at the same time. Setting the device to retrieve e-ma il automatically may involve the transmission of large amounts of data through your service provider's network. Contact your service provider for information abou t data transmission charges. Web service me ssage settings Select Menu > Messa ging and Options > Settings > Service mess age . Select whether you want to rece ive service messages. To set the device to automatically activat e the browser and start a network connection to ret rieve content when you receive a service message, select Do wnloa d messages > Automatically . Cell broadcast se ttings Select Menu > Messa ging and Options > Settings > Operator message . Check the available topics and related topic numbers with your service provider. Select from the following: Reception â Select whether you want to receive cell broadcast messages. Language â Select the languages in wh ich you want to receive messa ges: All , Selected , or Other . Topic detection â Select whether the device automatically searches for n ew topic numbers, an d saves the new numbers without a name t o the topic list. 60 Messaging
Other settings Select Menu > Messaging and Options > Settings > Other . Select from the following: Save sent messages â Select whether you want to save copies of the text, multimed ia, or e-mail messages that you send to the Sent folder. Number of saved msgs. â Define how many sent messages are saved to the sent folder at a time. When the limit is reached, the oldest message is deleted. Memory in use â Select the memory where you want to save your mess ages. Show messages in gro ups â Defin e whether you want to group the messages in I nbox, Sent, Drafts and My folders. Show e-mails in groups â Define whether you wa nt to group your e -mail messages. Mail for Exchange With Mail for Exchange, you can receive your work e-mail to your device. You can read and reply to your e-mails, view and edit compatible atta chments, view calendar information, receive and re ply to meeting requests, schedule meetings, and view , add, and edit contact information. ActiveSync Use of the Mail for Exchange is limited to over-the-air synchronisation of PIM info rmation between the Nokia device and the authorised Microsoft Exchange server. Mail for Exchange ca n be set up only if your company has Microsoft Exchange Server. In addition, your company's IT administrator must have acti vated Mail for Exchange for your account . Before startin g to set up M ail for Exchange , ensure that you have the following: ⢠A corporate e-mail ID ⢠Your office network user name ⢠Your office network password ⢠Your network domain name (contact your company's IT department) ⢠Your Ma il for Ex change s erver na me (cont act your company's IT department) Depending on your company's Mail for Exchange server configuration, you may n eed to enter other information in addition to those listed. If you do n ot know the correct information, contact your company 's IT department. With Mail for Exchange, the use of the lock code may be mandatory. The default lock code of your device is 12345, but your company's IT admin istrator may have se t a different one for you to use. You can access and modify the Mail for Exchange profile and settings in th e Messaging sett ings. 61 Messaging
Connectivity Your device offers several options to connect to the internet or to another compat ible device or PC. For more information on other connectivity methods, see the extended user guide on the product suppor t pages of the Nokia website. Data connections and access points Your device supports packet data connections (network service), such as GP RS in the GSM network. When you use your device in GSM and UM TS networks, multiple data connections can be active at the same time, an d access points can share a data conn ection. In the UMTS network, data connections remain active during voice calls. You can also use a WLAN data connection. Only one connection in one wireless LAN can be active at a time, but several applications can use the s ame internet access point. To establish a data connect ion, an access point is required. You can define different kinds of access points, such as the following: ⢠MMS access point to send and receive multimedia messages ⢠Internet access point (I AP) to send and receive e-mail and connect to the internet Check the type of access poin t you need with your service provider for the service you want to access. For availability and subscription to packet data connection services, contact your service provider. Network sett ings Select Menu > Settings and Conne ctivity > Network . Your device can automatically switch between GSM and UMTS networks. GSM networks are indicated with . UMTS networks are indicated with . An active high-speed down link packet access (HSDPA) connection (network serv ice) is indicated with . Select from the following: Network mo de â Select which network to use. If you select Dual mode , the device uses the GSM or UM TS network automatically, according to the network parameters and the roaming a greements between the wireless service providers. Fo r details and roaming costs, contact your network service provider. This option is shown only if supported by th e wireless service provider. A roaming agreement is an agreement between two or more service providers to enable the users of one s ervice provider to use the services of other service providers. Operato r selecti on â Select Autom atic to set the device to search for and select one of the available networks, or Manual to manually select the network from a list. If the connection to the ma nually selected ne twork is lost, the device sounds an error tone and asks you to reselect a network. The selected network mu st have a roaming agreement with your home network. Cell info display â Set the device to indic ate when it is used in a cellular network ba sed on microcellular network (MCN) technology and to ac tivate cell info reception. 62 Connectivity
Wireless LAN Your device can detect and connect to wireless local area networks (WLAN). Using a W LAN, you can con nect your device to the int ernet and compat ible devices that ha ve WLAN suppo rt. About WLA N To use a wireless LAN (WLA N) connection, it must be available in the location, and your device must be connected to the WLAN. Some WLANs are protected, and you need an access key from the service provider to connect to them. Note: In France, you are only allowed to use WLAN indoors. Features that use WLAN, or that are allowed to run in th e background while using other features, increase the demand on battery power an d reduce the battery life. Important: Always enable one of the available encryption methods to increase the security of your wireless LAN connection. Using encrypt ion reduces the risk of unauthorised access to your data. WLAN connections To use a wireless LAN (WLAN) connection, you must create an internet access point (IAP) for WLA N. Use the access point for applications that need to connect to the internet. A WLAN conne ction is established when you create a data connection using a W LAN internet ac cess point. Th e active WLAN connection ends when you end the data connection. You can use WLAN during a v oice call or when packet data is active. You ca n only be connect ed to one WLAN access point device at a time, but several applications can use th e same internet access point. When the device is in the offline profile, you can still use WLAN (if available). Remember to comply with any applicable safety requiremen ts when establishing and using a WLAN connection. Tip: To check the unique media access control (M AC) address that identifies your device, open the dialler and enter *#62209526# . WLAN wizard Select Menu > Settings and Connectivity > Wireless LAN . The WLAN wizard helps you to connect to a wireless LAN (WLAN) and manage your WLAN connections . If the search finds WLANs, to create an internet access point (IAP) for a connection and start the web browser using this IAP, select the connection and Start w eb browsing . If you select a secured W LAN, you are asked to en ter the relevant password. To connect to a hidden network, you must enter the correct network name (service set identifier, SSID). If you already h ave the web browser running using the currently active WLAN connection, to return to the web browser, select Continue web browsing . 63 Connectivity
To end the active connection , select the connection an d Disconnect WLAN . WLAN internet ac cess points Select Menu > Settings and Connec tivity > Wirele ss LAN > Options . Select from the following: Filter WLAN networks â Filter out wireless LANs (WLANs) from the list of found networks. The selected networks are not displayed the next ti me the application searches for WLAN s. Details â View the details of a network shown in the list. If you select an active con nection, the connection details are displayed. Operating mo des There are two operating mode s in WLAN: infrastructure and ad hoc. The infrastructure operati ng mode allows two kinds of communica tion: wirel ess devices are conne cted to e ach other through a WLAN access point device, or wireless devices are connected to a wired LAN through a W LAN access point device. In the ad hoc operating mode, d evices can send and receive data directly with each other. Wireless LA N settin gs Select Menu > Settings and Connec tivity > Wirele ss LAN > Options > Sett ings . Select from the following: Show WLAN availability â Select whether is displayed when a wireless LAN (WLAN) is available. Tip: To access the WLAN Wizard a pplication and view the available options, select the WLAN icon, and in the pop-up window, select the highlighted text next to the WLAN icon. Scan for networ ks â If you set Show WLA N availability to Yes , you can select how o ften the device searches for available WLANs and upda tes the indicator. Internet co nnectivi ty test â Select whet her you want the device to tes t the intern et capability of the selected WLAN automatically, to a sk for permission every time, or to never perform the connectivity test. If you select Run automatically or allow the test to be performed when the device asks for it, and the co nnectivity test is performed successfully, the access point is saved to the internet destinations. To view advanced settings, select Options > Advanced settings . Changing the adv anced settings for the WL AN is not recommended. Access points Create a new access point Select Menu > Settings and Conne ctivity > Destinations . You may receive access point settings in a m essage from a service provider. Some or all access points may be preset for your device by your service provider, and you may not be able to change, create, edit, or remove them. 64 Connectivity
When you open one of the access point groups ( , , , ), you can see the acce ss point types: indicates a protected access point indicates a packet data access point indicates a wireless LAN (WLAN) access point Tip: You can create internet access points in a WLAN with the WLAN wiza rd. To create a new acc ess point, select Access point . The device asks to check for available connecti ons. After the search, connection s that are already available are shown and can be shared by a new access point. If you skip this step, you are asked to select a connection method and to define the settings needed. To edit the settings of an access point, open one of the access point groups, and select an access point. Follow the instructions from your service provider. Connection name â Enter a name for the connection. Data bearer â Select the data connection type. Depending on the data connect ion you select, only certain setting fields are available. Fill in all fields marked with Must be defined or with a red *. Other fields can be left empty, unless your service provider has instructed otherwise. To use a data connection, your service provider must support this feature, and if neces sary, activate it for your SIM card. Create access point groups Select Menu > Settings and Connectivity > Destinations . Some applications allow you to use access point groups for network connections. To avoid selecting a single a ccess point every time the device makes a network connection, you can create a group that conta ins various access poin ts to connect to that network and define the order in which the access points are used. For example, you can add wireless LAN (WLAN) a nd packet data access points to an intern et access point group, an d use the group for browsing the web. If you give WL AN the highest priority, the device connects to the internet through WLAN, if ava ilable, and through a packet data connection if not. To create a new acce ss point gr oup, sele ct Options > Manage > New destination . To add access points to an access point group, select the group and Optio ns > New access point . To copy an existing access point from another group, select the group, tap the releva nt access point if i t is not already highlighted, and select Op tions > Organise > Copy to other dest. . To change the priority of an access point within the group, select Options > Organise > Change priority . 65 Connectivity
Packet data access points Select Menu > Settings and Connec tivity > Destinations > Access point , and follow the instructions on the screen. To edit a packet data access point, open one of the access point groups, and select an access point marked with . Follow the instructions from your service provider. Select from the following: Access point name â You obtain th e access point name from your service provider. User nam e â The user name may be needed to make a data connectio n, and is usually provided by your service provider. Prompt passwo rd â If you must enter the password every time you log in to a server, or if you do not want to save your password in the device, se lect Yes . Password â A password may be needed to make a data connection and is usually provided by your service provider. Authenticati on â Select Secure to always send your password encrypted or Normal to send your password encrypted when possible. Homepage â Depending on th e access point you are setting up, enter the web address or the a ddress of the multimedia message centre. Use access point â Select Afte r confirmation if you want the device to ask for confirmat ion before the connection using this acce ss point is created, or Automatically if you want the device to connect to the destination using this access point automatically . Select Options > Advanced settings and from the following: Network type â Select the internet protocol type to transfer data to and from your device. The other settings depend on the selected network type. Phone IP addres s (for IPv4 only) â Enter the IP address of you r dev ice. DNS addresses â Enter the IP addresses of the primary and secondary DNS servers, if required by your service provider. To obtain these addresses, contact your internet service provider. Proxy server addres s â Enter the address of the proxy server. Proxy port nu mber â Enter the port numb er of the proxy server. WLAN interne t access poin ts Select Menu > Settings and Conne ctivity > Destinations > Access point , and follow the instructions. To edit a wireless LAN (WLA N) access point, open one of the access point groups, and select an access point marked with . Follow the instructions from your WLAN service provider. Select from the following: WLAN network name â Select Ent er manually or Search for networks . If you select an existing network, 66 Connectivity
WLAN network mode and WLAN security mode are determined by the settings of its access point device. Network status â Define whether the network na me is displayed. WLAN network mo de â Select Ad-hoc to create an ad hoc network and to allow devi ces to se nd and receive data directly; a WLAN access point device is not needed. In an ad hoc network, all devices must use t he same WLAN network name. WLAN security mode â Select the encryption used: not available for ad hoc netw orks). If you select Open network , no encryption is used. The WEP, 802.1x and WPA functions can be used only if the network supports th em. Homepage â Enter the web address of the starti ng page. Use access point â Set the device to creat e a connection using this access point automatically or after confirmation. The available options may vary. Active da ta conne ctions Select Menu > Settin gs and Connectivity > Connection mgr. . In the active data connections view, you can see the open data connect ions: data calls packet data connections wireless LAN (WLAN) connections Note: The actual invoice for ca lls and services from your service provider may vary , depending on network features, rounding off for bi lling, taxes, and so forth. To end a connection, select Optio ns > Disconne ct . To end all open co nnections, select Options > Disconn ect all . To view the details of a connection, se lect Options > Details . Synchronisation Select Menu > Settings and Connectivity > Data transfer > Sync . The Synchronisat ion application enables you to synchronise your notes, calendar entries, text and multimedia messages, browser bookmarks, or contacts with various compatible applications on a compatible computer or on the internet. You may receive synchronisati on settings in a special message from your service provider. A synchronisation profile contains the necessary settings for synchronisation. When you open the application , the default or previously used synchronisation profile is displayed. To modify the profile, tap a synchronisation item to include it in the profile or to leave it out. To manage sync hronisat ion profiles, select Options 67 Connectivity WEP , 802.1x , or WPA/WPA2 (802.1x and WPA/WPA2 are
and the desired option. To synchronise data, select Opti ons > Synchronise . To cancel synchronisation before it finishes, select Cancel . Bluetooth connectivity About Bluetooth conne ctivity With Bluetooth connect ivity , you can make a wireless connection to other compatib le devices, such as mobile phones, computers, headsets, and car kits. You can use the connection to send images, video clip s, music and sound clips, an d notes, transfer files from your compatible PC, and print images with a compatible printer. Since devices with B luetooth wireless technolog y communicate usin g radio waves, they do not n eed to be in direct line-of-sight. Howe ver, they mus t be within 10 metres (33 feet) of each ot her, although the connection may be subject to interference from obstructions such as walls or from other electronic devices. This device is compliant with Bluetooth Specification 2.0 EDR supporting the follo wing profiles: Dial-Up Net wo r kin g ( DU N) , O bje ct Pu sh Profile (OPP), File Transfer Profile (FTP), Hands Free Profile (HFP), Headset Profile (HSP), Basic Ima ging Profile (BIP), Remote SIM Acc ess Profile (SimAP), Device Id entification Profile (DI), Phonebook Access Profile (PBAP), Generic Audio/Video Distribution Profile (GAVDP), Audio/Video Remote Control Profile (AVRCP), Advanced Audio Distribution Profile (A2DP). To ensure interopera bility between other devices supporting Bluetooth technology, use Nokia approved accessories for this model. Check with the manufacturers of other devices to determine their compatibility with this devic e. Features using Bluetooth technology increa se the demand on battery power and reduce the battery life. When the device is locked, on ly connections to aut horised devices are possible. Settings Select Menu > Settings and Conne ctivity > Bluetooth . When you open the application for the first time, you are asked to define a name for your device. You can chan ge the name later. Select from the following: Blueto oth â Turn Bluetooth connectivity on or off. My phone's visibility â T o a l l o w y o u r d e v i c e t o b e f o u n d by other devices with Blue tooth wireless technology, select Shown to all . To set a time period a fter which the visibility is set from shown to hidden, select Set visibility period . To hide your device from other devices, select Hidden . My phone's name â Edit the name shown to other devices with Bluetooth wireless technology. Remote SIM mo de â Enable or disable another device, such as a compatible car kit acces sory, to use the SIM card in your device to connect to the network. 68 Connectivity
Security tips Select Menu > S ettings and Connectivity > Blu etooth . When you are not using Bluetooth conn ectivity, to cont rol who can find your device and connect to it, select Bluetooth > Off or My phone's visibili ty > Hidden . Deactivating Bluet ooth connectivity doe s not affect other functions of the device. Do not pair with or accept connection requests from an unknown device. This helps to protect your device from harmful content. Send data using Bluetooth connectivity Several Bluetooth connecti ons ca n be active at a time. For example, if you are connected to a compatible headset, you can also transfer files to another compatible device at the same time. 1 Open the application where the item you want to send is stored. 2 Tap an item, and s elect Options > Send > Via Bluetooth . Devices with Bluetooth wireless technology that a re within range are displayed. Device icons are as follows: compute r phone audio or video device other de vice To interrupt the search, select Stop . 3 Select the device with which you wa nt to connect. 4 If the other device requires pairing before data can be transmitted, a tone sounds, and you are asked to enter a passcode. The same passcode must be entered in both devices. When the connection is established, Sending dat a is displayed. Tip: When searching for devices, some de vices may show only the unique address (dev ice address). T o find the unique address of your device, enter *#2820# . Pair devices Select Menu > Settings and Connectivity > Bluetooth . To pair with compatible dev ices and view your paired devices, open the Paired de vices tab. Before pairing , crea te you r own p asscod e (1 to 16 dig its), and agree with the owner of the other device to use the same code. Devices th at do not have a user i nterface have a factory-set passcode . The pa sscode is used only once. 1T o p a i r w i t h a d e v i c e , s e l e c t Optio ns > New paired device . Devices that are within range are displayed. 2 Select the device, and en ter the passc ode. The same passcode must be entered on the other device, as well. 3 Some audio accessories connect automatica lly to your device after pairing. Othe rwise, to connect to an accessory, select Opt ions > Connect to audio device . Paired devices are indicated by in the device search. 69 Connectivity
To set a device as authorised or unauthorised, select from the following: Set as authorised â Connections between your device and the authorised device can be made without your knowledge. You will not be asked for authorisation or acceptance separately. Use this s tatus only for your own devices, such as your compatible headset or PC, or devices that belong to someone you trust. indicates authorised devices in the paired devices view. Set as unauthorised â Connection requests from this device must be accepted separately every time. To cancel a pairing with a device, select Options > Delete . To cancel all pairings, select Options > Delete all . Receive data using Bluetooth connectivity When you receive data through Bluetooth conn ectivity, a tone sounds, and you are asked if you w ant to accept the message . If you accep t, is displayed, and the item is placed in the Inbox folder in Messag ing. Messa ges rece ived through Bluetooth connectivity a re indicated by . Block dev ices Select Menu > Settings and Connec tivity > Bluetooth . To block a device from establishing a Bluetooth connection to your device, open the Paired devic es tab. Tap a device you want t o bl ock, if it is not already highlighted, and select Options > Bl ock . To unblock a device, open the Blocked devices tab, tap a device, if it is not already highlighted, and select Options > Delete . To unblock all blocked devices, select Options > Delet e all . If you reject a pairing reques t from another device, you are asked if you want t o block a ll future connec tion requests from this device. If you accept the query, the remote device is added to the list of blocked devices. Remote SIM mo de Select Menu > Settings and Conne ctivity > Bluetooth . Before the remote SIM mode can be activated, the two devices must be paire d and th e pairing initiated from the other device. When pairing, use a 16-digit passcode, and set the other device as authorised. To use the remote SIM mode with a compatible car kit accessory, activate Bluetooth connectivity , and enable the use of the remote SIM mode with your device. Activate the remote SIM mo de from the other device. When the remote SIM mode is on in your device, Remote SIM mode is displayed in the home screen. The connection to the wireless network is turned off, as indicated by in the signal strength indicator area , and you cannot u se SIM card services or features requiring cellular network covera ge. 70 Connectivity
When the wireless device is in the remote SIM mode, you can only use a compat ible con nected a ccessory, such as a car kit, to make or receive calls. Your wireless device will not make any calls while in this mode, except to the emergency numbers programmed into your device. To make calls from your device , you must leave the remote SIM mode. If the device is locked, enter the lock code to unlock it. To leave the remote SIM mode, press the power key, and select Exit remote SIM mode . USB Select Menu > S ettings and Connectivity > US B . To have the device ask the pu rpose of the connection each time a compatible data cable is connected, select Ask o n connection > Yes . If the Ask on connection option is turned off or you want to change the mode during an active connection, select USB connection mode and from the following: PC Suite â Use Nokia PC applications such as Nokia Ovi Suite, and Nokia So ftware Up dater. Mass storage â Transfer data between your device and a compatible PC. Image transfer â Print images w ith a compatible printer . Media transfer â Synchronise music with Nokia Music or Windows Media Player. PC connections You can use your mobile device with a variety of compatible PC connectiv ity and data communica tions applications. With Nokia Ovi Suite you can, for exampl e, transfer files and im ages between your device and a compatible computer. To use Ov i Suite wit h USB connection mode, select PC Suite mode . For more information about Ov i Suite, see the support area at www.ovi.com. Administra tive setti ngs Packet data sett ings Select Menu > Settings and Connectivity > Admin. settings > Packet data . The packet data settings affect all a ccess points using a packet data connection. Select from the following: Packet data connection â If you select When available and you are in a network that sup ports packet data, the device registers to the packet data network. Starting an active packet data connection (for example, to send and receive e-mail) is quicker than if the device 71 Connectivity
establishes a packet data connection when needed. If there is no packet data cove rage, the dev ice peri odica lly tries to establish a packet data connection. If you select When needed , the device uses a packet data connection only if you start an app licat ion or action that needs it. Access point â The access point name is needed to us e your device as a packet data modem to a compatible computer. High speed packet access â Enable or disable the use of HSDPA (network servic e) in UMTS networks. SIP settings Select Menu > Settings and Connec tivity > Admin. settings > SIP settings . Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) settings are needed for certain network services using SIP. You may receive the settings in a spec ial text message from your service provider. You can view, delete, or create these setting profiles in SIP settings. Access point name control Select Menu > Settings and Connec tivity > Admin. settings > APN control . With the access point name cont rol service, you can restrict packet data connect ions and allow your device to use only ce rtain pa cket data acces s points. This s ettin g is on ly ava ilable if your SIM card supports the access point control service. To turn the control service on or off, or to change the allowed access points, select Options and the corresponding option. To ch ange the options, you need your PIN2 code. Contact yo ur service provider for t he code. 72 Connectivity
Internet With the Web browser, you can view hypertext markup language (HTML) we b pages on the internet as originally designed. You can also browse web pages that are designed specifically for mobile devices, and use extensible hypertext ma rkup language (XHTML) , or the wireless markup langua ge (WML). To browse the web, you need to have an internet access point configured in your device. Using the web browser requires network support. Browse the web Select Menu > Web . To browse the web, select Go to web addr ess from the toolbar, and enter a web address. By default, the browser is in full screen mode. To exit full screen mode, select the arrow icon in the bottom right corner. Some web pages may contai n material, such a s graphics or video clips, that requires a large amount of memory to view. If your device runs ou t of memory while loading such a web page, insert a memory card. Otherwise, the video clips are not displayed. To browse web pages with g raphics disabled, to save memory and increase the page loading speed, select Options > Settin gs > Page > Load content > Text only . To refresh the content of the web page, select Options > Web page options > Reload . To save the current web pa ge as a bookmark, select Options > Web page options > Save as bookmark . To view snapsh ots of the web pag es you have visited during the current browsing session, select Ba ck (available if History list is activated in the browser settings and the current web pag e is not the first we b page you visi t). To prevent or allow the automatic opening of multiple windows, select Options > Web page op tions > Block pop-ups or Allow pop-ups . To zoom in on a web page, double-tap the display. Tip: To send the browser to the background without exiting the application or co nnection, press the end key once. Browser toolbar The browser toolbar helps yo u select frequently used functions of the browser. To open the toolbar when br owsing, select the arrow in the bottom right corner. From the toolbar, sele ct from the following: Expand toolbar â Expand the toolbar to access more toolba r function s. Go to web address â Enter a web address. 73 Internet
Show zoom â Zoom in or out on the web page. To use the expanded toolbar, select Expand toolbar and from the following: Go to feeds â View your current feed subscriptions. Send UR L â Send the web addr ess of the current page to another device. Switch win. â Switch between open browser windows. Subsc. feeds â View a list of available web feeds on the current web page, and subscribe to a web feed. Settings â E dit the settings. Save bkmrk. â Save the current web page as a bookmark. Reload â Refresh the web page. Overview â View an overview of the current web page. Homepage â Go to the homepage (if defined i n settings). Bookmarks â Open the bookmarks view. Find keywd. â Search on the current web page. Navigate p ages When you are browsing a web page that contains a large amount of information, you ca n use Page overview to view what kind of information the web page contains. To see an overview of the current web page, open the toolbar, and select > . Web feeds and blogs Select Menu > Web . Web feeds are XML files on web pages that are used to share, for example, the latest news headlines or blogs. It is common to find web feeds on web, blog, and wiki pages . The browser application automa tically detects if a web page contains web feeds. If web feeds are available, to subscrib e to a web feed, select Options > Subscribe to web feeds . To update a web feed, in the Web feeds view, select a feed and Options > Web feed op tions > Refresh . To define whether the web feeds are updated automatically, in the We b feeds view, select Op tions > Edit > Edit . This option is not available if one or more feeds are marked. Content search Select Menu > Web . To search for text within the current web page, select Options > Find keyword . To go to the next match, from the toolbar, select Find next . To go to the previous match, from the toolbar, select Find previous . 74 Internet
Bookmarks Select Menu > Web . Select Options > Go to > Bookmarks . You can select web addresses from a list or from a collection of bookmarks in the Recently visited pages folder. The toolbar helps yo u select frequently used functions of the browser. From the toolbar, sele ct from the following: Add bookmark â Add a new bookmark. Go to web address â Enter a new web address. Delete â Delete a bookmark. To go to a new web p age, select Options > Go to > New web page . To send and add bookmarks, or to set a bookmark as the homepage, select Optio ns > Bookmark options . To edit, move, or delete bookmarks, select Options > Bookmark manager . Empty the cache The information or services you have accessed are stored in the cache memory of the device. A cache is a memory location tha t is used to store data temporarily. If you have tried to access or have accessed confidential information re quiring passwords, empty the cache after each use. To empty the cache, select Options > Clear privacy data > Cache . End the co nnecti on To end the connection and close the browser, select Options > Exit . To delete the information the ne twork server collects about your visits to various web pages, select Option s > Clear privacy data > Cookies . Connection security If the security indica tor ( ) is displayed during a connection, the data transmission between the device and the internet gateway or server is encrypted. The security icon does not indi cate that the da ta transmission between the ga teway and the cont ent server (where the data is stored) is secure. The service provider secures the data transmi ssion between the gateway and the content server. Security certificates may be required for some services, such as banking services. You ar e notified if the identity of the server is not authentic or if you do not have the correct security certificate in your device. For more information, contact your service provider. Important: Even if the use of certificates makes the risks involved in remote connecti ons and software instal lation considerably smaller, they must be used correctly in order to benefit from increased se curity. The existence of a 75 Internet
certificate does not offer an y protection by itself; t he certificate manager must contai n correct, authentic, or trusted certificates for increased se curity to be available. Certificates have a restricted lifetime. If "Expired certificate" or "Certificate not valid yet" is shown, even if the certificate should be valid, check th at the current date and time in your device are correct. Before changing any certific ate settin gs, you mu st make sure that you really trust the owner of t he certificate and that the certificate really belong s to the listed owner. Web setting s Select Menu > Web and Options > Settings and from th e following: General setti ngs Access point â Change the default access point. Some or all access points may be preset for your device by your service provider. You may not be able to change, create, edit, or remove them. Homepage â Define the homepage. History list â If y ou select On , while browsing, to see a list of the pages you have visited during the current session, select Back . Web address suffix â Enter a web address suffix that the device uses by default when you enter a web address in the Go to field (for example, .com or .org). Security warnings â Hide or show security notificati ons. Java/ECMA s cript â Enable or disable the use of scrip ts. Java/ECMA script errors â Select whether you want to receive script notifications. Open whil e download ing â Select whether you want to be able to open a file while it is being downloaded. Page setting s Load co ntent â Select w hether you want to load imag es and other objects while br owsing. If yo u select Text only , to load images or objects later during browsing, select Options > Di splay option s > Load images . Default encoding â If text char acters are not shown correctly, you can select an other encoding according to the language for the current page. Block pop-ups â Allow or block automatic opening of different pop-up s while browsing. Automatic reload â Select whether you want the web pages to be refreshed automatically while browsing. Font size â Define the font size that is used for web pages. Privacy sett ings Recently visited pages â Enable or disable automatic bookmark collectin g. If you want to continue saving th e addresses of the visited web pages into the Recently visited pa ges folder, but hide the folder from the bookmarks view, select Hide folder . Form data saving â Select whether you want t he password data or data you en ter on different forms on a web page to be saved and us ed the next time you open the page. Cookies â Enable or disable the receiving and sending of cookies. 76 Internet
Web feed settings Acc. point for auto-upda te â Select the desired access point for updating. This opt ion is only available when Automatic u pdates is active. Update when roaming â Select whether you want the web feeds to be updated automa tically when roaming. 77 Internet
Positioning (GPS) You can use applications such as GPS data to calcula te your location or measure distance s. These applications require a GPS connection. About GPS The coordinates in the GPS are expressed using the international WGS-84 coordin ate system. The availability of the coordinates may vary by region. The Global Positioning System (GPS) is operated by the government of the United States, which is solely responsible for its accura cy and main tenance. The accuracy of location data can be affected by adjustments to GPS satellites made by the United Sta tes government and is subject to change with th e United States Department of Defense civil GPS policy and the Federal Radionavigation Plan . Accuracy can also be affected by poor satellite geometry. Avai lability and quality of GPS signals may be affected by your location, buildings, natural obstacles, and weather conditi ons. GPS signals may not be available inside buildings or underground and may be impaired by materials such as concrete and metal. GPS should not be used for precise location measurement, and you should never rely solely on location data from the GPS receiver and cellular rad io networks for positioning or navigation. The trip meter has limited ac curacy, and rounding errors may occur. Accuracy can also be affected by availability and quality of GPS signals. Different positioning methods can be enabled or disabled in positioning settings. Assisted GPS (A- GPS) Your device also supports A ssisted GPS (A-GPS ). A-GPS is a network service. Assisted GPS (A-GPS) is used to retrieve assistance data over a packet data connection , which assists in calculating the coordinates of your current location when your device is receiving signals from satellites. When you activate A-GPS, your device receives useful satellite informati on from an assista nce data serv er over the cellular network. With the help of assisted data, your device can obtain the GPS position faster. Your device is preconfigured to use the Nokia A-GPS service, if no service provider-specific A-GPS settings are available. The assist ance data is retrieved from the Nokia A-GPS service server only when needed. You must have an internet access point defined in the device to retrieve assistance data from the Nokia A-GPS service over a packet data co nnection. To define an access point for A-GPS, select Menu > Appli cations > Location and Posi tioning > Positioning se rver > Access point . A wireless LAN (WLAN) access point cannot be used for th is service. Only a packet data internet access point can be used. Your device asks for th e internet access point when GPS is used for the first time. 78 Positioning (GPS)
Hold your device correctly When using the GPS receiver, ensure you do not cover the antenna with your han d. Establishing a GPS connection may take from a couple of seconds to several minutes. Es tablishing a GPS connecti on in a vehicle may take longer. The GPS receiver draws its power from the device battery. Using the GPS receiver may drain the battery faster. Tips on creating a GPS connection Check satellite signal status To check how many satellites you r device has found, and whether your device is receiv ing satellite signals , select Menu > Applications > Locat ion and GPS data > Options > Satellite sta tus . If your device has found satelli tes, a bar for each satellite is shown in the satellite info view. The longer the bar, the stronger the satellite signal. When your device has received enough data from the satellite signal t o calculate your location, the bar colour changes. To view the positions of found satellites, select Chg. view . Initially your device must rece ive signals from at least four satellites to be able to ca lculate your location. When the initial calculation has been made, it may be p ossible to continue calculating your lo cation with three sat ellites. However, the accuracy is generally better when more satellites are found. If n o s at el li te s ig na l ca n b e found, c onsider the following: ⢠If you are indoors, go outdoors to receive a better signal. ⢠If you are outdoors, move to a more open spac e. ⢠Ensure that your hand does not cover the GPS a ntenna of your device. ⢠If the weather conditions ar e bad, the signal strength may be affected. ⢠Some vehicles have tin ted (athermic) windows, whi ch may block the s atellite signals. 79 Positioning (GPS)
Position req uests You may receive a request from a network service to receive your position information. Service providers may offer information about local topics, such as weather or traffic conditions, based on the location of your dev ice. When you receive a position request, the service that is making the request is displayed. Select Accept to allow your position information to be sent or Reje ct to deny the reques t. Landma rks Select Menu > Applica tions > Locatio n and Landma rks . With Landmarks, you can sa ve the position information of specific locations in your de vice. You can sort the saved locations into different catego ries, such as business , and add other information to them, such as addresses. You ca n use your saved lan dmarks in compatible applications, such as GPS data. GPS coordinates are expres sed using the international WGS-84 coordinate system. Select Optio ns and from the following: New landmark â Crea te a new landmark. To make a positioning request for your current location, select Current positio n . To enter the position information manually, select Enter manually . Edit â Edit or add information to a saved landmark (for example, a street address). Add to category â Add a landmark to a category in Landmarks. Select each catego ry to which you want to add the landmark. Send â Send one or several landmarks to a compatible device. Your received landmarks are placed in the Inbox folder in Messaging. You can sort your landmarks into preset categories, and create new categories. T o edit and create new landmark categories, ope n the categories tab, and select Options > Edit categories . GPS data Select Menu > Applica tions > Location and GPS data . GPS data is designed to provide route guidance information to a select ed destination, position information about your curre nt location, and travelling information, such as the approximate distance to the destination and the approxim ate duration of travel. The coordinates in the GPS are expressed using the international WGS-84 coordinate system. To use GPS data, the GPS rece ive r of your device must initially receive position in formation from at least four satellites to calculate your location. When the initial calculation has been made, it may be possible to continue calculating your location wi th three satellites. However, the accuracy is generally bette r when more satellites are found. Route guidance Select Menu > Applicat ions > Location and GPS data > Naviga tion . 80 Positioning (GPS)
Start the route guidance outdoor s. If started indoors, the GPS receiver may not receive the necessary information from the satellites. Route guidance is designed to show the straightest route and the shortest distance to the destination, measured in a straight line. A ny obstacles on the route , such as buildings and natura l obstacles, are ignored. Differences in altitude are not taken into a ccount when calculating the distance. Route guidance is active only when you move. To set your trip destinati on, select Op tions > Set destinati on and a landmark as the destination, or enter the latitude and longitude coordinates. To clear the destination set for your trip, select Stop navigation . Retrieve posi tion information Select Menu > Applic ations > Locat ion and GPS dat a > Position . In the position view, you can view the position information of your current lo cation. An estimate of the accuracy of the location is displayed. To save your current location as a landmark, select Options > Save positi on . Landmarks are saved locations with more information, a nd th ey can be used in other compatible applicati ons and transferred between compatible devices. Trip meter Select Menu > Applic ations > Locat ion and GPS dat a > Trip distance . The trip meter has limited accuracy, and rounding errors may occur. Accuracy can also be affected by availability and quality of GP S signals. To turn trip distance calculation on or off, select Options > Start or Stop . The calculated values remain on the display. Use this featur e outdoors to receive a better GPS signal. To set the trip distance and time and av erage and maximum speeds to zero, and to start a new calculation , select Options > Reset . To set the odometer and total time to zero, select Restart . Position ing set tings Select Menu > Applications > Location and Position ing . Position ing meth ods Select from the following: Integrated GPS â Use the integrated GPS receiver of your device. Assisted GPS â Use Assisted GPS (A-GPS) to receive assistance data from an assistance data server. Bluetooth GPS â Use a compatible external GPS receiver with Bluetooth connecti vity. Network based â Use information from the cellular network (network service). 81 Positioning (GPS)
Positioni ng server To define an access point and positioning server for network-assisted p ositioning met hods, such as a ssisted GPS or network-based positioning, select Position ing server . The positioning server may be preset by your service provider, and you may not be able to edit the setting s. Notation se ttings To select which measu rement system you want to us e for speeds and distances, s elect Measur ement system > Metric or Imperial . To define in which format the coordinate information is displayed in your devi ce, select Coordinate format and the desired format. 82 Positioning (GPS)
Maps Maps overvi ew Select Menu > Maps . Welcome to Maps. Maps show s you wh at is nearby, helps you pl an your rout e, and guides you where you want to go. ⢠Find cities, street s, and services. ⢠Find your way wit h tu rn-by-turn directions. ⢠Synchronise your favour ite locations and routes between your mobile device and the Ovi Maps internet service. ⢠Check weather foreca sts an d other local information, if available. Note: Downloading c ontent su ch as maps, satellite images, voice files, guides or traffic information may involve transmission of larg e amounts of data (network service). Some services may not be available in a ll countries, and may be provided only in sele cted languages. The services may be network dependent. For more information, contact your network service provider. Almost all digital cartography is inaccurate and incomplete to some extent. Never rely solely on the cartography that you download for use in this device. Content such as satellite ima ges, guides, weather and traffic information and relate d services are gener ated by third parties independent of Nokia. The content may be inaccurate and incomp lete to some extent and is subject to availability. Never rely solely on the aforementioned content and related services. About position ing methods Maps displays your location on the map using GPS, A-GPS, or cell ID based positioning. The Global Positioning System (GPS) is a sa tellite-based navigation system used for calculating your location. Assisted GPS (A -GPS) is a network service that sends you GPS data, improving the speed and accuracy of the positioning. When you use Maps for the first time, you are prompted to define an internet a ccess point to download map information or use A-GPS. indicates the ava ilability of the satellite signals. One bar is one satellite. When the device is searching for satellite signals, the bar is yellow. When there is enough data availabl e to calculate your location, the bar turns green . The more green bars, the more reliable the location calculation. The Global Positioning System (GPS) is operated by the government of the United States, which is solely responsible for its accura cy and maintenance. The accuracy of location data can be affected by adjustments to GPS satellites made by th e United States government and is subject to change with the United States Department of Defense civil GPS policy and the Federal Radionavigation Plan. Accuracy can also be affected by poor satellite geometry . Availability and quality of GPS 83 Maps
signals may be affected by your location, buildings, natural obstacles, and weather conditi ons. GPS signals may not be available inside buildings or underground and may be impaired by materials such as concrete and metal. GPS should not be used for precise location measurement, and you should never rely solely on location data from the GPS receiver and cellular rad io networks for positioning or navigation. The trip meter has limited ac curacy, and rounding errors may occur. Accuracy can also be affected by availability and quality of GPS signals. With cell ID based positioning, the position is determined through the antenna tower your mobile device is currently connected to. Depending on the availa ble positioning meth od, the accuracy of positioning may vary from a few metres to several kilometres. Use the c ompass If your device has a compass, when acti vated, both the arrow of the compass and the map rotate automa tically in the direction to which the top of your device is point ing. Select Menu > Maps and My position . Activate the compass Select . Deactivate the compass Select again. The map is oriented north. The compas s is active when ther e is a green outline. If the compass needs calibration, the outline of the compass is red or yello w. To calibrat e the compass , rotate the dev ice around all axes in a continuou s movement. The compass has limited accura cy. Electrom agnetic fields, metal objects, or other exte rnal circumstances may also affect the accuracy of the compass. The compass should always be properly calibrated. View your location and the map See your current location on the map, and br owse maps of different cities and countries. Select Menu > Maps and My position . When the GPS connection is active, marks your current or last known location on the map. If the icon's c olours are faint, no GPS sign al is available. If only cell ID based positioning is available, a red halo around the positioning icon in dicates the general area you might be in. The accuracy of the estimate increases in densely populated areas. Move on the map Drag the map with your finger. By default, the map is oriented north. View your current or last known location Select . 84 Maps
Zoom in or out Select or - . If you browse to an area no t covered by maps that are stored on your device and you have an active data connection, new maps are automatica lly downloaded. Map coverage varies by country and region. Map view 1 Selected location 2 Indicator area 3 Point of interest (for exam ple, a railway station or a museum) 4 Information area Change the look of the map View the map in different mode s, to easily identify where you are. Select Menu > Maps and My position . Select and from the following: Map view â In the standard ma p view, details such as location names or motorway numbers, are easy to read. Satellite v iew â For a detailed view, use satellite images. Terrain view â View at a glance the ground type and altitude, for example, when you are travelling off-road. 3D â For a more realistic view, change the perspective of the map. Landmarks â Display prominent buildings and attractions on the map. Night mode â Dim the colours of the map. When travelling at night, the map is easier to read in this mode. Find a location Maps helps you fin d specif ic locations and types of business you are looking for. Select Menu > Maps and Find places . 1 Enter search te rms, such as a stree t address or postcode. To clear the search field, select . 2 Select . 3 Select an item from the list of proposed matches. The location is displayed on the m ap. To view the other locations of the search result list on the map, 85 Maps
select one of the arrows beside the information area ( ). Return to the list of pro posed matche s Select List . Search for different types of nearby places Select Browse categories and a category, such a s shopping, accommodation, or transport. If no search results are found, ensure the sp elling of your search terms is correct. Pr oblems with your internet connection may als o affect re sults when searc hing online. To avoid data transfer costs , you can also get search results without an active internet conn ection, if you have maps of the searched area stored on your device. To ensure your device does not use the internet connection, in the main menu, select > Internet > Connection > Offline . View location details View more information about a specific location or place, such as a hotel or restaurant, if available. Select Menu > Maps and My position . View the detai ls of a place Select a place, its informat ion area ( ), and Show details . Rate a place Select a place, its in formation area ( ), Show details , and the star rating. For example, to rate a place a s being 3 out of 5 stars, select the third st ar. To rate a plac e, you need an active i nternet connection. When you find a place that does not exist or contains inappropriate information or in correct details, such as the wrong contact information or location, it is recommended that you report it to Nokia. Report incorrect information Select a place and its information area ( ), and select Show details > Re port this P lace and the appropriate option. To report a place, you need an active internet connection. The available options may vary. Plan a route Plan your journey, and create your route and view it on the map before setting off. Select Menu > Maps . Create a route 1 In the map view, tap a location. To search for an address or place, select Search . 2 Tap the location's information area ( ). 3 Select Add to route . 4 To add another route point, select Add new ro ute point and the appropriate option. Change the order of the route points 1 Select a route point. 86 Maps
2 Select Move . 3 Tap the place where you want to move the route point to. Edit the locati on of a r oute point Tap the route poin t, and select Edit and the appropria te option. View the route on the map Select Show route . Navigate to the destination Select Show route > Options > Start driving or St art walking . Change the settings for a route The route settings affect the na vigation guidance a nd the way the route is di splayed on the map. 1 In the route planner view, open the Settings tab. To get to the route planner view from the navigation view, select Opt ions > Route points or Ro ute point list . 2 Set the transportation mode t o Drive or Walk . If you select Walk , one-way streets are regarded as normal streets, and w alkways and routes through , for example, parks and shopping centres, can be used. 3 Select the desired option. Select the walking mode Open the Settings tab, and select Walk > Preferred route > Streets or Straight line . Straight line is useful on off-road terrain as it in dicates the walking direction. Use the faste r or shorte r driving route Open the Settings tab, and select Drive > Route selection > Faster route or Shorter route . Use the opt imised dri ving route Open the Settings tab, and select Drive > Route selection > Optimised . The optimised driving route combines the advantages of both the shorter and the faster routes. You can also choose to allow or avoid using, for example, motorways, toll roads , or ferries. Save places and routes Save addresses, places of interest, and routes, so they can be quickly used later. Select Menu > Maps . Save a place 1 In the map view, tap the loca tion. To search for an address or place, select Search . 2 Tap the location's information area ( ). 3 Select Save place . Save a route 1 In the map view, tap the loca tion. To search for an address or place, select Search . 2 Tap the location's information area ( ). 3 To add another route point, select Add to route . 4 Select Add new route point and the appropriate option. 87 Maps
5 Select Show route > Options > Save route . View your saved places and routes Select Favourites > Places or Rout es . View and organ ise places or routes Use your Favourites to quickly access the places and routes you have saved. Group the places and routes into a co llection, for example, when planning a trip. Select Menu > Maps and Favourites . View a saved place on th e map 1 Select Places . 2 Go to the place. 3 Select Map . To return to the list of saved places, select List . Create a collection Select Create new collection , and enter a collec tion name. Add a saved place to a collection 1 Select Places an d the place. 2 Select Organise collections . 3 Select New colle ction or an existi ng collection. If you need to delete places or routes, or add a route to a collection, go to the Ovi Maps internet service at www.ovi.com. Send places to your friends When you want to share pl ace information with your friends, send these details directly to their devices. Send a place to your fr iend's compatible d evice Select a location on th e map, tap the location's information area ( ), and select Send . Synchronise your Favourites Plan a trip on your computer at the Ovi Maps website, synchronise the saved places , routes, and collections with your mobile device, and ac cess the plan on the go. To synchronise plac es, routes , or collections between your mobile device and the Ovi Maps internet service, you need a Nokia account. If you do not have one, in the main view, select Accounts > Nokia account > Crea te new account . Synchronise save d places, routes, and collections Select Favourites > Synchron ise with Ovi . If you do not have a Nokia ac count, you are prompted to create one. Set the device to synchron ise Favourites automatically Select and Synchronisati on > Synchronisation > At start-up and shut-d. . The device starts the synchronisation when you open or close the Maps application. Synchronising requires an acti ve internet connection, and may involve the transmission of large amounts of data through your service providerâÂÂs network. Contact your 88 Maps
service provider for information about data transmission charges. To use the Ovi Maps internet service, go to www.ovi.com. Share location Publish your current location to Facebook, together w ith text and a photo. Your Facebook friends can see your location on a map. Select Menu > Maps and Share location . To share your location , you need a Nokia accou nt and a Facebook account. 1 Select Share location . 2 Sign in to your Nokia ac count, or, if you do not yet have one, select Create new account . 3 Sign in to your Facebook account. 4 Select your current location. 5 Enter your status update . 6 To attach a phot o to your post, select Add a photo . 7 Select Share location . Manage your Facebook a ccount In the main view, select Accounts > Share location settings > Facebook . Sharing your location and vi ewing the location of others requires an internet connec tion. This may involve the transmission of large amou nts of data and related data traffic costs. The applicable Facebook terms of use apply to sharing your location to Facebook. Familiarise yourself with the Facebook terms of us e and the privacy prac tices, and use appropriate consideration before disclosing your locati on data to others or viewin g the location of others. Before sharing your location , always consider carefully with whom you are sharin g. Check the privacy settings of the social network you are using a s you might share your location with a large group of people. Get voice guidance Voice guidance, if available for your language, helps you find your way to a destination , leaving you free to enjoy the journey. Select Menu > Maps and Drive or Walk . When you use drive or walk na vigation for th e first time, you are asked to select the language of the voice guidance, and download the appro priate files. If you select a la nguage that inc ludes street nam es, also the street names are said al oud. Voice guidance may not be available for your language. Change the voice guidance language In the main view, select and Navigation > Drive guidanc e or Walk guid ance and the appropriate option. When you are walking, in addi tion to voice guidance, your device can guide you wi th beep s and vibrations. 89 Maps
Use beeps and vib rations In the main view, select and Navig ation > Walk guidance > Beeps and Vibrations . Repeat the voice guidance for car navigation In the navigation view, select Option s > Repeat . Adjust the vo lume of the vo ice guidance for car navig ation In the navigation view, select Option s > Volume . Walk to yo ur destinatio n When you need directions to follow a route on foot, Maps guides you over squares, an d through parks, pedestrian zones, and ev en shopping centres. Select Menu > Maps . Walk to a destination Select Set destinatio n and the appropriate op tion. Walk to your home Select Walk home . When you select Drive home or Walk home for the first time, you are prompted to define you r home location. To later change the home lo cation, do the following: 1 In the main view, select . 2 Select Naviga tion > Home Location > Redefine . 3 Select the appropriate option. Tip: To walk without a set destination, select Map . Your location is displayed on the ce ntre of the map as you move. Drive to yo ur destination When you need turn-by-turn directions while driving, Maps helps you get to your destination. Select Menu > Maps and Drive . Drive to a destination Select Set destinatio n and the appropriate option. Drive to your home Select Drive home . When you select Drive home or Walk home for the first time, you are prompted to de fine your home location. To later change the home location, do the following: 1 In the main view, select . 2 Select Navigation > Home Location > Redefine . 3 Select the appropriate option. Tip: To drive without a set destina tion, select Map . Yo ur location is displayed on the ce ntre of the map as you move. Change views during navigation Swipe the screen, and select 2D vi ew , 3D view , Arrow view , or Route overview . Obey all local laws. Always k eep your hands free to operate the vehicle while driving. Your first consideration while driving should be road safety. 90 Maps
Get traffic and safety info rmation Enhance your driving experience with real-time information about traffi c events, lane assistan ce, and speed limit warni ngs, if av ailable for your country or region. Select Menu > Maps and Drive . View traffic ev ents on the map During drive navi gation, select Options > Traffic info . The events are displayed as triangles and lines. Update traffic information Select Options > Traffic info > Update traffic info . When planning a route, you can set the device to avoid traffic events, such as tr affic jams or roadworks. Avoid traffi c events In the main view, select and Navigation > Reroute due to traffic . The location of speed came ras may be shown on your route during navigation, if th is feature is enabled. Some jurisdictions prohibit or regu late the use of speed camera location data. Nokia is not re sponsible for the accuracy, or the consequences of using sp eed camera location data. Download and update ma ps To avoid mobile data transfer costs, download the latest maps and voice gu idance files t o your computer using the Nokia Map Loader application, and then transfer and save them to your device. To download and install Nokia Map Loader on your compatible computer, go to www.nokia.com/maps , and follow the instructions. Tip: Save new maps to your de vice before a journey, so you can browse the maps without an internet connecti on when travelling abroad. Before using Nokia Map Loader, you must browse maps in the Maps application in yo ur device at least once . Download maps with Nokia Map Loader 1 Connect your device to your compatible computer with a compatible USB data cable or Bluetooth connection. If you use a data cable, select PC Suite as the USB connection method. 2 Open Nokia Map Loader on the computer. 3 If a new map version or new voice files are available for your device, you are prompted to update the data. 4 Select a continent and a coun try. Larger countries may have several sub-maps so you can download the maps relevant for you. 5 Select the maps, and download and install them to your device. 91 Maps
Camera Your device supports an im age capture resolution of 2592x1944 pixels (5 megapix els ). The image resolution in this guide may appear different. To ensure good quality ph otos, wipe the cam era lens carefully with a cleaning cloth. Image ca pture Capture and reco rding settings To open the capture and reco rd ing settings view before capturing an image or recording a video clip, select Menu > Applications > Camera and . The capture and recording settings view provides you wit h shortcuts to different items and settings before capturing an image or recording a video clip. The capture and recording sett ings return to the default settings after you close the ca mera. Select from the following: Select the scene. or Switch between video and image mode. or Show or hide the viewfinder grid (images only). Activate the self-timer (images only). Activate sequenc e mode (images o nly). Open Photos Image setting s: Select a colour effect. Adjust the white balance. Select the current lighting conditions. This allows the camera to reproduce colours more accurately. Adjust the exposure compens ation (images only). If you are shooting a dark subject agai nst a very light background, such as snow, adjust the exposure to 1 or 2 to compensate for the background brightness. For light subjects against a dark background, use - 1 or -2. Adjust light sensitivity (ima ges only). Increase the light sensitivity in low light condit ions to avoid too dark images and blurry images. Increasing t he light sensitivity may also increase the image noise. Adjust contrast (images on ly). Adjust the difference between the lightest and da rkest parts of the image. Adjust sharpn ess (images only). The screen dis play changes t o match the set tings you define. The capture settings are shooting-mode specific. Switching between the modes does not reset the defined settings. If you select a new scene, the capture settings are replaced by the selected scene. You ca n change the capture settings after selecting a scene if needed. 92 Camera
Saving the captured image ma y take longer if you change the zoom, lighting, or colour settings. Capture images When capturing an i mage, note the following: ⢠Use both hands to keep the camera still. ⢠The quality of a digita lly zoomed image is lower than that of a non-zoomed image. ⢠The camera goes into battery saving mode if there are no actions for about a minute. To continue capturing images, select Continue . ⢠Keep a safe distance when using the flash. Do not use the flash on people or animals at close range. Do not cover the flash while taking a picture. To capture an image with the main camera, do the following: 1 To switch from video mode to image mode, if necessary, select > . 2 To capture an image, pres s the capture key. Do not move the device before th e image is saved and the final image displayed. Capture images with second ary camera To capture an image, select . Do not move the device before the image is saved an d the final image displayed. To zoom in or out when capt uring an image, use the zoom slider. To leave the camera open in the background and use other application s, press the menu ke y. T o return to the camera, press and hold the capture key. On-screen controls and indicators for still image capture The still image viewfinder displays the following: 1 Capture mode indicator 2 Zoom slider. To turn the zo om slider on and off, tap the screen. 3 Capture icon. Tap to capture an imag e. 4 Flash mode. Tap to change sett ings. 5 Capture settings . Tap to change set tings. 6 Battery charge level indicator 7 Image resolution indicator 8 Image counter (the estimated nu mber of images you can capture using the curren t image quality se tting and available memory) 9 Memory in use. Depending on the setup of your device, there are the following options: device memory ( ). 10 GPS signal indicator 93 Camera
Locatio n informatio n You can automatically add capture location information to the file details of the captured material. For example, in the Photos application, you can then view the location where an image was captured. Select Menu > Applica tions > Camera . Add location inf ormation to all captured ma terial Select Optio ns > Settings > Show GPS info > On . The location information is availa ble only for images captured with the main camera. It may take several minutes to obta in the coordinates of your location. The availabilit y and quality of GPS signals may be affected by your lo cation, buildings, natural obstacles, and weather conditions. If you share a file tha t includes location inform ation, also the location information is shared, and your location may be visible to third parties viewing the file. The device requires network services to acquire location information. Location information indicators: â Location informat ion unavailable. GPS stays active in the background for seve ral minutes. If a satellite connection is made and the indicator changes to within that time, all the images cap t ured and video clips recorded during that time are ta gged based on the received GPS positioning information. â Location information is available. Location information is added to the file details. Files with location information are indicated with in the Photos application. After capturing an im age After you capture an image, select from the following options (available only if you have selected Options > Settings > Show capt ured image > Yes ): â Send the image in a mu ltimed ia or e-mail message, or through connection methods such as Bluetooth connectivity. â Upload the image to a compatible online album. Delete â Delete the image. To use the image as wallpaper in the home sc reen, select Options > Use image > Se t as wallpaper . To set the image as a default call image to be used for every call situation, select Options > Use image > Set as call image . To assign the image to a cont act, Options > Use image > Assign to contact . To return to the viewfinder to cap ture a new image, p ress the capture key. Flash and video light Keep a safe distance when us ing the flash. Do not use t he flash on people or animals at close range. Do not cover the flash whil e taking a pi cture. The camera of your device has a dual LED flash for low light conditions. 94 Camera
To select the desired flash mode, tap the current flash mode indicator, which is one of the following: Automatic , Red uce red , On , and Off . Avoid touching t he flash LEDs w hen the back cover has been removed. The L EDs may get h ot after prolon ged usage. Video light To increase light levels when recording video in low light, select . Scenes A scene helps you to find th e right colour and lighting settings for the current enviro nment. The s ettings of each scene have been set according to a certain style or environment. The default scene in image and video modes is indicated with ( Automatic ). To change the scene, select > Scen e mode and a scene. To create your own scene suitable for a certain environment, select User defined and Edit . In the us er defined scene, you can adjust different lighting and colour settings. To copy the settings of another scene, select Based on scene mode and the desired scene. To save the changes and return to the scenes list, select Back . To activate your own scene, select User de fined > Select Capture images in a sequence Select Menu > Applications > Camera . Sequence mode is available only in the main camera. To start capturing images in a quick sequence, select > Seq uence . To close the settings window, s elect . Press and hold the capture key. The device captures images until you se lect Stop or until the memory runs out. The captured images are disp layed in a grid. To view an image, select the image. To return to the sequence mode viewfinder, press the capture key. You can also use sequence mode with the s elf-timer. To deactivate sequence mode, select > Single s hot . You in the i mage â self-timer Use the self-timer to delay th e capture so that you can include yourself in the image. To set the self-timer delay, select > , and the delay needed before the image is captured. To activate the self-timer, select Activate . The stop watch icon on the screen blinks and the remaining time is displayed when the timer is running. The camera captures the image after the selected delay elapses. 95 Camera
To switch off the self-timer, select > > . Tip: Select 2 seconds to keep your hand steady when capturing an image. Video recording Record a video clip 1 To switch from image mode to video mode, if necessary, sele ct > . 2 To start recording, press the capture key, or select . A red record icon is displayed. 3 To pause recording, select Paus e . To resume, select Continue . If you pause recording an d do not press any key within one minute, the recording stops. To zoom in or out, use the zoom keys. 4 To stop recording, press the capture key. The video clip is automatically save d in Photos . Video recording on-screen controls and indica tors The video vi ewfinder di splays the following: 1 Capture mode indicator 2 Audio mute on indicator 3 Capture icon. Select to record video clips. 4 Video light indicator 5 Recording settings. Select to change s ettings. 6 Battery charge level indicator 7 Video quality indicator. To change this setting, select Options > Settings > Video quality . 8 Video clip file type 9 Available recording tim e. Wh en you are recording, the current video lengt h indicator also shows the elapsed and remaining time. 10 The location to which the video clip is saved 11 GPS signal indicator After recording a video clip After you record a video clip, select from the following options (available only if you have selected Op tions > Settings > Show last captured video > Yes ): Play â Play the video clip you just recorded. â Upload the image to a compatible online album. Delete â Delete the video clip. To return to the viewfinder to record a new video clip, press the capture key. Camera settings Still image camera sett ings To change the main settings, in image mode, select Options > Settings and from the following: Image quality â Set the resolution. The higher the image resolution, the more memory the image consumes. 96 Camera
Show captured image â View the image after it is captured, or continue im age captur ing immediat ely. Default image name â Define the default name for captured images. Capture tone â Set the tone that sounds when you capture an image. Memory in use â Select where to store your images. Show GPS info â To add GPS location coordinates to each image file, select On . Receiving a GPS signal ma y take time, or the signal may not be availa ble. Auto-rotate images â Select whether you want imag es that are captured wh en the device is held upright to be rotated when you open them in Photos. Restore camera se ttings â Restore the camera settings to the default va lues. Video settings To change the main set tings, in video mode, select Options > Settin gs and from the following: Video quality â Se t the quality of the video clip. Se lect Sharing , if you want to send the video clip using a multimedia message. The cl ip is recorded with QCIF resolution, in the 3GPP file fo rmat, and the size is limited to 600 kB (approximately one minute) . You may not be able to send video clip s save d in the MPEG4 file format in a multimedia message. Show GPS info â To add GPS location coordinates to each file, select On . Receiving the GP S signal may take time, or the signal ma y not be availa ble. Audio recordi ng â Record sound. Show la st captu red video â View the first frame of the recorded video clip after the recording stops. To view the entire video clip, select Play . Default video name â Enter the default name for recorded video clips. Memory in use â Select where to store your video clips. Restore camera se ttings â Restore the camera settings to the default v alues. 97 Camera
Photos About Phot os Select Menu > Photos and from the following: Captured â View all the images and video clips you have captured. Months â View images and video clips categorised by the month they were captured. Applicable only for content captured or recorded with your device. Albums â View th e default albums and th e ones you have created . Tags â View the tags you ha ve created for each item. Downloa ds â View items and video clips downloaded from the web, received as a multimedia or e-mail message, saved on a me mory card, or copied to phone memory from a memory card or other sources. Share online â Post your images or video clips t o the web. View images and videos Select Menu > Photos . Images and video clips can also be sent to you from a compatible device. To be able to view a received image or video clip in Photos, you must first save it. The images and video clip files are ordered by date and time. The number of files is di splayed. To browse the files, swipe up or down. To open a file, select the file . To view the toolbar, tap the image. To zoom in the imag e, use the zoom slider. The zooming ratio is not stored permanently. To edit an image or a video clip, select the file and Options > Edit . 98 Photos
To view the details of an image, s elect Optio ns > Details . To print your images on a compatible printer, select Options > Print . View and edit fi le details Select Menu > P hotos . To view and edit the properties of an image or a video clip, select the file, Optio ns > De tails , and from the following: Name â View the thumbnail image of the file a nd the current file name. To edit th e file name, select the file name field. Description â View a free-form description of the file. To add a description, select the field. Tag â View the cu rrently used tags. T o add more tags to the current file, select New tag . Album â View in which albums the current file is located. Location â View GPS location information, if available. Resolution â View the size of the image in pixels. Duration â View the length of the video clip. Licence â View the DRM rights of the current file. The available options may vary. Organise images and video clips Select Menu > P hotos . You can organise files as follows: To view items in the Tags view, add tags to the items. To view items by months, select Months . To create an album to store items, select Albums > Options > New album . To add an image or a video clip to an album, go to the item, and select Options > Add to album . To delete an image or video cl ip, go to th e item, an d select Options > Delete . Photos toolbar From the active toolbar, select the desired option. The available options vary depend ing on the view you are in and whether you have selected an image or a video clip. When viewing an image or a video clip in the full screen mode, tap the item to show the toolbar and the zoom slider. Select an image or a video clip and from the following: Send the image or video clip. Mark the image or video clip. Upload the image or vide o clip to a compatible online album (only availabl e if you have se t up an account for a compatible online album ). Delete the image or video clip. Rename the image or video clip. View images as a s lideshow. Create a new album. 99 Photos
Albums Select Menu > Photos and Albums . With albums, you can conven iently manage you r images and video clips. To create a new album , select . To add an image or a video clip to an album, select the item and Options > Add to album . A lis t of albums opens. Select the album to which you want to add the image or video clip. The item you added to the album is still visible in Photos. To remove an image or a video clip from an album, select the album and t he item, and select Options > Remove from album . Tags Select Menu > Photos . Use tags to categorise media items in Photos. Tag browser shows the currently used tag s and the number of items associated with each t ag. To assign a tag to an image, select the image and Options > Add tag . To create a tag, select New ta g . To see the tags you ha ve created, select Tags . The size of the tag name corresponds to the number of items the tag is assigned to. To view all the images associated with a tag, select the tag from the list. To view the list in alphabetical order, select Options > Name . To view the list in most fr equently used order, select Options > Popularity . To remove an image from a tag, select the tag and th e image, and select Options > Remove from tag . Slide show Select Menu > Photos . To view your images as a slide show, select an image a nd Options > Slide s how > Play . The slide show starts from the selected file. To view only a selection of images as a sl ide show, select Options > Mark/Unmark > Mark to mark the images. To start the slide show, select Options > Slide show > Play . To resume a paused slide show, select Co ntinue . To end the slide show, select Back . Before starting the slide show, to adjust the slide show settings, select Options > Slide sho w > Settings and from the following: Image orde r â Display images from older to newer or vice versa. Song â Select a music file from the list. Transition spee d â Adjust the tempo of the slide show. 100 Photos
To adjust the volume during the slide show, use the volume keys. TV-out mode To view the captured images and recorded video clips on a compatible TV, use a Nokia Video Co nnectivity Cab le. Before viewing the images and video clips on a TV, you may need to configure the TV-o ut settings an d aspect ratio. To view images and video clip s on a TV, do the following: 1 Connect a Nokia Video Con nectivity Cable to the video input of a compat ible TV. 2 Connect the other end of the Nokia Video Connectivity Cable to the Nokia AV Connector of your device. 3 You may need to select the cable mode. 4 Select Menu > Photos , and browse fo r the file you want to view . All audio, including active ca lls, stereo video clip audio, keypad tones, and ringing tone i s routed to the TV when the Nokia Video Connectivity Cable is connected to the device. You can use the device microphone normally. For content other than video cl ips, the TV screen displays what is displayed on the screen of your device. Video clips are only displayed on the TV screen, not on the device screen. You can view images as a slid e show on the TV. All items in an album or marked images are displayed on the TV in full screen mode while the selected music plays. The quality of the TV image may vary due to differing screen resolutions. You cannot use the TV as the camera viewfinder in TV-out mode. Wireless radio signals , such as incoming calls, may cause interference in the TV image. Edit image s Image editor To edit an image, in Photos, scroll to the image, and select Options > Edit . To add effects to your images, select Options > Add effect . You can crop and rota te the image; adjust the brightness, colour, contra st , and resolution; and add effects, text, clip art, or a frame to the image. 101 Photos
Crop image To crop an image, select Options > Add effect and ( Crop ). To crop the image manually, select Manual . A cross appears in the upper left and lower right corner of t he image. To adjust the crop borders, drag the crosses from the corners. To set the crop area, select Set . When the crop area is set, you can drag to move th e crop area without changing the size or aspect rat io. When you are satisfied with the crop area, select Crop . If you select a predefined aspe ct ratio, the selected aspect ratio is locked when you adjust the crop borders. Reduce red-eye To reduce red-eye in an image, select Options > Add effect and ( Red-eye reducti on ). Drag the cross onto the eye, and select Options > Se t . Drag to resize and move the loop to outline the eye, and select Op tions > Reduce red-eye effect . When you have finished editing the image, select Done . To save the chan ges and return to the previous view, select Back . Edit vide o clips The video editor supports 3GP and MP4 video file formats, and AAC, AMR, MP3, and WAV audio file formats. It does not necessarily support all features of a file format or all the variations of file formats. To edit video clips in Photos, scroll to a video clip, select Options > Edit , and from the following: Merge â Add an image or a video clip to the beginning or the end of the selected video clip. Change sound â Add a new sound clip, and replace the original sound in the video clip. Add text â Add text to the beginning or the end of the video clip. Cut â Trim the video and ma rk the sections you want to keep in the video clip. To take a snapshot of a video clip, in the cut video view, select Options > T ake snapshot . Image pr int You can print images from yo ur device using a printer compati ble with Pic tBridge. Y o u can only prin t im ages that are in the JPEG file format. To print images in Photos, camera, or image viewer, mark the images, and select Options > Print . Connect to pr inter In the Print submenu, select whet her you want to print the image using Bluetooth connecti vity or using a compatible USB data cable. If you want to print using a US B data ca ble, firs t connect your device to a compatible printer using the USB data 102 Photos
cable, and select Image transfer as the USB connection mode. Print preview After you select the printer, the selected images are displayed using predefined layouts. To change the layout, scroll left or right to browse through the available layouts for the se lected printe r. If the image s do not fit on a single page, sc roll up or down to display the additional pages. To select the paper size, select Paper size . To select the print quali ty, select Print quality . Share onlin e You can share images and vide o c lips in compatible online albums, weblogs, or in othe r compatible online sharing services on the web. You can upload content, save unfinished posts a s drafts and continue later, and view th e content of the albums. The supported con tent types may vary depending on the service provider. To share images an d videos online, you m ust have an account with an online image shar ing service. You ca n usually subscribe to such a service on the web page of your service provider. Contact your service provider for more information. Using this service may involv e the transmission of large amounts of data through your service provider's network. Contact your service provider for information about dat a transmission charges. The recommended connection method is WLAN. To upload a file from Photos to an online service, select Menu > Photos , the desired file and Options > Send > Upload or Share on Ovi . For more information on th e application and compatible service providers, see the Nokia product support pages or your local Nokia website. 103 Photos
Music Warning: Continuous exposure to high volume may damage your hearing. Listen to music at a moderate level, and do not hold the device near your ear when the loudspeaker is in use. Play a song or a podcast Select Menu > Music > Music library . To play a song or a pod cast: 1 Select categories to naviga te to the song or podcasts you want to hear. 2 To play an item, select the item from the list. To pause playba ck, tap ; to resume, tap . To fast-forward or rewind, tap and hold or . To go to the next item , tap . To return to the beginning of the item, tap . To skip to the previous item, tap again within 2 secon ds after a song or p odcast has started. To turn random play ( ) on or off, select Options > Shuffle play . To repeat the current item ( ), all items ( ), or to turn repeat off, select Options > Repeat . If you play podcasts, shuffle and repeat are automatically turned off. 104 Music
To modify the tone of the music playback, select Options > Equaliser . To modify the balance and stereo image or to enhance the bass, select Options > Settings . To return to the home screen and leave the player playing in the background, press the end key. To close the player, select Option s > Exit . Playlists Select Menu > Music > Mu sic libra ry and Playlists . To view details of the playlist, select Optio ns > Playli st details . Create a playlist 1 Select Options > New playli st . 2 Enter a name for the playlist, and select OK . 3 To add songs now, select Yes ; or to a dd the songs later, select No . 4 If you select Yes , select artists to find th e songs you want to add to the playlist. Select Add to add items. To show the song list under an artist title, select Expand . To hide the song list, sele ct Collapse . 5 When you have made your selections , select Done . The playlist is saved to the mass memory of your device. To add more songs later, when viewing the playlist, select Options > Add songs . To add songs, albu ms, artists, genr es, and composers to a playlist from the different views of the music menu, select an item and Options > Add to playlist > Saved playlist or New pla ylist . To remove a song from a playlist, select Options > Remove . This does not delete the so ng from the device; it only removes it from the playlist. To reorder songs in a playlist, select the song you want to move, and Options > Reorder playlist . To grab a song and drop it to a new position, select t he song in the desired position and Drop . To finish reordering the playlist, select Done . Podcasts Select Menu > Music > Music library and Podcasts . The podcast menu di splays the podcasts available in the device. Podcast episodes have three states : never played, partially played, and completely p layed. If an episode is partially played, it plays from the last playback position the next time it is played. If an ep isode has never been played or completely played, it plays from the beginning. 105 Music
Transfer music from a computer You can use the following methods to transfer music: ⢠To view your device on a computer as a mass memory device where you can transfer any data files, make t he connection with a compatible USB data cable or Bluetooth connectivity. If you are using a USB data cable, select Mass storage as the connection mode. ⢠To synchronise music with Windows Media Player, connect a compatible USB data cable, and select Media transfer as the connection mode. ⢠To install Noki a Music to mana ge and organise your music files, download the PC software from www.music.nokia.com/down load, and follow the instructions. To change the def ault US B connection mode, select Menu > S ettings and Connectivity > USB > USB connection mode . Nokia Music Store Select Menu > Music > Music store . In the Nokia Music Store (netwo rk service) you can search, browse, and purchase music to download to your device. To purchase music, you firs t need to register for the service. To access the Nokia Music Store, you must have a valid internet access point in the device. Nokia Music Store is not available for all countries or regions. Nokia Music Store settings The availabilit y and appearance of t he Nokia Music St ore settings may vary. Th e settin gs may also be predefined and not editable. You may be asked to select the access point to use when connecting to the Nokia Music Store. Select Default access point . In the Nokia Music Store, yo u may be able to edit the settings by selecting Options > Settings . Nokia Podcasting With the Nokia Podcasting a pplication (network service), you can search, discover, subscribe to, and download podcasts over the air, and play, manag e, and share audio and video podcasts with your device. Podcasti ng settings To open Nokia Podcasting, select Menu > Applications > Podcasting . Before using Nokia Podcasting, define your connection and download setti ngs. The recommended connection method is WLAN . Check with your service provider for terms and data service fees before using different connec tion methods. For example, a flat rate data plan can allow large da ta transfers for one monthly fee. Connecti on settings To edit the connection settings, select Options > Settings > Connection and from the following: 106 Music
Default access point â Select the access point to define your connect ion to the internet. Search service U RL â Define the podcast search s ervice URL to be used in searches. Download settings To edit the download settings, select Options > Settings > Downl oad and from the following: Save to â Define the location where you want to save your podc asts. Update interval â Define how often podcasts are updated. Next update date â Define the date of the next automatic upda te. Next update t ime â Define the time of the next automatic upda te. Automatic updates only occu r if a specific default access point is selected and Nokia Podc asting is running. If N okia Podcasting is not running, the automatic update s are not activated. Download limit (%) â Define the percentage of memory that is reserved for podcast downloads. If limit ex ceeds â Defi ne what to do if the downloads exceed the download limit. Setting the application to retrieve podcasts automa tically may involve the tran smission of large amounts of data through your service providerâÂÂs network. Contact your service provider for information about data transmission charges. To restore the default settings, select Option s > Restore default in the settings view. Search podcasts The search service helps you to find podca sts by keyword or title. The search service uses the p odcast search service web address defined in Podcasting > Options > Settings > Connection > Search servi ce URL . To search for podcasts, select Menu > Applica tions > Podcasting and Search , and enter the desired keywo rds. Tip: The search service looks for podcast tit les and keywords in descriptions, not specific episodes. General topics, such as football or hip-hop, usually give better results than a specific team or artist. To subscribe to a found pod cast, select the title of the podcast. The podcast will be added to your list of subscribed podcasts. To start a new sea rch, select Op tions > New search . To go to the website of a podcast, select Options > Open web page (network service). To view the details of a podcast, select Options > Description . 107 Music
To send a podcast to anot her compatible device, select Options > Send . Directo ries To open directories, select Menu > Appli cations > Podcasti ng and Directories . Directories help you find new podcast episodes to which to subscribe. The contents of the directorie s change. Select the desired directory to upda te it (network service). The colour of the directory changes, when the update is complete. Directories can include podcas ts listed by popularity or themed folders. To open a themed folder, select the fol der. A list of podcasts is displayed. To subscribe to a podcast, select the title and Subscribe . After you have subscribed to episodes of a podcast, you can download, manage, an d play them in the podcasts menu. To add a new web directory or folder, select Options > New > Web directory or Folder . Enter the title and URL of the outline processor markup language (OPML) file, and select Done . To edit the selected folder, web link, or web directory, select Options > Edit . To import an OPML file st ored on your device, select Options > Import OPML file . Select the location of the file, and import it. To send a directory folder as a multimedia mess age or using Bluetooth connectiv ity, select the folder and Options > Send . When you receive a message with an OPML file using Bluetooth co nnectivity, open the file to save the file into the Received folder in Directories. Open the folder to subscribe to any of the links to add to y our podcasts. Downloads After you have subscribed to a podcast, from directories, search, or by entering a we b address, you can manage, download, and play episodes in Podcasts. To see the podcasts you have subscribed to, select Podcasti ng > Podcasts . To see individual episode titl es (an episode is a particular media file of a podcast), select the podcast title. To start a download, select the epis ode title. To download or to continue to download select ed or marked episodes, select Options > Download . You can download multiple episodes at the same time. To play a portion of a podcast during download or after partial downloading, se lect the podcas t and Options > Play previe w . 108 Music
Fully downloaded podcasts ca n be found in the Podcasts folder, but are not shown unti l the library is refreshed. Play and manage podcasts To display the available episodes from the selected podcast , in Podcasts , select Open . Under each episode, you see the file format, the size of the file, and time of the upload. When the podcast is fully do wnloaded, to play the full episode, select it and Play . To update the selected podcas t or marked podcasts, for a new episode, select Option s > Update . To stop the updating, select Options > Stop up date . To add a new podcast by entering th e URL of the podcast, select Options > New podcast . If you do not have an access point defined or if during packet data connection you are asked to enter a user name and password, contact your service provider. To edit the URL of the selected podcast, select Optio ns > Edit . To delete a downloaded podc ast or marked podcasts from your device, select Opt ions > Dele te . To send the selected podcast or marked podcasts to another compatible device as .opml files as a multimedia message or by Bluetooth connectivity, select Options > Send . To update, delete, and send a group of selected podcasts at once, select Options > Mark/Unmark , mark the desired podcasts, and select Options to choose the desired action. To open the website of the podcast (n etwork servic e), select Options > Open web page . Some podcasts provide the op portunity to interact with the creators by commenting and voting. To connect to the internet to do this, select O ptions > View comments . FM radio Listen to the radio Select Menu > Music > Radio . The FM radio depends on an antenna other than the wireless device antenn a. A compatible headse t or accessory needs to be attached t o the device for the FM radio to function properly. When you open the applicat ion for the first time, you can choose to have the local stat ions tuned automatically. To listen to the next or the previous station, select or . To mute the rad io, select . Select Options and from the following: Stations â View saved radio stations. Tune stations â Sear ch for radio stations. 109 Music
Save â Save the radio station. Activate loudspeaker or Deactivate loudsp eaker â Turn the loudspeaker on or off. Alternative f requencies â Select whet her you want t he radio to automatically search for a better RDS frequency for the station if the frequency level becomes low. Play in background â Retu rn to the home screen with the radio playing in th e background. Manage radio stations Select Menu > Music > Radio . To listen to saved stations, select Options > Stations , and select a station from the list. To remove or rename a station, select Opti ons > Stations > Options > Delete or Rename . To set the desired frequency manually, select Options > Tune stations > Opt ions > Manual t uning . 110 Music
Videos You can downloa d and stream video clips over the air from compatible internet video services (network service) us ing a packet data or WLAN connection. You can also transfer video clips from a compatible PC to your dev ice to view them. Downloading videos may involv e the transmission of large amounts of data through your service provider's network. Contact your service provider for information about dat a transmission charges. Your device may have predefined services. Service providers may provide free content or charge a fee. Check the pricing in the service or from the service provider. Download and view video clips Select Menu > Videos & TV . Connect to video services To connect to a service to install video services, select Video feeds > Video directory and the desired video service. To add a video feed manually, in the Video feeds view, select Options > Add feed > Add manually . View a video clip To browse the content of installed video services, select Video feeds . The content of some video services is divided into categories. To browse video clips, select a category. To search for a video clip in the service, select Video search . Search may not be available in all services. Some video clips can be streamed over the air, but others must be first downloaded to your device. To download a video clip, select the Downlo ad icon. Downloads continue in the background if you exit the application. The downloaded video clips are saved in My videos. To stream a video clip or view a downloaded one, select the Play icon. To view the control keys duri ng playback, tap the screen. To adjust the volume, use the volu me key. Schedule downloads To schedule an au tomatic do wnload for video clips in a service, select Options > Schedule downloads . New video clips are automatically downloaded daily at the time you define. To cancel scheduled downloads, select Manual download as the download method. 111 Videos
Video feeds Select Menu > Videos & TV . The content of the installed vi deo services is distributed using RSS feeds. To view and manage your feeds, select Video feeds . Select Optio ns and from the following: Feed subscripti ons â Check your current feed subscriptions. Feed details â Vi ew information about a video feed. Add feed â Subscribe to new feeds. Select Via Video directory to select a feed from the services in the video direct ory. Refresh feeds â Refresh the content of all feeds. Manage account â Manage your account options for a particular feed, if available. Move â Move video clips to a desired location. To view the video clips availa ble in a feed, select a feed from the l ist. My videos My videos is a storage place for all videos. You can list downloaded videos and video clips recorded with the device camera in separate views. To open a folder and view video clips, select the folder. When a video clip is playing, to use the control keys for controlling the play er, tap the screen. To adjust the volume, press the volume key. Select Options and from the following: Resume download â Resume a p aused or failed download. Cancel download â Can cel a download. Video details â View information about a video clip. Memory status â View the amount of available and used memory. Sort by â Sort video clips. Select the desired category. Move and copy â Mo ve or copy video clips. Select Copy or Move and the desired location. Transfer videos from your PC Transfer your own video clips from compatible devices using a compatible USB data ca ble. Only video clips which are in a format supported by your device are sh own. 1 T o vi e w yo u r de v ic e on a P C a s a m a ss m em o r y d e vi c e where you can transfer an y data files, connect using a USB data cable. 2 Select Mass storage as the connection mode. 3 Select the video clips you want to copy from your PC. 4 Transfer the video clips to E:\My Videos in the mass memory of your device, or to F:\My Videos in a compatible memory card, if availa ble. The transferred video clips ap pear in the My videos folder. Video settings Select Menu > Videos & TV . Select Options > Settings and from the following: 112 Videos
Video service selection â Select the video services that you want to appear in the main v iew. You can also add , remove, edit, and view the details of a video service. You cannot edit preinstalled video services. Network connection â Define the network destination used for the network connect ion. To select the connection manually each time a ne tw ork connection is opened, select Always ask . Parental control â Set an age limit to videos. The required password is the sa me as the device lock code. The factory setting for the lock code is 12345. In video-on- demand services, videos whic h have the same or a higher age limit than you have set , are hidden. Preferred memory â Select where to save downloaded videos. If the s elected memory beco mes full, the devi ce saves the videos in another memory. Thumbnails â Select whether to download and view thumbnail images of video feeds. 113 Videos
Personalise your device You can personalise your devi ce by changing the standby mode, main menu, tone s, themes, o r font size. Most of the personalisation option s, such as changi ng the font size, can be accessed through the device settings . Change t he look of your device Select Menu > Settings and Themes . You can use themes to change the look of the display, such as the background image. To change the theme that is used for all the applications in your device, select General . To preview a theme before activating it, go to the theme, and wait for a few seconds. To activate the theme, select Op tions > Set . indicates the active theme. To have an image or a slide show of changi ng images as the background in the home screen, select Wall paper > Image or Slide show . To change th e image displaye d in the home screen when a call is received, select Call image . Profiles You can use profiles to set and customise the ringi ng tones, message alert tones, and other tones for different events, environments, or calle r groups. The name of the selected profile is displayed at the top of the home screen. If the General profile is in us e, only the date is displayed. Select Menu > Settings and Profile s . Go to a profile, and select from the following: Activate â Activa te the profile. Personalis e â Personalise the profile. Timed â Set the profile t o be active until a certain time within the next 24 hours. When the time expires, the profile changes back to the previously active non-timed profile. In the home screen, indicates a timed profile. The Offline profile cannot be timed. To create a new profile, select Options > Create new . 3-D tones With 3-D tones, you can enab le three-dimensional sound effects for ringing tones. No t all ringing tones support 3- D effects. Select Menu > Settings and Profiles . Go to a profile, and select Options > Personalise . To enable a 3-D effect that is applied to t he ringing tone, select 3-D ringing tone effect and the desired effect. T o c h a n g e t h e 3 - D e c h o e f f e c t t h a t i s a p p l i e d t o t h e r i n g i n g tone, select 3-D ringing tone echo and the desired effect. To listen to a 3-D effect before selecting it, go to the effect, and wait for a second. 114 Personalise your device
Modify the home sc reen T o m o d i f y i te m s , s u c h a s e - m a i l n o t i fi c a t i o n s , i n t h e h o m e screen, select Options > Edit content . To select an image or image slide show as the background image in the home screen, select Menu > Settings and Themes > Wallpape r . To change the clock shown in the home screen, tap the clock in the home screen, and select Options > Settings > Clock ty pe . Modify the main menu In the menu you can access th e functions in your device. To open the main menu , press the menu key . To change the menu view, select Options > List view or Grid view . To reorganise the main menu, select Options > Organise . For example, to move a menu icon to another folder, select the icon, Options > Move to folder , and the new folder. You can also drag and drop an icon to a new location in the main menu. 115 Personalise your device
Applications Calendar To open the calendar, select Menu > Calendar . Calendar views To switch between month, week, and to-do note view, select Options > Change view > Day , Week , or To-do . To change the starting day of the week, the view that is shown when you open the calendar, or the calendar alarm settings, select Options > Settings . To go to a certain date, se lect Options > Go to date . Calendar toolbar From the toolbar, select from the following: Next view â Select the month view. Next view â Select the week view. Next view â Select the day view. Next view â Select the to-do view. New meeting â Add a new meeting reminder. New to-do not e â Add a new to-do note. Create a calendar entry Select Menu > Calendar . 1 Go to the desired date, and select Options > New entry and from the following: Meeting â Set a reminder for your meeting. Meeting request â Create and send a new meeting request. A mailbox needs to have been set up. Memo â Write a general note for the day. Anniversary â Add a reminder of birthdays or special dates (entries are repeated annually). To-do note â Set a reminder for a task that m ust be done by a specific date. 2 Fill in all the fields. Select a field to enter the text. To close the text input dialog, select . To add a description to an entry, select Opti ons > Add descriptio n . 3 Select Done . The available options may vary. Mute or stop a calendar alarm Select Silence or Stop . Set an alarm to snooze Select Snooze . To define the period after which the calendar alarm sounds again when set to snooze, select Options > Settings > Alarm snooz e time . Manage calendar entries To delete several events at a time, open the month view, and select Opt ions > Delete entr y > Be fore selected date or All entries . 116 Applications
To mark a task as completed in the t o-do view, select the task and Options > Mark as done . To send a calendar not e to a compatible dev ice, select Options > Send . If the other device is not compatible with Coordinated Universal Ti me (UTC), the ti me information of received calendar entries may not be d isplayed corr ectly. Clock Set time a nd date Select Menu > Applications > Clock . Select Options > Settings and from the following: Time â Set the time. Date â Set the date. Automatic ti me update â Set the network to automatically updat e the time, date, and time zone information for your device (network service). Alarm clock Select Menu > Applications > Clock . To set a new ala rm, select New alar m . Set th e alarm time. Select Repeat to set whether and when the a larm is repeated, and select Done . To view your active and inactive ala rms, select Alarms . When the alarm is activ e, is displayed. When the alarm is repeated, is displayed. To remove an alarm, select Alarms , scroll to the alarm, and select Options > Delete alarm . To turn off the alarm when the ala rm expires, select Stop . To snooze the alarm, select Snooze . If your device is switched off when an alarm expires, your device switches itself o n and starts sound ing the alarm tone. To define the snooze time, select Optio ns > Settings > Alarm snooze t ime . To change the alarm tone, select Opti ons > Settings > Clock alarm tone . World clock Select Menu > Applications > Clock . To view the current time in different locations, select World clock . To add locations to the list, select Options > Add location . To set your curren t location, scroll to a location, and select Options > Set as current location . The time i n your device is changed according to the selected location. Ensure that the time is correct and matches your time zone. RealPlayer With RealPlayer, you can play video cl ips or stream me dia files over the air without saving t hem to the device first. 117 Applications
RealPlayer does not necessarily support all file formats or all the variations of file formats. Play video cl ips Select Menu > Applica tions > RealPlayer . To play a video clip, select Video clips , and a clip. To list recently played files, in the application main view, select Recently played . In the list of video clips, scroll to a clip, select Options and from the following: Use video clip â As sign a video to a contact or set it as a ringing tone. Mark/Unmark â Mark items in the list to send or delete multiple items at the same time. View details â View details of the selected item, such as format, resolution, and duration. Settings â Edit settings for vid eo playback and streaming. In the Video clips, Recently played and Streaming links views, the following toolbar icons may be available: Send â Send a video clip or streaming link. Play â Play the video clip or video stream. Delete â Delete the video clip or streaming link. Remove â Remove a file from the recently played list. Stream content ov er the air In RealPlayer, you can only open an RTS P link. However, RealPlayer pl ays a RAM file if you open an HTTP link to it in a browser. Select Menu > Applica tions > RealPlayer . To stream content over the air (network service), select Streaming links and a link. You can als o receive a streaming link in a text me ssage or multim edia message, or open a link on a web page. Before live content begins streaming, your device connects to the site and starts loading the content. The content is not saved in your device. RealPlayer settings Select Menu > Applica tions > RealPlayer . You may receive RealPlayer se ttings in a sp ecial message from your service provider. For more information, contact your service provider. To select the settings for the video, select Options > Settings > Video . To select whether to use a proxy server, to change the default access poin t, and to set the port range used when connecting , select Optio ns > Sett ings > Streaming . For the correct settings, contact your s ervice provider. 1 To edit the advanced settings, select Options > Settings > Streaming > Network > Options > Advanced sett ings . 118 Applications
2 To select the bandwidth used for a network type, select the networ k type and the desired value. To edit the bandwidth yourself, select User defined . Recorder Select Menu > Applications > Recorder . With the Recorder application, you can record voice memos and telephone conversations. The recorder cannot be used when a data call or GPRS connection is active. To record a sound clip, select . To stop recording a sound clip, select . To listen to the sound clip, select . To select the recording qualit y or where you want to save your sound clips, se lect Optio ns > Settings . To record a telephone conver sation, open recorder during a voice call, and select . Both parties hear a tone at regular intervals during recording. Notes Write notes To write a note, select Options > New note . Tap the note field to enter text, and select . You can save plain text files (.txt file format) you receive to Notes. Manage notes Select Menu > Applications > Notes . Select Options and from the following: Open â Open the note. Send â Send the note to other compatible devices. Delete â Delete a note. You can also delete several notes at once. To mark each note you want to delete, select Options > Mark/Unmark , and delete the notes. Synchronisation â Synchronise the notes with compatible applicat ions on a co mpatible device, or define the synchronis ation settings. Office File manager About File m anager Select Menu > Applications > Office > File mgr. . With File manager, you ca n browse, manage, and open files on your device, mass memory, memory card, or a compatible external drive. The available options depend on the memory you select. Find and organise files Select Menu > Applications > Office > File mgr. . To find a file, select Option s > Find . Enter a search text that matches the file name. 119 Applications
To move and copy files and folders, or to create new folders in the memory, select Options > Organise and the desired option. To sort files, select Options > Sort by and the desired category . Edit the memory card You can format a memory card to erase th e data on it, or you can protect the data on the memory card with a password. Select Menu > Applica tions > Office > File mgr. . Rename or format a memory card Select Optio ns > Memory card options and the desir ed option. Password protect a memory card Select Optio ns > Memory card password . These options are available on ly if a compatible memory card is inserted in the device. Back u p files on a me mory c ard Select Menu > Applica tions > Office > File mgr. . To back up files, select the file types you want to back up on a memory card and Options > Back up now . Ens ure that your memory card has enough free memory for the files that you have chosen to back up. Format m ass memo ry Select Menu > Applica tions > Office > File mgr. . When the mass memory is re formatted, all data in the memory is permanently lost. Back up data you want to keep before formatting th e mass memory. You can u se Nokia Ovi Suite to back up data to a compatible compu ter. Digital rights ma nagement (DRM) technologies may prevent some backup data from being restored. For more information about DRM used for your content, contact your service provider. To format the mass memory, select Opti ons > Form at mass memory . Do not format the mass memory using PC software because it may cause degraded performance. Formatting does not guara ntee that all confidential data stored in the device ma ss memory is permanently destroyed. Standard format ting only marks the formatted area as available spa ce and deletes the address to fi nd the files again. The recovery of formatted or even overwritten data may still be possible wi th special recovery tools and software. Dictionary Select Menu > Applica tions > Office > Dictionary . To translate wo rds from one language t o another, en ter text in the search field. As you en ter text, suggestions of words to translate are displayed. To transla te a word, select the word from the list. All languages may not be supported. 120 Applications
Select Options and from the following: Listen â Listen to the selected word. History â Find previously translated words from the current session. Languages â Change the source or target language, download languages from th e internet, or remove a language from the dictiona ry. You cannot remove the English language from t he di ctionary. You can have two additional langua ges inst alled, besides English. Speech â Edit the voice feature settings. You can adjust the speed and volume of the voice. Quickoffice About Quicko ffice Select Menu > Applications > Office > Quickoffice . Quickoffice consists of Quic kword for viewing Microsoft Word documents, Quicksheet for viewing Microsoft Excel worksheets, Quickpoint for Microsoft PowerPoint presentation s, and Quic kmanager for purchasing software. You can view Microsoft Office 2000, XP, 200 3, and 2007 documents (DOC, XLS, a nd PPT file formats) with Quickoffice. If you have the editor version of Quickoffice, you can also edit files. Not all file formats or features are supported. Converter With Converter, you can convert measures from one unit to anoth er. The converter has lim ited ac curacy, and rounding errors may occur. Currency converter Select Menu > Applications > Office > Converter . Select Type > Currency . Before you can make currency conversions, you must select a base currency and add exchange rates. The default base currency is Home. The rate of the base currency is always 1. 1 Select Options > Curre ncy rates . 2 The default name for the cu rrency items is Foreign. To rename a currency, select Options > Rename currency . 3 Add the exchange rates for the currencies, and select Done . 4 In the other Unit field, sele ct the currency to which you want to convert. 5 In the first A mount field, enter the valu e you want to convert. The other Amount field shows the converted value automatically. To change the base currency, select Options > Currency rates , a currency and Options > Set as base currency . When you change base curre ncy, you must ent er new exchange rates because a ll previously set exchange rates are cleared. Convert measures Select Menu > Applications > Office > Converter . 1 In the Type field, select the measure you want to use. 2 In the first Un it field, select the unit from which you want to convert. 121 Applications
3 In the other Unit field, select the unit to which you want to convert. 4 In the first Amount field, enter the value you want to convert. The other Amount field sh ows the converted value automatic ally. Calculator Make calculations Select Menu > Applica tions > Office > Calculator . This calculator has limited a ccuracy and is designed for simple calculations. To make a calculati on, enter the first number of the calculation. T o remove a numb er, select the backspace key. Select a function such as add or su btract. Enter the second number of the calculation, an d select = . Save calculations To save the results of a calculation, select Options > Memory > Save . The saved result replaces the previously stored result in the memory. To retrieve the results of a calculation from the memory and use them in a calculation, select Options > Memory > Recall . To view the last saved resu lt, select Options > Last result . Exiting the Calculator ap plication or switching off the device does not clear the memory. You can recall the last saved result the next time you open the Calculator application. Zip manager Select Menu > Applica tions > Office > Zip . With Zip manager, you can crea te new archive files to store compressed ZIP formatted files; add single or multiple compressed files or directories to an archive; set, clear, or change the archive pa ssword for protected archives; and change settin gs, such as compress ion level. You can save the archive files in t he device memory or on a memory card. Active notes Active notes allows you to crea te notes that contain images and sound or video clips. You can also link a note to a contact. The note is displayed during a call with the conta ct. Create and ed it notes Select Menu > Applica tions > Office > Active notes . To create a note, start writing. To edit a note, select the note and Opti ons > Editing options . To add boldface, italics, or underlining to your text or change the font colour, press and hold th e Shift key, and scroll to select the text. Then select Options > Text . 122 Applications
Select Options and from the following: Insert object â Insert images, sound or video clips, business cards, web bookmarks, an d files. Send â Send the note. Link note to call â Select Add contacts to link a note to a contact. The n ote is displayed when making a call to or receiving a call from the contact. Settings fo r Active notes Select Menu > Applications > Office > Active note s and Options > Settin gs . To select where to sav e notes, select Memory in use and the desired memory. To change the layout of active notes, or to view the notes as a list, select Change view > Grid or List . To see a note in the backgrou nd when making or receiving phone calls, select Show note during call > Yes . Adobe Re ader Select Menu > Applications > Office > Adobe PDF . With Adobe Reader, you can rea d PDF documents with your device; search for text in the documents; modify settings, such as zoom level and page views; an d send PDF files using e-mail. 123 Applications
Settings Some settings may be preset for the device by your service provider, and you may not be able to change them. Phone setti ngs Date and time s ettings Select Menu > Settings and Phone > Date and time . Select from the following: Time â Enter the current time. Time zone â Select your location. Date â Enter the date. Date forma t â Select the date forma t. Date sep arator â Select the symbol that separa tes days, months, and years. Time format â Select the time format. Time separator â Select the symbol that separates hours and minutes. Clock type â Select the clock type. Clock alarm tone â Select the tone for the alarm clock. Alarm snoo ze time â A djust the snooze time. Workdays â Select your working days. You can then set an alarm only for working day mo rnings, for example. Automati c time update â To updat e the time, date, a nd time zone, select On . This network service may not be available on all networks. Speech Select Menu > Settings > Phone > Spee ch . With Speech, you can set the language, voice, and voice properties for the message reader. To set the language for the message r eader, select Language . To download additional languages to your device, select Options > Download languages . Tip: When you download a new language, you mus t download at least one voice for that language . To set the speaking voice, select Voice . The voice depends on the selected language. To set the s peaking rate, select Speed . To set the speakin g volume, select Volume . To view details of a voice, open the voice tab, and select the voice and Options > Voice details . To listen to a voice, select the voice and Options > Play voice . To delete languages or v oices, select the item and Options > Delete . Message reader settings To change t he messag e reader settings, open the Settings tab, and define the following: Language detection â Act ivate auto matic reading language detection. Continuous reading â Activate continuous readin g of all selected messages. 124 Settings
Speech prompts â Set the message reader to insert prompts i n messages . Audio source â Listen to messages through the ear piece or loudspeaker. Language settings Select Menu > S ettings and Phone > Language . To change the device language, select Phone l anguag e . To change the writing la nguage, select Writing language . To turn predictive text input on or off, select Predictive text . Display settings Select Menu > S ettings and Phone > Display . Select from the following: Light sensor â Adjust the light sensor sensitivity of your device. The light sensor turn s the lights on when the lighting of your location is dim and off when it is bright. Font size â S e l e c t t h e s i z e o f t e xt and i cons on the display. Welcome note / logo â Select whether you want to display a note or image when you switch on the device. Light time-out â Set how long the light stays on when you stop us ing the device. Voice commands To activate enhanced voice comm ands, to start applications a nd profiles, press and hold the call key in the home screen. To control your devi ce with enhanced voice commands, press and hold the call key in the home screen, and say a voice command. The voice command is the name of the application or profile displayed in the list. Select Menu > Settings and Phone > Voice commands . Select Options and from the following: Change command â Edit the voice commands. Playback â Listen to the synthesised voice tag. Remove voice comman d â Remove a voice command that you added manually. Settings â Adjust the settings. Voice command tutorial â Open the tutorial for voice commands. Sensor settings and display rotatio n When you activate the s ensors in your device, you can control certain functions by turning the device. Select Menu > Settings and Phone > Sensor settings . Select from the following: Sensors â Activate the sensors. Turning control â Selec t Silencing calls and Snoozi ng alarms to mute calls and snooze alarms by turning your 125 Settings
device so that the disp lay faces down. Select Auto-rotate display to rotate the display content aut omatically when you turn the device on its left side or back to a vertical position. Some applications an d fea tures may not suppor t rotating the display content. Slide settings Select Menu > Settings and Phone > Phone mgmt . > Slide settings . To set the device to lock the keypad when you clos e the slide, select Lock keys with slide close . Accessory settings Select Menu > Settings and Phone > Accessories . Some accessory connectors indicate which type of accessory is connected to the device. Select an accessory and from the following: Default profil e â Set the profile that you want activated each time you connect a certain comp atible accessory to your device. Automati c answer â Select whet her you wa nt the device to answer an incomi ng call automatically after 5 seconds. If the ringing type is set to Beep once or Silent , automatic ans wer is disabled. Lights â Set whether lights rema in on after the time-out. The available settings depend on th e type of accessory. TV-out settings To change the settings for a TV-out connection, sele ct TV- Out and from the following: Default profil e â Set the profile that you want activated each time you connect a Noki a Video Connectivity Cable to your device. TV aspect ratio â Select th e aspe ct ratio of the TV: Normal or Widescreen for widescreen TVs. TV system â Select t he analogue video signal sys tem that is compatible with your TV. Flicker filter â To improve image quality on the screen of your TV , sele ct On . The flicker filter may not diminish image flicker on all TV screens. Applicat ion settings Select Menu > Settings and Phone > Applicat ion sett. . In application settings, you can edit the settings of some of the applications in your device. To edit the settings, you can al so select Options > Settings in each application. Device updates Select Menu > Settings and Phone > Phone mgmt . > Device updates . With Device updates, you ca n connect to a server and receive configuration set tings for your device, create new server profiles, view existing software version and device information, or view and manage existing server profiles. If software updates over the air are supported by your network, you may also be able to request u pdates through the device. You may receive server profiles and d ifferent configuration settings from your service providers and 126 Settings
company information manage ment department. These configuration settings may include connection and other settings used by different applications in your device. To connect to the server and receive configuration sett ings for your device, select Optio ns > Server profil es , a profile, and Options > Start configuration . To create a server profile, select Options > Server profiles > Options > New server p rofile . To delete a server profile, select the profile and Options > Delete . To check for software updates, select Opt ions > Check for updates . Warning: If you install a software upda te, you cannot use the device, even to make emergency calls , until the installation is completed and the device is restarted. Be sure to back up data before accepting ins tallation of an update. Downloading software up dates may involve the transmission of large amounts of data (network service). Make sure that the device ba ttery has enough power, or connect the charger before st arting the update. Security settin gs Phone and SIM Select Menu > S ettings and Phone > Phone mgmt. > Security settin gs > Phone and SIM card . Select from the following: PIN code request â When active, the code is requested each time the device is swit ched on. Deactivating the PIN code request may not be allowed by some SIM cards. PIN code , PIN2 co de , and Lock code â You can chan ge the PIN code, PIN2 code, and lock code. These codes can only include numbers from 0 to 9. Avoid using access codes similar to the emergency numbers to prevent accidental dialling of the emergency numb er. If you forget the PIN or PIN2 code, contact your se rvice provider. If you forget th e lock code, contact a Nokia Care point or your service provider. Phone autol ock period â To avoid unauthorised use, you can set a time-out after w hich the device automatically locks. A locked device cannot be used until the correct lock code is ente red. To turn off the autolock period, select None . Lock if SIM card changed â You can set the device to ask for the lock code when an unknown SIM card is inserted into your device. The device mai ntains a list of SIM cards that are recognised as the ownerâÂÂs cards. Remote phone lo cking â Enable or disable remote lock. Closed user group â You can specify a group of people to whom you c an call and who can call you (network service). Confirm SIM servi ces â You can set the device to display confirmation messages when you are using a SIM card service (network service). Certifica te managemen t Select Menu > Settings and Phone > Phone mgmt. > Security settings > Certificate mana gement . 127 Settings
Digital certificates should be used if you want to connect to an online bank or anothe r site or remote server for actions that involve transferring confident ial information. Th ey sh oul d a ls o b e u se d if yo u w an t t o r ed uc e th e ri s k of viruses or other malicious so ftware and be sure of the authenticity of software when downloading and installin g software. Select from the following: Authority certificates â View and edit authority certificates. Trusted site certificates â View and edit trusted site certificates. Personal certificat es â View and edit personal certificates. Phone certi ficates â View and edit device certificates. Digital certificates do not gu arantee safety; they are used to verify the origin of software. Importa nt: Even if the use of certificates makes the risks involved in remote connection s and software inst allation considerably smaller, they must be used correctly in order to benefit from increased security. The existen ce of a certificate does not offer an y protection by itself; t he certificate manager must contai n correct, authentic, or trusted certificates for increased se curity to be available. Certificates have a restricted lifetime. If "Expired certificate" or "Certificate not valid yet" is shown, even if the certificate should be valid, check th at the current date and time in your device are correct. View certificate details â check authenticity You can only be sure of the correct identity of a server when the signature and the va lidity period of a server certificate have been checked. You are notified if the identity of the server is not authen tic or if you do not have the corr ect security certificate in your devic e. To check the details of a certificate, select Options > Certificate details . The validity of the certificate is checked, and one of the follo wing notes may be displayed: Certificate not tr usted â You have not set any application to use the certificate. Expired certificate â The certificate validity period has ended. Certificate not v alid yet â The certificate validi ty period has not yet begun. Certificate corrupted â The certificate cannot be used. Contact the certificate issuer. Change the trus t settings Before changing any certific ate settings , you mus t make sure that you really trust the owner of t he certificate and that the certificate really belongs to th e listed owner. To change the settings for an authority certificate, select Options > T rust settings . Depending on the certificate, a list of the application s that can use the selected certificate is shown. For example: 128 Settings
Symbian in stallation : Yes â The certificate is able to certify the origin of a new Symbian operating system application. Internet : Yes â The certificate is able to certify servers. App. installation : Yes â The certificate is able to certify the origin of a ne w Java application. To change the value, s elect Opti ons > Change trust setting . Security module Select Menu > S ettings and Phone > Phone mgmt. > Security settin gs > Security module . To view or edit a security module (if available), select it from the list. To view detailed information about a security module, select Options > Security details . Restore origina l settings Select Menu > S ettings and Phone > Phone mgmt. > Factory settings . You can reset some of the settings to their original values. To do this, you need the lock code. After resetting, th e device may take a longer time to p ower on. Documents and fi les are unaffected. Protected content To manage digital rights licences, select Menu > Settings and Phone > Phone mgmt. > Securit y settings > Protected co ntent . Digital rights management Content owners may use different types of digital rights management (DRM) technologies to protect their intellectual property, includ ing copyrights. This device uses various types of DRM software to access DRM- protected content. Wi th this device you can access content protected with WMDRM 10, OMA DRM 1.0, and OMA DRM 2.0. If certain DRM software fails to protect the content, content owners may ask tha t such DRM softwa re's ability to access new DRM-protected content be revoked. Revocation may also prev ent renewal of such DRM- protected content alread y in your device. Revocation of such DRM software does not affect the use of content protected with other types of DRM or the use of non-DRM- protected content. Digital rights manag ement (DRM) protected content comes with an associated licence that defines your rights to use the content. If your device has OMA DRM-p r otected content, to back up both the activation keys and the content , use the backup feature of Nokia Ovi Suite. If your device has WMDRM-pr otected content, bo th the licence and the content will be lost if the device memory is formatted. You may also lo se the licence and the content if the files on your device get corrupted. Losing the licence or the content may limit your a bility to use the same 129 Settings
content on your device again. For more information, contact your service provider. Some licence may be connected to a specific SIM card, and the protected content can be accessed only if the SIM card is inserted in the device. Notifica tion light s Select Menu > Settings and Phone > Notifi cation lights . To turn the standby breathing ligh t on or off, select Standby br. light . When the standby breathing li ght is turned on, the menu key lights up periodically. To turn the notification light on or off, select Notification light . When the notification light is turned on , the menu key lights up for a period you define to notify of missed events, such as missed calls or unread messages. Application manager About Application manager Select Menu > Settings and Application mgr. . With Application manager, you can see the software packages installed in your device. You can view details of installed applications, remove applications, and define installation settings. You can install the following types of applications and software to your device: ⢠JME applications based on Java⢠te chnology with the .jad or .jar file extensions ⢠Other applications and soft ware suitable for the Symbian operating system with the .sis or .sisx file extensions ⢠Widgets with the .wgz file extension Only install software that is compatible with your device. Install applications You can transfer installation files to your device from a compatib le compute r, downlo ad them during browsing, or receive them in a multim edia message, as an e-mail attachment, or using othe r co nnectivity methods, such as Bluetooth connectivi ty. You can use Nokia Application Installer in Nokia Ovi Suite to install an application to your device. Icons in Application manage r indicate the following: SIS or SISX application Java applicati on widgets application installed in the memory card application installed in the mass memory Important: Only install and use applications and other software from trusted s ources, such as app lications that are Symbian Signed or ha ve passed the Java Verified⢠testing. Before installation, note the following: 130 Settings
⢠To view the application ty pe, version number, and the supplier or manufacturer of the application, select Options > View details . To view the security certificate details of the application, select Details: > Certificates: > View details . Control the use of digital certificates in Certificate management. ⢠If you install a file that contains an update or repair to an existing application, you can only restore the original application if you have the original installation file or a full backup copy of the removed software package. To restore the original application, remove the application, and install th e application again from the original ins tallation file or the backup copy. The JAR file is required for installing Java applications. If it is missing, the device may ask you to download it. If there is no access point defined for the application, you are asked to select one. To install an applicat ion, do the following: 1 To locate an insta llation file, select Menu > Settings and Applicatio n mgr. . Alternatively, search installation file s using File mana ger, or select Messaging > Inbo x , and open a mes sage that contains an installation file. 2 In Applicat ion manager, select Options > Install . In other applications, select the installation file to start the installation. During installat ion, the device shows information about the progress of the insta llation. If you inst all an application witho ut a digital sign ature or certification, the device di splays a warning. Continue installation only if you ar e sure of the origin and contents of the applicati on. To start an insta lled applicat ion, locate the application in the menu, and select the application. If the application does not have a default folder de fined, it is installed in the Installed apps. folder in the main menu. To see which software packa g es are installed or removed and when, select Options > Vie w log . Important: Your device can only support one antivirus application . Having more than one applicati on with antivirus function ality could af fect performanc e and operation or cause the devi ce to stop functioning. After you install app lications to a comp atible memory card, installation files (.sis, .sisx) remain in the device memory. The files may use large amounts of memory and prevent you from storing other files. To maintain sufficient memory, use Nokia Ovi Suite to back up installation files to a compatible PC, t hen us e the file manager to remo ve the installation files from the device memory. If the .sis file is a message attachment , delete the message from the Messaging inbox. Remove applications Select Menu > Settings and Application mg r. . To remove a software package, select Installed apps. > Options > Uninstall . Select Yes to confirm. If you remove softwa re, you can only reinstall it if you have the original software package or a full backup of the 131 Settings
removed software package. If you remove a software package, you may no longer be able to op en documents created with that software. If another software packag e depends on the software package that you removed, the other software package may stop working. Refer to the documentation of the installed software package for details. Application manager settings Select Menu > Settings and Application mgr. . Select Installation settings and from the following: Software installation â Select whether Symbian software that has no verified digital signature can be installed. Online certificate check â Select to check the online certificates before inst alling an ap plication. Default web address â Set the default web address used when checking online certificates. Calling sett ings Call settings With call settings, you can defi ne call specific settings in your device. Select Menu > Settings and Calling > Call . Select from the following: Send my caller ID â Select Ye s to show your phone number to the person you are calling. To use the setting agreed upon with your service provider, select Set by network ) (network service). Send my internet call ID â Select Yes to sho w your internet call ID to the person you are calling. Call waiting â Set your device to notify you of incoming calls while you are in a call (network service), or check whether the feature is activated. Internet call waiting â Set you r devic e to no tify yo u of a new incoming internet ca ll while you are in a call. Internet call alert â To set your device to alert for incoming internet calls, select On . If you select Off , you receive only a notification if you missed a call. Reject call with message â Send a text message when you reject a call, informing the caller why you could not answer the call. Message text â Write the standard text message that is sent when you reject a call. Own video in recvd. call â A l l o w o r d e ny v i d e o s e n d i ng during a video call from your device. Image in v ideo call â If video is not sent during a video call, select the image to be displayed instead. Automatic redial â Se t your device to make a ma ximum of 10 attempts to connect the ca ll after an unsuccessful call attempt. To stop automatic re dialling, press the end key. Show call duration â Display the leng th of a call during a call. Summary after call â Display the length of a call after a call ends. Speed dialling â Activate speed dialling. Anykey answer â Activate a nykey answer. Line in us e â This setting (network service) is shown only if the SIM card supports two subscriber numbers, that is, two phone lines. Select which phone line you want to use 132 Settings
t o m a k e c a l l s o r s e n d t e x t m e ssages. Calls on both lines can be answered irrespective of the selected line. If you select Line 2 , and have not subscribed to t his network service, you are not able to make calls . When line 2 is selected, is displayed in the home screen. Line change â Prevent phone li ne selection (network service), if supported by yo ur SIM card. To change this setting, you need the PIN2 code. The available options may vary. Call divert Select Menu > S ettings and Callin g > Call divert . Call divert allows you to divert incoming calls to your voice mailbox or another phone number. For details, contact your service provider. 1 Select the type of calls to divert and a diverting option. For example, to divert all voice calls, select Voice calls > All voice calls . 2 To activate call divert, select Activate . 3 To divert calls to your voice mailbox, select To voice mailbox . 4 To divert calls to anot her phone number, select To other number , and enter the number, or select Find to retrieve a number saved in the cont acts list. Several diverting opti ons can be active at the sa me time. When all calls are diverted, is displayed in the home screen. Call barring Select Menu > Settings and Calling > Call barring . Call barring (network service) allows you to restrict the calls that you make or receive with the device. For example, you can res trict all outgoing internation al calls or incoming calls when you are abroad. To change th e settings, you need the barring password from your service provider. Voice call barring Select the desired barring option and Activate , Deactivate , or Check stat us . Call barring affects all calls, including data calls. Internet call barring To select whether anonymous calls are allowed from the internet, select Anon ymous call barring . 133 Settings
Troubleshooting To view frequently asked ques tions about your device, see the product support pages a t www.nokia.com/support . Q: What is my password for the lock, PIN, or PUK codes? A: The default lock code is 12345. If you forget the lock code, contact your device dealer. If you forget a PIN or PUK code, or if you have not received such a code, contact your network service provider. For information about passwords, contact your access point provider, for ex ample, a commercial internet service provider (ISP) or network service provider. Q: How do I close an ap plication that is not responding? A: Select Options > Show open apps. , and go to the application using the menu key. Press and hold the menu key to open the application, and select Options > Exit . Q: Why do images l ook smudgy? A: Ensure that the camera lens protection windows are clean. Q: Why do missing, di scoloured, or bri ght dots app ear on the screen ev ery time I swit ch on my device? A: This is a characteristic of this type of display. S ome displays may contain pixels or dots that remain on or off. This is normal, not a fault. Q: Why can't my Nokia device establish a GPS connection? A: Establishing a GP S connect ion may take from a couple of seconds t o several minut es. Establishing a GPS connection in a vehicle may ta ke longer. If you are indoors, go outdoors to receive a better signal. If you are outdoors, move to a more open space. Ensure that your hand does not cover the GPS antenna of your device. If th e weather conditions are bad, the si gnal strength may be affected. Some vehicles have tinted (a thermic) windows, which may block the satellite signals. Q: Why canâÂÂt I find my frien dâÂÂs device while using Bluetooth connectivity? A: Check that both devices are compatible, have a ctivated Bluetooth connectivity, a nd are not in hidden mode. Check also that the distance between the tw o devices is not over 10 metres (33 feet) and that there are no walls or other obstructions between the devices. 134 Troubleshooting
Q: Why canâÂÂt I end a Bluetooth connection? A: If another device is connected to your device, you can close the connection from the other device or deactivat e Bluetooth connectivity in your device. Select Menu > Settings and Connectivity > Bluet ooth > Bluetooth > Off . Q: Why can't I see a wireless LAN (WLAN) access point even though I know I'm within it s range? A: The WLAN access point may use a hidden service set identifier (SSID). You ca n only access networks that use a hidden SSID if you kno w the co rrect SSID, and have created a WLAN internet access poin t for the n etwork on your Nokia device. Q: How do I turn the wire less LAN (WLA N) off on my Nokia device? A: The WLAN on your N okia device is deactivated wh en you are not connected or trying to conn ect to another access point, or not scanni ng for available networks . To further reduce battery consumption, you can specify that your Nokia device does not scan, or scans less often, for available networks in th e background. The WLAN is deactivated in between background scans. To change the backgroun d scan settings, do th e following: 1 Select Menu > Settings and Connectivity > Wireless LAN . 2 To increase the background scan time int erval, adjust the time in Scan for networks. To stop background scans, select Show WLAN availability > Never . 3 To save your ch anges, select Back . When Show WLAN availability is set to Never , the WLAN availability icon is not displayed in the home screen. However, you can still manually scan for available WLAN networks, and connect to WLAN networks as usual. Q: What do I do if the memory is full? A: Delete items from the memory. If No t enough memory to perform operation. Delete so me data first. or Memory low. Delete so me data from pho ne memory. is displayed when you are de leting several items at the same time, delete items one by one, beginning with the smallest items. Q: Why canâÂÂt I select a contact for my message? A: The contact card does not have a phone number, address, or e-mail address. Select Menu > Contacts and the relevant contact, and edi t the contact card. Q: How can I en d the data connection whe n the device starts a data connection again and again? A: The device may be trying to retrieve a multimedia message from the multimedia mes sage centre. To stop the device from making a data connection , select Menu > Messaging and Optio ns > Settings > Multimedia message > Multimedia retriev al . Select Manual to have 135 Troubleshooting
the multimedia messaging ce ntre save messages to be retrieved later, or Off to ignore all incoming multimedia messages. If you select Manual , you receive a notification when you have a new message in the multime dia message centre. If you select Off , the device does not make any network connections related to multimedia messaging. To set the device to use a packet data connection only if you start an application or action that needs it, select Menu > S ettings and Connectivity > Admin. settings > Packet data > Packe t data connection > When needed . If this does not help, switch the device off and then on again. Q: Can I use m y Nokia devi ce as a fax modem with a compatible PC? A: You cannot use your device as a fax m odem. However, with call diverting (network service), you can divert incoming fax calls to a fax number. Q: How do I cali brate the scre en? A: The screen is calibrated at the factory. If it is necessary to recalibrate the screen, select Me nu > Settings and Phone > Touch input > Touch screen calibration . Follow the instructions. 136 Troubleshooting
Green tips Here are tips on how you can co ntribute to protect ing the environment. Save energy When you have fully charged the battery and disconnected the charger from the device, unplug the charge r from the wall outlet. You do not need t o charge your battery so often if you do the following: ⢠Close and disable applic ations, services, and connections when not in use. ⢠Decrease the brightness of the screen. ⢠Set the device to enter the power saver mode after the minimum period of inactivity, if available in your device. ⢠Disable unnecessa ry sounds, such as keypad and ringing tones. Recycle Most of the materials in a Nokia phone are recyclable. Check how to recycle your Nokia products at www.nokia.com/werecycle, or with a mobile device, www.nokia.mobi/werecy cle. Recycle packaging and user guid es at your local recycling scheme. Save paper This user guide helps you get started with your device. For more detailed instructions, open the in-device help (in most applications, select Options > Help ). For further support, see www.nokia.com/support. Learn more For more information on the environmental attributes of your device, see www.nokia.com/ecodeclaration. Product and safe ty information Acces sori es Warning: Use only batter ies, chargers, and accesso ries approved by Nokia fo r use with this particular model. The use of any other types may invalidate any approval or warranty, and may be danger ous. In particular, use of unapproved chargers or batt eries may present a risk of fir e, explosion, leakage, or other hazard. For availability o f approved accessori es, please check with your de aler. When you disconnect the power cord of any accessor y, grasp and pull the plug, not the co rd. Battery Battery and charger informatio n Your device is pow ered by a recharg eable battery. The battery intended for use with this device is BL-4D. Nokia may make addit ional battery models availab le for this device. This device is intended for us e wh en suppl ied with power from t he follow ing chargers: AC-10. The ex act charger model num ber may vary depending o n the type of plug. The pl ug variant is ide ntified by one o f the followin g: E, EB, X, AR, U, A, C, K, or UB. The battery can be charged and discharged hundreds of times, but it will eventually wear out. Whe n the talk and stand by times are not iceably shorter than no rmal, 137 Green tips
replace the battery. U se only Nokia approved batteries, and recha rge your battery only with Nokia approved chargers designated for this device. If a battery is being used for the fir st time or if the battery has not been used for a prolonged perio d, it may be necessary to connect the charger, then di sconnect and reconnect it to begin charging the battery. If th e battery is c ompletely discharge d, it may take several minutes before th e charging indi cator appears on the display or before any calls c an be made. Safe removal. Al ways switch the device off and di sconnect the charg er before removing the battery. Proper chargi ng. Unplug th e charger fro m the electrical plug and the d evice when not in use. Do not leave a fully charged battery connected to a charger, since overcharging may shorten its lifet ime. If le ft unused, a fully charged battery will lose its charge o ver time. Avoid extreme tempe ratures. Always tr y to keep the battery between 15ðC and 25ðC (59ðF and 77ðF). Extreme te mperat ures re duce the ca pacity a nd life time of th e battery . A device with a hot or cold batt ery may not work temp orarily . Batter y performance is pa rticularly limite d in temperatures we ll below free zing. Do not short-circuit. Acc idental short-circuiting can occur when a metallic object such as a coin, clip, or pen causes direct connect ion of the positive ( ) and negative (-) termin als of t he batt ery. ( These look li ke me tal stri ps on th e batt ery.) T his might happen, for example, when you carry a spar e battery in yo ur pocket or p urse. Short- circuiting the terminals may dama ge the battery or t he connecting object. Disposal. Do not dispose of batte ries in a fire as they may explode. Dispose of batte ries according to local regulations. Please r ecycle when possible. Do not dispose as household waste. Leak. Do not d ismantle, cut, open, crush, bend, puncture, or shred cells or batte ries. In the event o f a batter y leak, prevent batter y li qu i d c o nt ac t wi t h s k in or e ye s. If t hi s happens, flush the affected ar eas immediat ely with water, or seek medica l help. Damage. Do not modify, remanufa cture, attempt to insert foreign objects into the battery, or i mmerse or expo se it to wat er or other liquids. Batte ries may explod e if damaged. Correct use. Us e the battery only for its intended purpos e. Improper b attery use may result in a fire, explosion, or other hazard. If the device or battery is dropped, especially on a hard surface, and you b elieve the battery has been d amaged, take it to a service cent re for inspection before continuing to use it. Never use any charger or battery that is damaged. K eep your batter y out of the reac h of small children. Nokia battery authentication guidelines Always use original Nokia batteries for your safety. To check that you are getti ng an original Noki a battery, purcha se it from a Nokia authorised serv ice centre or dealer, and inspect the hologram label using the following steps: Authenticate hologram 1 W hen you look at the hologram on the label, you should see the Nokia connecting hands symbol from one angle and t he Nokia Original Enhancements logo when looki ng from anot her angle . 2 When you angle the hologram left, right, d own and up, you should see 1, 2, 3 and 4 dots on each side respectively. Successful completion of the steps is not a total assurance of the authenticity of the battery. If you cannot confirm authenticity or if you hav e any r eason to belie ve th at your Nokia battery with the ho logram on the label is not an authentic Nokia ba ttery, you should refrain from using it, and take it to the nearest Nokia authorised service centre or dealer for assistance. 138 Product and safety information
To find out more a bout original Nokia bat teries, see www.nokia.com/battery. Taking care of your device Your device is a product of superior design and crafts manship and should be treated with care. The following suggestions will help you protect your warrant y coverage. ⢠Keep the devi ce dry. Prec ipitation, humid ity, and all type s of liquids or moistu re can contain minerals that will corrod e el ectronic cir cuits. If your devi ce does get wet, remo ve the battery, a nd allow the d evice to dry co mpletely before replacing it. ⢠Do not use or s tore the device in d usty, dirty areas . Its moving parts and electronic comp onents can be dama ged. ⢠Do not store the device in hig h or cold temper ature. High temp eratures can shorten the life o f electronic de vices, damage b atteries, and w arp or melt certain plastics. When the device warms to its nor mal temperature from a cold temperature, moi sture can form insi de the device and damage electronic circuit boards. ⢠Do not attempt to open the devic e other than as instructed in th is guide. ⢠Do not drop, knock, or shake the device. Rough handling can break inter nal circuit boards and fine mechanic s. ⢠Do not use harsh chemicals, cleaning solvents, or strong det ergents to clean the devi ce. Only use a soft, clean, dry cloth t o clean the su rface of th e device. ⢠Do not paint t he device. Paint c an clog the moving parts and pr event proper operation . ⢠Use only the supplied or an approved rep lacement antenna. Unauthor ised antennas, modificatio ns, or attachments could d amage the device and may violate regulations gover ning radio devices. ⢠Use chargers indoors. ⢠Backup all data you want to keep, such as contact s and calendar notes. ⢠To rese t the device from ti me to t ime fo r opti mum p erforman ce, pow er off t he device an d remove t he battery . These suggestions apply equally to your de vice, battery, charger, or any accessory. Recycle Always return yo ur used electr onic products, b atteries, and packaging materi als to dedicated co llection points. This w ay you help prevent uncontrolled wast e disposal and promote the recycling o f materials. Ch eck product envir onmental informati on and how to recycle your Nokia pro duc ts at www.nokia.com/we recycle, or nokia.mobi/werecycle. The crosse d-out whe eled-bin symbol on your produ ct, battery , liter ature, or packaging reminds you th at all electrical and electronic products, ba tteries, and accumulators must be taken to s eparate coll ection at the e nd of their wo rking life. This requirement applies in the Europ ean Un ion. Do not dispose of these pro ducts as unsorted municipal waste. For more enviro nmental informat ion, see the product Eco - Declarations at www.nokia.com/environment. Additional safety information Small children Your device and its accessories are not toys. They may contain smal l parts. Keep them out of the reach of small children . Operating environment This device meets RF expos ure guidelines in the normal use posit ion at the ear or at least 1.5 centime tres (5/8 inch) awa y from the body. Any carry case, be lt clip, or hold er for body-worn operation should not contain metal and should position the device the above-s tated distance fro m your body. To send data fi les or messages req uires a quality co nnection to the network. Data files or messages may be delayed until such a connection is available. Follo w the separation distance instructi ons until the transmission is completed. Parts of the device are magne tic. Metallic mat erials may be attra cted to the device . Do not place cr edit cards or o ther magnetic s torage media near the device, b ecause information st ored on them may be erased. Medical devices Operation of rad io transmitting equip ment, including wireles s phones, may inter fere with the func tion of ina dequately protec ted medical devices. Consult a physician or the manufacturer o f the medical device to d etermine whether they are a dequately shielded f rom external RF e nergy. Switch off your devic e when regulations posted instruct you to do so. Hospitals or health care facilities ma y use equipment sensitive to external RF energy. Implanted medical devices Manufacturers of med ical devices recommend a minimum separation of 15.3 centimetres (6 inches) between a wireless device and an implanted medical device, 139 Product and safety information
such as a pacemaker or implanted cardioverter d efibrillator, to avo id potential interference wit h the medical device. Persons wh o have such devices should: ⢠Always keep the wireless device more than 15.3 centimetr es (6 inches) fr om the medica l device. ⢠Not carry the wireless d evice in a breast pocket. ⢠Hold the wirel ess device to the ear opposite the medical d evice. ⢠Turn the wireless device off if there is any reaso n to suspect that inte rference is taking place. ⢠Follow the manufacturer direct ions for the implanted medica l device. If you have any questions about using yo ur wireless device wi th an implanted medical device, consult your health car e provider. Hearing aids Some digital wireless devices may interfere with some hearing ai ds. Vehicles RF signals may affect improperly installed or inad equately shielded electr onic systems in motor vehicles such as electronic fuel injection, electroni c antilock braking, electronic speed contr ol, and air bag systems. For more inf ormation, check with the manufacturer of your vehicle or its equipment. Only qualified personnel should ser vice the device or install the device in a vehi cle. Faulty instal lation or servic e may be dangero us and may i nvalid ate you r warran ty. Check regularly that all wi reless device equipment in your vehicle is mounted and operating pr operly. Do not s tore or carr y flammable liquids , gases, or ex plosive materials in the same compar tment as the device, its parts, or accessorie s. Remember that air bags inf late with great force. Do not place your device or accesso ries in the air bag dep loymen t area. Switch off your device before boarding an ai rcraft. The use of wireless t eledevices in an aircraft may be dangerous t o the operation o f the aircraft and may be illegal. Potentially explosive environments Switch off yo ur device in any a rea with a p otentially expl osive atmospher e. Obey all posted instructions. Sparks in such areas coul d cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily injury or death. Switch off the device at refuelling points such as near ga s pumps at service stat ions. Observe restriction s in fuel depots, storage, and distribution area s; chemical plants; o r where blasting oper ations are in progress. Areas with a poten tially explosive atmo sphere are often, but not always, clearly marked. They include areas where yo u would be advised to turn off your vehicle engine, below deck on boat s, chemical transfer or storage faciliti es and where the air contains chemicals or particles such a s grain, dust, or met al powders. You should check with the manufacturers o f vehicles using liquefied petr oleum gas (such as propane or but ane) to determin e if this devi ce can be safely used in their vicinity. Emergency calls Important: This device operates using radio signals, wireless netw orks, landline networks, and user-programmed funct ions. If your device supports voice calls over the internet (int ernet calls), activat e both the inter net calls and t he cellular phone. The device will attem pt to make emergency call s over both the ce llular networks a nd through your internet call provider if both are activated. Connect ions in all conditions cannot be guaranteed. You should never re ly solely on any wirele ss device fo r essential communications like medical emergencies. To make an emergency call : 1 If the device is not on, switch it on. Check for adequate signal str ength. Depending on your d evice, you may also need to complete the following: ⢠Insert a SIM card if your device uses one. ⢠Remove certain call restrictions you have activated in your device. ⢠Change your pr ofile from offl ine profile mo de to an active profile. ⢠If the screen and keys are locked, sli de the lock switc h on the side of t he device to unlock them. 2 P ress the end key as ma ny times as needed to clear the di splay and ready th e device f or calls . 3 O pen the dia ller by selec ting the d ialler icon ( ). 4 Ent er the official emergency numb er for your present l ocation. Emergency numbers vary by location. 5 P ress the call key. When making an emergency call, give all t he necessary information as accurately as possible. Your wireless device may be the only means of communication at the sc ene of an accident. Do not en d the call until given permission to do so. Certification informa tion (SAR) This mobile device meets guidel ines for exposure to radio waves. Your mobile devic e is a radio transmitter and receiver. It i s designed not to exceed the limits for exposure to radio waves recommend ed by international gu idelines. These guidelines were develop ed by the in dependent scientific organi sation ICNIRP 140 Product and safety information
and include s afety margins designed to assure the prot ection of all persons , regardless of age and health. The exposure guidelines fo r mobile devices employ a unit of measurement k nown as the Spe cific Absorption Rate or SAR. The S AR limit stated in the ICNIRP guidelines is 2.0 watts/kilogram (W/kg) ave raged over 10 grams of tissue. Tests for SAR are conducted using stan dard operating positions with the device transmitting at it s highest certified power level in all tested frequency band s. The actual SAR level of an operating device can be be low the maximum value because the device is d esigned to use only the power required to reach the network. Tha t amount changes depending on a number o f factors such as how close you are to a network base station . The highest SAR valu e under the ICNIRP g uidelines for us e of the device at the ear is 0.67 W/kg. Use of device accessories may result i n different SAR va lues. SAR values ma y vary depending on national reporting a nd testing requirements a nd the network band. Additional SAR information may be pr ovided under prod uct information at www.nokia.com. 141 Product and safety information
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY Hereby, NOKIA CORPORATION declares that this RM-555 product is in compliance with the essential requirements and other r elevant provisions of D irective 1999/5/EC. A copy of the Declarati on of Conformity can be found at ht tp://www.nokia.com / phones/declaration_of_conformity/. Nokia, Nokia Connecting People, Nserie s, N97 mini, N-Gage, Nokia Original Accessories logo, and Ovi are trademarks or registered tradem arks of Nokia Corporation. Nokia tune is a sound mark of Nokia C orporation. Other product and company names mentioned herein ma y be trademarks o r tradenames of their respective owners . Reproduc tion, tra nsfer, dis tributio n, or storage of part or al l of the con tents i n this document in a ny form wi thout the pr ior written permission of Nokia is prohibited . Nokia operates a policy of continuous development. No kia reserves the right t o make changes and improv ements to any of the products de scribed in this d ocument without prior no tice. US Patent No 5818437 and other pending patents. T9 text input software Copyright Symbian and Symbian OS are trademarks of Sy mbian Ltd. Java and all Java-b ased marks are trad emarks or registered tr ademarks of Sun Micros ystems , Inc. reserved. This product is licensed under the MPEG- 4 Visual Patent Portfolio License (i) for personal and noncommercial use in conne ction with information which has been encoded in comp liance with t he MPEG-4 Visu al Standard by a consumer engage d in a perso nal and nonco mmerci al acti vity an d (ii) for use in connection with MPEG-4 video provided by a licensed video pr ovider. No lice nse is granted or shall be implied for any other use. Additional information, including that related to promotional, internal, and commercial uses, may be obtained from MPEG LA, LLC. See http:// www.mpegla.co m. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL NOKIA OR ANY OF ITS LICENSORS BE RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY LOSS OF DATA OR INCOME OR ANY SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL , CONSEQUENTIAL OR INDIRECT DAMAGES HOWSOEVER CAUSED. The third-party applicat ions provided w ith your device may have been created and may be owned by persons or entiti es not affiliat ed with or relat ed to Nokia. Nokia does not own the cop yrights or intell ectual p roperty ri ghts to th e third- party applications. As such, Nokia does not take any responsibility for end-user support, functionality of the applications, or t he i nformation in the applicat ions or these materials. Nokia do es not provid e any warranty fo r the third-part y applications. BY USING THE APPLICATIONS YOU ACKNOWLEDGE THAT THE APPLICATIONS ARE PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPR ESS OR IMPLIED, TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED B Y APPLICABLE LAW. YOU FURT HER ACKNOWLEDGE THAT NEITHER NOKIA NOR ITS AFFILIATES MAKE ANY REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF TITLE, MERCHANTABILITY OR FI TNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OR THAT TH E APPLICATIONS WILL NOT INFRINGE ANY THIRD-PARTY PATENTS, COPYRIGHTS, TRADEMARKS, OR OTHER RIGHTS. THE CONTENTS OF THIS DOCUMENT ARE PROVIDED "AS IS". EXCEPT AS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NO WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, B UT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMP LIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PUR POSE, ARE MADE IN RELATION TO THE ACCURACY, RELIABILITY OR CONTENTS OF THIS DOCUMENT. NOKIA RESERVES THE RIGHT TO REVISE THIS DOCUMENT OR WITHDRAW IT AT ANY TIME WITHOUT PRIOR NOTICE. Reverse engineering of software in the device i s prohibited to t he extent permitte d by appl icable law. Inso far as thi s user gu ide conta ins any limit ations on Nokia 's representations, warr anties, damages and liabilities, such limitati ons shall likewise limit any representati ons, warranties, dama ges and liabilities o f Nokia's licensors. The availability of particular prod ucts and applications and services for these products may vary b y region. Please check with your No kia dealer for details and availability of language op tions. This device may contain commo dities, technology é 2010 Nokia. All rights reserved. This product includes software licensed from Sy mbian Software Ltd é1998-2010. Portions of the Nokia Maps software ar e é1996-2010 The FreeType Project. Al l rights é 1997-2010. Tegic Communications, Inc. All rights reserved.
or software subject to export laws and regulations from the US and other countrie s. Diversion contrary to law is pro hibited. FCC/INDUSTRY CANADA NOTIC E Your device may cause TV or radio inter ference (for ex ample, when us ing a telephon e in close pr oximity to re ceiving equipment ). The FCC or Industry Can ada can requir e you to stop using your telephone if such interference cannot be eliminated. If you require assistance, contact your local se rvice facility. This devi ce complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operatio n is subject to the foll owing two conditions : (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device mus t accept any interference received, includi ng interferenc e that may cause und esired opera tion. Any changes or modifications not ex pressly approved by Nokia could void the user's authority t o operate this equipment. /Issue 3 EN
Index Symbols/Nu mbers 3-D ringing tones 114 A A-GPS (as sisted GPS) 78 access codes 10 access points 64 â groups 65 accessories 126 accounts 51 active notes 122 â settings 123 active toolbar â in Photos 99 alarm â calendar note 116 alarm clock 117 albums, media 100 answering calls 35 antennas 16 application manager 130 â settings 132 application settings 126 applications 130 assisted GPS (A-GPS) 78 attachments 54, 56 audio message s 53 auto-update for time/date 117 B background image 114, 115 backing up device memory 119 battery â charging 17 â inserting 14 â saving power 10 blogs 74 Bluetooth connectivit y â blocking devices 70 â device address 69 â device visibility 68 â pairing devices 69 â receiving data 70 â security 69 â sending data 69 â settings 68 â turning on/off 68 bookmarks 75 browser â bookmarks 75 â browsing pages 73, 74 â cache memory 75 â searching conte nt 74 â security 75 â settings 76 â toolbar 73 C cable connection 71 cache memory 75 calculator 122 calendar 116 â toolbar 116 calendar entry â deleting 116 â sending 116 call log 4 1, 42 call waiting 36 calls 34 â answering 35 â conference 35 â dialled numbers 29 â duration of 42 â internet calls 39 â options during 34 â redialling 132 â rejecting 35 â restricting See fixed dialling â settings 132 â video calls 37 camera â assign ing images to contacts 94 â flash 94 â image mode 93 â image quality 96 â indicators 93 â location information 94 â options 94 â recording 96 â scenes 95 â self-timer 95 144 Index
â sending image s 94 â sequence mode 95 â settings 92, 96 â video mode 96 â video quality 97 cell broadcast messages 57 certificates 127 charging the battery 17 chat services (IM) 49 clock 115, 117 â setting date 117 â settin g time 117 computer connections 71 See also data connections conference calls 35 connectors 14 contacts 43 â adding 43 â copying 45 â creating groups 46 â defaults 43 â deleting 43 â editing 43 â favourites 27 â groups 46 â ringing tones 44 â saving 43 â sending 43 â synchronising 67 â voice tags 43 content â synchronising, sending, and retrieving 24 converter 121 copyright protection 129 currency â converter 121 D data connections â cable 71 â device updates 126 â PC connectivity 71 â synchronisation 67 date and time 117 date and time settings 124 declining calls See rejecting calls device updates 126 dictionary 120 dismissing calls 35 display rotation 125 display settings 125 DRM (digital rights management) 129 duration of calls 42 E e-mail 61 â notifications 26, 27 e-mail messages 55 end all calls option 36 F factory settings â restoring 129 feeds, news 74 file management 120 file manager 119, 120 â backing up files 120 â organisi ng files 119 fixed dialling 45 FM radio 109 G general information 8 GPS â position requests 80 GPS (global positioning system) 78 H headset 18 help application 8 home screen 27, 114, 115 â contact s 27 â music player 27 â notifications 26 HSDPA (high-speed downlink packet access) 30 I IAPs (internet access points) 64 IM (instant mes saging) 49 145 Index
images 99 â editing 101 â sharing online 103 inbox â message 54 inbox, message 54 indicators and icons 2 7 installing applications 130 internet browser 73 internet calls 38 â log in 38 â making 3 9 â settings 39 internet connection 73 See also browser invitations â video shar ing 41 J Java applications 130 JME Java application support 130 K keyb oard 21 keygua rd 23 keypa d lock 23 keys 13, 14 L landmarks 80 language settings 125 licences 129 location information 78 lock code 10, 16 locking â remotely 10 loudspeaker 29 M Mail for Exchange 61 mailbox â e-mail 55 â video 35 â voice 35 Maps 83 â browsing 84 â changing views 85 â compass 84 â display elements 85 â downloading maps 91 â driving routes 90 â Favourites 88 â finding locations 85 â navigating 90 â organising places 88 â organising routes 88 â planning routes 86 â positioning 83 â saving places 87 â saving routes 87 â sending places 88 â sharing locations 89 â synchronising 88 â traffic information 91 â viewing location details 86 â voice guidance 89 â walking 90 mass memory â formatting 120 media â RealPlayer 117 memory â clearing 11 â web cache 75 memory card 120 â backing up files 120 message reader â selecting voice 124 messages â e-mail 55 â folders for 53 â icon for incoming 54 â multimedia 54 â settings 57 â voice 35 Mini Map 74 MMS (multimedia mess age service) 53, 54, 58 multimedia messages 53, 54, 58 music player 27, 104 â playlists 105 â transferring music 106 music store 106 muting sound 35 my music 104 146 Index
N navigation tools 78 network settings 62 news feeds 74 Nokia account 31, 47, 51 Nokia Ma p Loader 91 Nokia Music Store 106 nokia software upda ter 9 Nokia support information 8 notes 119 notification light 130 O offline profile 30 outbox, message 53 Ovi Contacts 47 â adding friends 48 â availability status 48 â connection settings 52 â landmarks 51 â personalisation 52 â presence 51 â profiles 48 â searching 48 â settings 50 â sharing your location 48, 51 â synchronising 50 Ovi Store 31 â creating an account 31 â details 32 â purchasing 32 â searching 31 â settings 32 â sharing with friends 32 â signing in 31 P packet data connection â access point settings 66 â counters 42 â settings 71 page overview 74 PDF reader 123 personal certificates 127 personalisation 114 photographs See camera photos 99 â file de tails 99 â red-eye 102 â tags 100 â toolbar 99 â viewing 98 PIN code 10 pin code 16 PIN2 code 10 podcasting 107 â directories 108 â downloads 108 â playing 109 â settings 106 positioning information 78 positioning settings 81 presence 51 presentations, multimedia 55 profiles 25, 114 â changing profiles 28 â offline restrictions 30 â personalisation 25 proximity sensor 34 proxy settings 66 PUK codes 10 R radio 109 â listening 109 â stations 110 RealPlayer 117 recent calls 41 recording â video clips 96 red-eye removal 102 rejecting calls 35 remote locking 10 remote mailbox 55 remote SIM mode 70 removing applications 131 ringing tones 25, 114 roaming 62 S scenes 95 search â settings 29 searching 29 â podcasts 107 147 Index
security â certificates 127 â web browser 75 security code 10 security module 129 self-timer â camera 95 sensors 125 sent messa ges folder 53 service commands 57 service messages 55 settings 126 â access point na me control 72 â access points 64, 65 â active notes 123 â applications 126 â Bluetooth connectivity 68 â browser 76 â call barring 133 â call divert 133 â calls 132 â camera 92 â certificates 127 â date and time 124 â display 125 â e-mail notifications 27 â internet calls 39 â language 125 â messages 58 â network 62 â packet data 7 1 â packet data access points 6 6 â podcasting 106 â positioning 81 â SIP 72 â slide 126 â tv-out 126 â video 112 â video sharing 40 â WLAN 64, 66 Share online 27 shared video 39 sharing your location 50 shooting modes â camera 95 SIM card â inserting 14 â messages 56 SIM card security 127 SIP 72 slide settings 126 slide show 100 SMS (short mes sage service) 53 software â updating 9 software applications 130 software updates 9 songs 104 speakerphone 29 speech 124 speed dialling 36 support resources 8 Symbian applications 130 synchronisation 50 synchronisation of data 67 T text messages â receiving and reading 54 â replying to 54 â sending 53 â settings 57 â SIM messages 56 themes 114 time and date 117 tones 25, 114 â 3-D 114 touch screen 19 transferring content 24 troubleshooting 134 TV configuration 126 TV-out mode 101 U updates 9 UPIN code 10 UPUK code 10 USB cable connection 71 USB charging 17 useful information 8 V video â downloading 111 â my videos 112 â playing 112 148 Index
â settings 112 â shared 41 â transferring video clips 112 â video feeds 112 â viewing 111 video calls 37, 38 video clips 99 â editing 102 â shared 39 video set tings 97 video shar ing â requirements 39 â sharing live video 40 â sharing video clips 40 voice calls See calls voice commands 29, 36, 125 See also voice dialling voice control 125 voice dialling 36 voice mai lbox 29 volume controls 29 W web browser 73 web connection 73 web logs 74 week settings â calendar alarm 116 widgets 27 wireless LAN (WLAN) 63 wireless LAN set tings 64 WLAN (wireless local area network) 66 wrist strap 19 Z Zip manager 122 149 Index